











# 










The Manor 
School 


■7 




BY 

MRS. L. T. MEADE 

I 

AUTHOR OF “a BUNCH OF CHERRIES,” “ DADDY’s GIRL,” “THE 
TIME OF ROSES,” “ BAD LITTLE HANNAH,” ETC., ETC. 



5 > 5 > 


> } ) 
> 

> > 


THE MERSHON 

RAHWAY, N. J. 


COMPANY 

NEW YORK 


C / 

i ' y 

/ . 

N 


THE LIBi^ARY OF 
CONGRESS. 


I wo v-opies received 

SEP 15 1903 

''^Copyright Entry 

/vC/f j 

CLASS ^ XXc. No 
^- 1 — V" 
COPY 0 . 


Copyright, 1903, by 

THE MERSHON COMPANY 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 

I. The Attic of Desire, 

II. The Mystery, 

III. A Wild Scheme, 

IV. Grandmother's Dinner, 

V. Change of a Sovereign, 

i ^I. Six Long Years, 

VII. “The Reformatory School Is the Punishment 

FOR Me,” 

VIII. Play-Acting, 

IX. A Night In the Slums, 

X. Judith Ford, 

XI. Little Providences, 

XII. Going to School, 

XIII. The Manor School, 

XIV. Schoolgirls 

XV. The Ordeal and the Victim, .... 

XVI. Susan Marsh, 

XVII. The Boudoirs, 

XVIII. “ I Am Afraid,” 

XIX. Dawson’s Bill, 

XX. Noblesse Oblige, 

XXL Star’s Purse, 

XXII. The Bowling-Alley, 

XXIII. The Resolve of the Bodyguard, .... 

XXIV. Miss Peacock, 

XXV. The Letter, 

XXVI. The Clew to the Mystery, .... 


PAGE 

I 

9 

15 

28 

41 

49 

57 

67 

80 

92 

102 

112 

124 

134 

145 

158 

169 

179 

189 

197 

206 

214 

220 

228 

248 

270 


iv 

CONTENTS 



CHAPTER 



page 

XXVII. 

God’s Will, 



XXVIII. 

Good News, 

• • 

. 299 

XXIX. 

Rose to the Rescue, 

• • 

. 309 

XXX. 

A Prisoner in the Tool-House, 

• • 

. 320 

XXXI. 

Midnight at the Greengrocer’s, 

• • 

. 328 

XXXII. 

The Triumph of Goodness, 

• • 

. 334 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


CHAPTER I 

THE ATTIC OF DESIRE 

Christian Mitford was thirteen years of age. She 
was a tall girl with a pale face, a little pronounced in ex- 
pression, and quantities of thick, untidy, very bright fair 
hair, which had a habit of tumbling in a great mass over 
her eyes and round her shoulders. She was supposed 
to be much spoilt, and it was well known she had a will 
of her own. 

Christian was an only child. Her home was in a big 
house in Russell Square. The house was large enough 
to have been the abode of princes in bygone days. It 
had enormous, lofty rooms, wide halls, great corridors, 
spacious landings, and, above all things, charming attics. 
The attics were not only very big and very roomy, but 
they were also not required for the use of the family at 
all. In consequence Christian took possession of them. 
She had adopted them for her own use when she was 
quite a little girl, not more than seven or eight years of 
age. 

It was in the attics that Christian lived her real life. 
She made a fairy world for herself, and there she was 
happy. In the great front attic, which ran right across 
the house, she kept her dolls. Christian had twelve dolls, 
and they all had special characteristics and specially inter- 
esting histories. The adventures those dolls went 


2 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


through would have delighted any other little girl ; Chris- 
tian took these things as a matter of course. If Rosabel, 
me doll in the blue frock, would run away at night to 
live with the gypsies for a long time, she deserved punish- 
ment, and would be treated accordingly. If Abelard, 
who was dressed in the costume of an old crusader, would 
fight his enemies until he himself was all to pieces, and 
had to lie in bed without arms or legs, surely that also 
was his own fault, and his punisliment served him right. 
Christian’s cheeks used to blaze and her eyes grow bright 
as these adventurous dolls went through their career of 
naughtiness in her presence. She was so imaginative 
that she got herself to believe that they really did these 
things without any help from her, and sometimes she 
would sigh and shake her head and think herself much 
to be pitied for having such a fearfully troublesome, not 
to say dangerous family to manage. 

But the dolls, with their dolls’-house for the respect- 
able members of the family, and with their forests full of 
bandits, their crusades, their land of Palestine, their 
troubadours for the others, had had their day. Christian 
grew old enough to feel the glamour of the dolls depart. 
It was ridiculous to suppose that Abelard had really got 
that ghastly wound in his side, or that he had really lost his 
legs, fighting the Saracens. Yes, the dolls had had their 
day. But the fairy tales could be read and lived through, 
and she herself could be the heroine of adventure; and 
what a time she had when she was the voiceless Mermaid 
who loved a Prince and for his sake had her tongue cut 
out! Or how depressed she was when she acted the 
Ugly Duckling ; and how she had, as the little Tin Soldier, 
adored the little Paper Princess 1 

But even the fairy-tale stage came to an end, and the 
history books had now their turn. Christian was William 
Tell, and her hand shook as she fired at the apple. Or 


THE ATTIC OF DESIRE 


3 


she was Joan of Arc in prison, and putting on her armor 
when there was no one by to see. Or she was Charlotte 
Corday at the moment of her great inspiration. Or, 
again, she was on the way to the guillotine as that great 
hero of fiction, Sidney Carton. 

The world knew nothing about Christian. They saw 
a dull little girl who flitted through life demurely and 
never expressed any strong feelings about anything. 

She is a child without character,^^ her French gov- 
erness said of Christian. 

She is a good girl, but she will never play — at least, 
except in the ordinary way,” her music-master said. 

** If she had only a little imagination she would do so 
much better over her poetry and history,” her English 
mistress declared. 

It was only her dancing-mistress who now and then 
expressed approval as Christian flitted about on her small 
feet, curvetting and curtsying, bending and bowing, and 
doing all these things with an inborn grace. 

Ah, that child ! ” said this discerning person ; ‘‘ has 
she not the very essence of poetry — the thing itself ? ” 

But Christian did not even hear her dancing-mistress 
praise her. She was accustomed to being found fault 
with: even her mother only bestowed faint praise upon 
her ; and as to her father, he scarcely noticed her at all. 

Never mind, her real home was in the front attic. The 
grown people of the house had very little idea how much 
of Christian's time was spent in this attic. But however 
cold the weather, Christian never felt it up there. She 
would remain in the huge, desolate place hour after hour, 
crouching in a corner, her eyes gazing fascinated at the 
scene which she had conjured up. Of course, she got 
many a cold in this way. The colds were nursed and 
she was well treated, and no one ever for a moment traced 
them to their true cause. 


4 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


There came an afternoon soon after Christmas, cold 
and dreary, when icy blasts of wind banged up against 
the dormer-windows of Christian's attic, and such piles of 
snow were heaped up on the roofs hard by that the young 
girl could only picture herself as the Ice Maiden. At 
last the cold became unbearable, and she stepped out of 
fairyland and ran swiftly downstairs. 

On the floor just below the attics were the nurseries and 
her schoolroom. In the front nursery sat old nurse. She 
was mending some of Christian’s stockings. She had 
spectacles on her nose, and was singing softly to herself. 
Christian loved her perhaps better than anyone else in 
the world, but she did not wait to speak to her now. She 
hurried past the nurseries ; their day was over. She used 
to sigh when she remembered how many days were over. 
The dolls’ day, the fairy-tales day, and of course the nur- 
sery day. But, thank goodness, the hero and heroine 
day would never be over ! 

When I am grown up,” thought the child, “ I shall 
be a real one. I mean to do something very big, very 
great, very grand. I am preparing — I know I am pre- 
paring — all this time.” 

Christian also hurried past the schoolroom, which was 
quite comfortable and snugly furnished, with big fires in 
the grates. She passed the next floor, and presently 
found herself on the one where the drawing rooms were 
situated. Here, beyond the two great drawing rooms, 
was a small and very comfortable boudoir. ,The door of 
the room was slightly open, and Christian observed that 
heavy curtains were drawn across the windows. The 
logs on the fire blazed up merrily and a grateful breath of 
heat came out to the child. Christian went in at once and 
stood by the fire. She had just begun to thaw when she 
heard footsteps approaching. Now, if she made for the 
door she would certainly meet the intruder. This was not 


THE ATTIC OF DESIRE 


5 


to be borne. She flew across the room, pushed aside the 
heavy curtains which sheltered one of the windows, and 
curling herself up on the window ledge, was completely 
lost to view. There were double windows and shutters, 
and the shutters were fastened. There was, therefore, not 
the slightest draught, and the window ledge itself was soft 
with cushions, and had a down pillow at one end. Chris- 
tian had often lain there before to sleep. The little nook 
was warm and, compared with the attic, 'most comfort- 
able. She cuddled herself up amongst the cushions and 
lay quiet. Of course, she would not stay long ; she would 
just get warm, and then go upstairs to her lessons. 

But the footsteps she had heard did not enter the room, 
and presently drowsiness stole over her and she fell asleep. 
When she awoke it was to the sound of voices. She 
raised herself very carefully, taking care not to make the 
slightest noise, and, dividing the curtains about a quarter 
of an inch, peeped out. Her mother, Mrs. Mitford, was 
sitting near the fire with her back to Christian. She was 
a pretty little woman., very young-looking for her age, 
and dressed in the height of fashion. A tempting looking 
tea equipage stood on a small table near, and as Christian 
watched, her mother raised a small silver teapot and poured 
out a cup of tea. She handed it across to a lady whom 
Christian knew well and hated violently. She was a cer- 
tain Miss Neil, who often visited her mother. Christian 
had long ago pronounced Miss Neil a frumpy, tiresome, 
cross old woman. 

** I do dislike her ! she said now to herself. I won- 
der my darling mumsy can stand her.’^ 

As the child watched she saw Miss Neil help herself to 
a piece of buttered toast, and at the same time her mother 
said : 

Whatever happens, I shall give her a first-rate outfit ; 
I have made up my mind to that.” 


6 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Christian’s heart made a great bound. She dropped 
back into the shadow, making a slight creaking noise 
as she did so. Mrs. Mitford glanced round her ner- 
vously. 

'' Don’t you hear someone in the room, Julia? ” 

“ No, dear; only mice in the wainscot,” was Miss Neil’s 
reply. But, as you were saying, you will send Christian 
provided with a good outfit. That is so like you ; you al- 
ways were such a thoughtful, excellent mother.” 

Mrs. Mitford liked to be praised, and Miss Neil was 
aware of that fact. Mrs. Mitford’s placid face shone with 
satisfaction. 

I should be sorry,” she said, ‘‘ if I failed in my 
motherly duties. The mother of one child has a great 
responsibility thrust upon her.” 

“ Your poor little girl won’t like the change — ^eh ? ” said 
Miss Neil. 

I’m afraid not,” replied Mrs. Mitford, with a shrug of 
her dainty shoulders. The school her father has selected 
for her is, I understand, very severe in tone. Discipline 
is much exercised there; but my dear husband insists. 
He says that we are spoiling Christian.” 

Christian, at the other side of the curtains, dug her 
nails into her flesh. It was with the utmost difficulty that 
she could keep from screaming aloud. 

I want you to help me, Julia,” continued Mrs. Mitford. 
“ We’ll have the carriage out immediately after break- 
fast to-morrow and go round to the diflferent shops. We 
really have no time to lose. I mean to give her two good, 
serviceable school frocks, two best frocks for Sunday — one 
is all that is necessary, but I want her to look really nice — 
an everyday evening frock, and a full-dress party one. 
Then she must have a tailor-made coat and skirt, and about 
half a dozen blouses.” 

‘'An abundance,” said Miss Neil. “Too much, I 


THE ATTIC OF DESIRE 


7 

should say. I never think there is any use in pampering 
young girls.” 

'' Don’t you, you old skinflint ? ” thought Christian at 
the other side of the curtain. 

Of course, there are a thousand and one other things,” 
continued Mrs. Mitford; ‘‘ but everything must be got in 
a great hurry, for she goes next week.” 

“ Next week,” thought Christian. Oh ! ” 

Her thoughts flew to the attic. In the attic she was 
Charlotte Corday: she had arrived at Paris; the greatest 
moment of her life was at hand. In the boudoir she was 
a little girl eavesdropping. Yes, it was an ugly position. 
She wriggled, then remained quiet, for the most awful 
thing of all would be to be found out. 

“ What day did you say the dear child was to go to her 
school? ” asked Miss Neil. 

Next Tuesday. This is Wednesday — not a week off 
now.” 

'' By the way, Mary,” said Miss Neil suddenly, “ have 
you told the child ? ” 

I have not Julia ; and, what is more, I do not intend 
to. I shan’t say anything whatever about it until the night 
before. What is the use in making her miserable ? 
When she hears she will have no time to be sorry; she 
will be far too surprised ; and when she gets to school her 
new and pleasant life will absorb her altogether. I want 
you to take her, by the way, Julia, for neither her father 
nor I can spare the time.” 

When do you start yourselves ? ” 

Early on Tuesday morning. It is all so sudden. Of 
course, my dear husband is greatly pleased, for a great 
honor has been conferred on him. But for this we should 
not have sent Christian from home.” 

Miss Neil slowly and deliberately stirred her tea, and 
by-and-by she put down the empty cup and saucer. 


8 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Christian again raised herself and peeped through the 
curtain. She watched her mother's straight little profile 
— ^the pretty lips, the resolute chin, the low forehead, the 
pretty brown eyes. 

“ And yet she is hard," thought the child. She speaks 
as though she did not care. I always thought mumsy 
pretty, but somehow I don't think her pretty to-night. 
She is hard; yes, that's it — hard." 

Miss Neil began to draw on her gloves. 

“ I will call at eleven o'clock to-morrow," she said. 
** And rest assured, Mary, I shall help you by every means 
in my power," 

Thank you, dear ; I am sure you will. Good-by for 
the present. Please make a list to-night of what you think 
will be required for a child whose parents will be in Per- 
sia for four or five years. Of course, she must have 
fresh things from time to time, but I want her to take all 
that is necessary for her." 

“ I will indeed ; I will with pleasure do what I can for 
your little Christian. Good-by for the present." 

Just as Miss Neil was leaving the room, and before 
Christian had fully made up her mind whether she would 
dart from her shelter and confront her mother with the 
fact that she had heard all, Mrs. Mitford took out her 
watch, uttered a shriek, and cried : 

Why, I ought to be at the War Office now to meet 
Henry ! " and she rushed from the room. 

Christian crouched back amongst her pillows. She 
stuffed her handkerchief into her mouth to prevent her 
sobs from being heard. What did it all mean? She 
could not understand. 


CHAPTER II 


THE MYSTERY 

Mrs. Mitford did not return, and presently Christian 
slipped from her hiding-place and ran upstairs. Never 
having had companions, she had not that absolute desire 
to confide in someone which is the primary thought of 
most young girls. She went into her room, washed her 
face, brushed out her hair, and then entered the nursery. 

Nurse was seated by the fire, busy over her endless 
mending and turning. Nurse, of course, knew ; her eyes 
were red, as though she had been crying a great deal. 

‘‘ Why, Miss Christie, darling,” she said to the young 
girl, ‘‘wherever have you been? You look pinched and 
cold.” 

“ I haven't had my tea ; I expect I look hungry,” said 
Christian, speaking slowly. 

“ What a shame ! ” cried nurse. “ Did they forget to 
give it to you ? ” 

“ They didn't,” said Christian. “ I saw it in the school- 
room just now” as I passed the open door, but it looked 
cold and untempting ; I'd rather have none than that sort 
of tea.” 

“ I'll make you some in a minute,” said nurse. 

“ Oh, will you, nursey ? ” 

Christian felt so cheered that her great trouble of next 
week seemed to recede in the distance. 

“ And may I toast the bread and put on the butter ? ” 

“ To be sure, darling ! I keep my own tea and bread 
and butter in this cupboard ; and here is fresh milk. And 
you shall have a new-laid egg.” 


lO 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Oh, I should love it ! said Christian. “ Do give me 
a thick slice of bread at once, nursey, and let me toast it."” 

The next few minutes passed happily, and soon Chris- 
tian was munching buttered toast, eating her egg, and 
drinking hot tea. It is wonderful what a good fire, a 
sympathizing old nurse who is not too curious, and sweet 
tea and buttered toast will accomplish. Christian had 
been thinking herself the most miserable, cruelly used, 
neglected girl in the world ; but now once again the sunny 
side of life appeared. 

Nurse resumed her work. She was mending a little 
brown skirt, adding to it and putting fresh braid round 
the bottom. 

“ Is that my old skirt ? I thought I had done with it,” 
said Christian, 

It will be as good as new when I have finished my 
work over it,” replied nurse. Her tone was guarded. 

She knows, of course,” thought the child, “ but she is 
not going to tell. Well, neither will I tell. I will just 
pretend during all the horrid days that are coming that I 
don’t know anything. I feel waking up within me my 
very naughtiest self. I know I shall be terribly naughty 
between now and that black day when spiteful old Neil 
and I start off for that good-discipline school together. 
Perhaps — who can tell ” 

Christian’s eyes brightened ; a roguish gleam came into 
their dark depths. She looked full up at nurse, then low- 
ered her eyelashes. 

Nursey,” she said, do put down that horrid skirt 
and play bezique with me.” 

I can’t, my darling ; I haven’t the time.” 

“ Of course you’ve got time. I don’t want that horrid 
skirt ; I hate it. I have plenty of skirts.” 

“ But your mother said it was to be got ready for you, 
miss. She and Miss Neil came up here to-day and over- 


THE MYSTERY 


I 


hauled some of your things, and they said this skirt would 
stand a lot of wear — at the seaside, for instance.” 

“ But I am not going to the sea. I couldn’t wear a 
hot thing like that in the summer. What do you 
mean ? ” 

Nurse looked frightened. “ There ! ” she said, irreso- 
lution coming all over her old face; I will please the 
child. Get the cards, darling; we’ll enjoy ourselves.” 

Christian laughed. They sat by a round table and set 
to work. They were in the midst of their game when 
Miss Thompson, Christian’s resident governess, en- 
tered. 

Whatever are you doing, nurse?” she said. “You 
know we have all to work as hard as ever we can. There 
won’t be half enough time to make preparations.” 

“ Why, what is all this mystery ? ” cried Christian. 
“ Preparations for what ? ” 

“ Nothing, dear — nothing.” 

“ There’s no such thing as nothing,” replied Christian, 
laughing. 

Miss Thompson got quite red. “ Young girls don’t 
always know what they are talking about,” she said in a 
severe tone. “ Nurse has got to work, and I have got to 
work, and you have got to be good. By the way, where 
do you keep your story-books ? ” 

“ Upstairs, downstairs, and in my ladj’s chamber,” an- 
swered Christian. 

“ Well, wherever you keep them, I want them col- 
lected.” 

“ What for? ” 

“ I wish to make a list of them.” 

“ I can’t fly over the house for them to-night. I’ll get 
them to-morrow morning if I must get them.” 

“Well, come into the schoolroom now. There are 
several things we must arrange.” 


12 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ I will after I have finished my game/’ said Chris- 
tian. 

Miss Thompson thought it better to retire than to make 
a fuss, and Christian and nurse proceeded with their 
game. 

“ Why ever do you sigh so, nursey? ” asked Christian. 

“ I didn’t know I was sighing, lovey.” 

“ You didn’t know that you were hiding a big mystery. 
You are a silly old woman. Thompson lets out things, 
and you let out things, and if I want to poke my finger 
into the secret I could; but I don’t care — not a bit. I’m 
off now to have a chat with Thompson.” 

Before Christian could carry these words into effect 
there came a knock at the door. It was burst open, and 
a rosy-faced, black-eyed little girl of the name of Rose 
Latimer entered. She was nurse’s grand-niece, and was 
supposed not to be a fit companion for Christian. Never- 
theless Christian adored her. She found her far more 
interesting and more companionable and more get-at-able 
than any of the girls whom she met or who were invited 
to play with her. 

Rose’s bright eyes danced when she saw Christian. 
Christian ran up to her and kissed her hurriedly. 

“ Come ! ” said nurse ; “ that aint proper. Rose, you 
mind your manners. You aint on the same standing as 
my young lady, and you should remember it.” 

“ But indeed she is,” said Christian — that is, if being 
pretty and ladylike and funny and affectionte makes her 
on the same standing. Some of the girls I know are per- 
fect horrors ; but Rosy — why, she is just Rosy. Sit down, 
Rosy, dear. Here’s a lot of toast left; and nurse shall 
boil you another egg. But do you know that I am Char- 
lotte Corday to-day ? Marat is getting into his bath, and 
I shall go and kill him in a minute or two. Isn’t it thrill- 
ing?” 


THE MYSTERY 


13 


Ah ! cried nurse, who knew nothing either about 
Marat or Charlotte Corday; “what a perfectly awful 
thing to say, Miss Christian ! You fair terrify me/' 

Christian made no answer. She raised her brows and 
looked with her intelligent, keen, overstrung little face 
at Rose. 

“ Will you spend the night ? ” she said suddenly. “ I 
want to talk to you. Nurse, will you keep Rosy until the 
morning ? " 

“ Miss Christian ! " 

“You can if you like, nursey. She shall sleep with me. 
She shall ; she must." 

“ Miss, I couldn’t hear of it." 

“ Very well, never mind about that. Just ask her to 
stay. She shall sleep in your bed, and I will have a chat 
with her by-and-by. You wouldn’t like, nursey ’’ 

“ What, Miss Christian ? " 

“ Suppose I wasn’t to be with you always — I mean you 
wouldn’t like to feel you had refused one of my last 
wishes. If you come to think of it, it is almost like a 
a dying wish ; isn’t it, nursey ? ’’ 

“ Oh, dear ! ’’ cried the poor nurse, “ the child does 
wring my heart. Rose, run along, then. Go and take 
off your hat and coat, and come and help me to put the 
braid on this skirt.’’ 

During the rest of that evening Christian enjoyed her- 
self. It was really great fun being at the back of the 
secret. To have a secret going on that she was not aware 
of would have been irritating, almost maddening; but to 
know it all the time, and so lead up to it and get people 
who imagined that they were keeping it so safe and secure 
to all but betray themselves, was quite interesting. Chris- 
tian sat down very demurely in the schoolroom, and al- 
lowed Miss Thompson to reveal herself as much as she 
could desire. Miss Thompson imagined she was keeping 




THE MANOR SCHOOL 


the secret of Christian’s school to herself, but Christian 
knew better. 

At last it was time to go to bed. She bade Miss 
Thompson good-night and peeped into the nursery. 
Nurse had gone to her room, but Rose was sitting by the 
fire. Christian tiptoed across the room. 

When are you going to bed. Rosy ? ” 

** Nurse said I was just to sit up to say good-night to 
you ; then I must go, for I can’t keep my eyes open.” 

You will have to presently. But be off now ; get into 
bed with nurse, and after a little, when she is asleep, slip 
out and come into mine. You know where my bedroom 
is.” 

To be sure, miss.” 

** You did it before, you know. Rose.” 

** Yes, Miss Christian.” 

Rose was standing up within a foot or two of Christian, 
and her eyes were shining brightly. 

“ You will do it again,” said Christian. “ Nobody 
found out before, and nobody ’ll find out now. I want 
you to give me just the most tremendous help, and only 
you can do it. I shall leave my door ajar. I’ll be in bed 
in half an hour. You slip into bed beside niurse, and 
when she is sound asleep, get out again and come to me. 
Then we’ll talk; then you’ll find out what I really want. 
Oh, Rose! it is greater than William Tell and the apple. 
It is nearly, but not quite, as big as Joan of Arc. It is 
big and monstrous, and only you. Rose, can help me.” 


CHAPTER III 


A WILD SCHEME 

Three-quarters of an hour later Rose was cuddled 
up in Christian’s bed. When the two heads were almost 
touching, and the brown cheek and the pale one were 
pressed close together, and two little hands were clasped 
tightly under the bedclothes, then Christian began to un- 
burden her mind. The door was shut; the house was 
quiet — that is, the nursery part of the house; Miss 
Thompson, the governess, had a headache, and would 
certainly not appear on the scene again until morning; 
nurse was noted for her deep and long sleep ; the servant? 
were far away. If father and mother came in long past 
midnight, they would not trouble Christian in her distant 
bedroom ; she was safe. She felt that she was quite safe ; 
but the feeling that if she were discovered she would most 
certainly be punished added to the fascination of the 
moment. 

‘‘ Rose,” she said, “ I must not speak loud, but I have 
something most important to tell you. What do you think 
is going to happen ? ” 

“ Well, Miss Christian,’^ replied Rose, the whole house 
seems to be, so to speak, on a twitter. There’s my great- 
aunt; she don’t seem to know whether she’s on her head 
or her heels. There’s something up, but I don’t know 
what it is.” 

“ You’ll know in a minute or two; Pll tell you. Now 
listen ; only remember, first, it is a most tremendous secret 
between you and me.” 


i6 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

'' Yes, yes,” said Rose; I love secrets.” She pressed 
a little closer to Christian. 

‘‘ You are quite my very greatest friend, you know. 
Rosy,” said Christian. “There’s Belle Webster and 
Bertha Hole; they think themselves quite chummy with 
me, but you are my real friend. We understand each 
other, we have had so many thrills together.” 

“ Oh, yes,” said Rose, “ yes ! Only I don’t like you 
when you are Charlotte Corday. I was Marat once, you 
know, and I didn’t like that time.” 

“ Well, I’m not Charlotte now. Perhaps I’ll never be 
again. But listen. The secret is our secret. It is too 
funny. Rosy. The rest of the house think that it is theirs, 
but it is ours all the time. Now then! I was so cold up 
in my attic — ^my darling fairy attic — this afternoon that 
I ran down to get warm in mother’s boudoir. I hid myself 
behind the curtains. It was so cozy that I dropped asleep. 
I was lying on the window ledge, and there were cushions, 
and a soft pillow, and everything to make it delicious. 
When I woke I heard mother talking to that horrid Neil 
woman.” 

“ I know her,” said Rose. “ She snubbed me once 
awfully ; she said I had no call to be coming here so often.” 

“ Well, she has no more right in the house than you 
have,” replied Christian. “ But now you will be aston- 
ished.” 

She proceeded to relate the entire story — all that her 
mother had said, and all that Miss Neil had said; and 
having given the outlines, she further impressed the fact 
on Rose that she, Christian, was to be sent to school next 
week. She was to be sent to school, as it were, in the 
dark, and she was not to be told anything about it until 
the night before she went. 

“ They want to keep it dark until the very last minute,” 
she said. ‘‘It is fun, isn’t it. Rose?” 


A WILD SCHEME 


17 


“ Fun/^ said Rose — “ fun ! 

Her voice quivered. It quivered so much that it sud- 
denly ended in a choking sob. 

“ Why Rosy/’ cried Christian, immensely touched, 
“you are not crying just because I must go?” 

“ Miss, I can’t bear it,” said Rose. “ There’s no one 
else ever took a mite of notice of me. I can’t help think- 
ing of myself altogether, miss; I can’t truly. There’s 
mother ; she makes me sit at the dressmaking till I’m fit to 
faint, and I have no fun — never! I’m like you, miss; I 
can’t make friends outside. I have one friend, and she 
seems to fill all my heart, and you are she ; and if we are 

to be parted. Miss Oh, Miss Christian! I can’t — I 

can’t bear it.” 

Christian, notwithstanding her bravery, found herself 
crying also. She put her arms around Rose, buried her 
head in her neck, and sobbed. 

“ It is awful,” she said after a pause. “ I did not think 
so much of parting from you. Rosy, but it is quite ter- 
rible ; for it isn’t even as if I were going to an ordinary 
school, and coming back for the holidays ; but I am gx)ing 
to a severe-discipline one, and I am not coming back — 
I am to spend the holidays and all there. I might as well 
be dead, mightn’t I, Rose ? ” 

“ It’s worse nor if you were dead.” 

“ Oh, Rose, it couldn’t be worse ! ” 

“ It is,” said Rose, “ for if you were dead I could go on 
Sundays and take flowers to your grave ; I could — I could. 
Oh, it is much worse ! I would save up and buy ’em ; no 
one should hinder me. It is much worse nor if you were 
dead.” 

The pathetic picture so conjured up of Rose bending 
over her grave and putting flowers there was so affecting 
that Christian sobbed again. After a time, however, she 
ceased crying. 


i8 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“We must do something/’ she said; “we are both 
young, and we have both got a lot of spirit.” 

“ Oh, haven’t I ? ” said Rose. “ There’s nothing daunts 
me when I’m put to it. Mother says I’m the very naughti- 
est little girl she ever come across. She threatens per- 
haps I’ll get ugly, just because I’m so desperate naughty. 
She says that sometimes when you are so mad with spirits, 
and so desperately fond of yourself, you fall ill with small- 
pox and that sort of thing. I don’t believe it, of course, 
but she does hold it over me. She seem^ as sure that 
I’ll take smallpox as that I’ll have a cold. It’s queer, 
isn’t it?” 

“ It’s silly, I call it,” said Christian. “ Now then. Rose, 
don’t let’s talk any more about that. If you have got 
spirit, so have I. Suppose, now, that I don’t go to that 
school.” 

“ How will you manage that ? ” said Rose 

“ Did you ever hear of a girl running away ? ” asked 
Christian. “ That’s the thought that has come to me. I 
thought that if you and I were together we could run 
away. We could support ourselves, I suppose.” 

“ Not without money,” said the practical Rose. “ It’s 
a lovely thought — the most daring and truly delicious 
thought I ever heard of — but it wants money.” 

“ I’ve got seven pounds,” said Christian. “ Ever since 
I was a little, tiny girl my godmother has sent me a pound 
on my birthday, and I haven’t spent any of the money. 
How far would seven pounds go?” 

“ Oh ! a long way ; it’s a heap of money,” said Rose. 
“ Why, it’s one hundred and forty shillings. That’s an 
awful lot.” 

“ Yes, I thought it was,” said Christian. “ I remem- 
bered the money the very moment mother talked about not 
letting me know until the night before. I shall listen, of 
course, when she does speak, and I will pretend to be good 


A WILD SCHEME 


19 


and submit. Perhaps she will be so sorry for me that she 
will give me some more pocket money. I hope she will. 
But what I really mean to do is to slip away somewhere 
with you, Rosy — to go to some place with you where we 
can live together. Have you got any money of your 
own? 

“ A shilling,’^ replied Rose sadly. “ I took a long time 
to save it up. Had you died, Miss Christian, I would have 
. spent it on flowers for your grave; so now I will spend 
it in running away with you — that I will.’’ 

“ You can’t do more. Rosy,” said Christian. Well, we 
must make our plans, and we must not tell one single 
human being. We have got to consider how we can live 
in the very cheapest way, for one hundred and forty shil- 
lings will not go far. I suppose they will send the police 
after us. Isn’t it splendid. Rosy ? Can you really believe 
that two young ordinary girls are going to do such a 
desperate thing ? 

“ You aint an ordinary girl. Miss Christian.” 

“ Well, perhaps I am not.” 

“ You always was cut out for the part of heroine,” con- 
tinued Rose ; anyone could see that with half an eye. 
Why, haven’t you been William Tell and Joan of Arc 
and Charlotte Corday for ever so long? And afore that 
you were fairy queens and fairy princesses, and witches, 
and such-like. You’re cut for the part, miss, and now the 
time has come.” 

‘‘ It has,” said Christian, whose heart was beating fast. 
“ We must think out most of our plans before we go to 
sleep.” 

The two girls did think. They were both far too ex- 
cited to feel sleepy. Their voices kept on murmuring 
in an even, monotonous sound, which could scarcely 
penetrate through the closed door of Christian’s bed- 
room. 


20 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


After a fashion they made their plans. What Giristian 
had only wildly dreamt of became definite and something 
that could be done. Seven pounds was seven pounds, 
and judiciously spent — spent, too^ by a girl of the Rosy 
sort, a girl who knew poverty and how to live very small 
and very cheap — it would certainly go a long way. 

Strange to say, Christian’s conscience did not trouble 
her. She had been thoroughly well brought up, but her 
heart was sore now. Her mother had spoken almost 
coldly about parting with her one lonely girl. She, Chris- 
tian, was to be sent to an awful strict-discipline school, 
where she had to stay for years and years, away from 
all those she loved in the world. She would take her life 
into her own hands; she would do a desperate, wicked 
thing, and she would not let her conscience prick her. 

We will do it,” she said over and over again to Rosy. 

You, Rosy, must find out where it is best for us to go, 
and then you must come and tell me everything.” 

“ I will,” replied Rosy. '' I know a girl called Judith, 
and I think she will help us. Once she spent a whole 
winter in a gypsy’s caravan. She did enjoy herself. She 
had a fine time, and she had to spend nothing at all. But 
they had to dye her with walnut juice; maybe you 
wouldn’t like that. Miss Christian.” 

No, I shouldn’t like that at all,” said Christian, who 
rather prided herself on her fair but somewhat pale com- 
plexion. "‘But that needn’t happen, need it?” 

“Oh, no; but it happened to Judith. She was dyed 
with walnut-juice, and she wore gypsy’s clothes.” 

“ I shouldn’t mind that part,” said Giristian. 

“ She had a great taste for music,” continued Rosy, 
“ and she played a tambourine and danced. They got 
her up as a sort of Italian gypsy girl, and she danced 
wonderful pretty in the streets. She didn’t seem ever 
to want for money after that; she got so many pennies. 


A WILD SCHEME 21 

You can dance, can’t you, Miss Christian? YouVe had 
lots of lessons.” 

‘‘ Dance ! ” said Christian, a sort of thrill running down 
to her feet and making them move up and down even 
though she was in bed. I should just think I can dance. 
There’s nothing in the world I love better. Oh, Rosy, 
if we could make our living by dancing it would be 
too scrumptious ! 

“ Well, ril find out everything to-morrow and let you 
know,” said Rosy. ** I mustn’t come here, for my great- 
aunt would be angry; but I’ll come the day after, and 
I’ll bring all the news with me. Let’s think. To-mor- 
row will be Thursday ; you aint to go afore Tuesday next 
week. There’s lots of time, only the more money you 
can get the better it will be. I’ll come here on Friday 
night at the latest.” 

Well, then, perhaps we had better go to sleep now,” 
said Christian, who was tired at last. The very novelty 
of the thing made her tired. • 

She dropped off into a heavy slumber, dreaming all 
through the night of wonderful things: of gypsies and 
their caravans ; of Italian girls with tambourines, and little 
sequins round their heads. She fancied herself an Italian 
girl in a red frock. She though how pretty she would 
look, and how sweet it would be to dance. She would 
let her abundance of hair fall over her neck and shoulders. 
A fair Italian girl would be even more captivating 
than a dark one; and Rosy — pretty Rosy — could be the 
dark one. Oh, they would have a good time! They 
would enjoy themselves. And it couldn’t be wrong; for 
if father and mother chose to go to Persia and not show 
any grief at parting from Christian, why should not 
Christian take her life in her own hands? 

She awoke in the morning and found that Rosy’s place 
was vacant, that astute little girl having left the side of 


22 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


her dearest friend and gone back to nurse. For it would 
never do for nurse to guess that the young girls were, as 
she would express it, hatching mischief. Nurse was 
somewhat suspicious as far as her grandniece was con- 
cerned. She knew Rose’s character. She had often con- 
doled with her mother on having such a naughty child. 
Of course. Rosy was very pretty, and she was very fond 
of Miss Christian; and — ^worse luck — Miss Christian was 
very fond of her; and there never was a more masterful 
child than dear young Miss Christian. Yes, even if Rosy 
was nurse’s own relation, she did not want Christian to 
see too much of her. But this week of all weeks the child 
she loved should not be crossed; she should have every 
single thing she wished for — yes, every single thing ; nurse 
herself would see to that. Nurse considered that Miss 
Christian was treated shamefully: bundled off to school 
just as though she were a baby ; parted from the nurse who 
loved her as if she were her own child ; taken from the old 
home and from that strange, mysterious attic where she 
had spent so much of her time ; torn from everyone and 
taken to school — to a school a long, long way off. Nurse 
felt piteous tears very near her eyes. 

Mr. and Mrs. Mitford had decided to board nurse out 
during their absence in Persia. The other servants were 
to be dismissed. Miss Thompson, with an excellent refer- 
ence and six months’ salary over and above what was 
owing her, would seek another situation. The house 
would be let to strangers. Christian in reality would have 
no home. 

But when she woke the next morning, and faced the 
fact that her home in Russell Square would not be hers 
much longer, Christian did not feel low-spirited, for she 
and Rosy would certainly carry out their plan in all its 
details. She was in high spirits, therefore, at breakfast, 
and enjoyed getting Miss Thompson, as she expressed it, 


A WILD SCHEME 


23 


to give herself av^ay. Miss Thompson found it almost 
impossible to keep her secret with Christian looking at 
her, and questioning her, and pretending to observe 
nothing, and yet showing in her eyes that she knew all. 

Miss Thompson went down soon after breakfast to 
have an interview with Mrs. Mitford. 

“ Somehow,’' she said — although I don’t like to say 
it — somehow I think the child has an inkling of what is 
going on. Would it not be better to tell her ? She would 
be more prepared, and would not feel it so much at the 
time.” 

'' If she has an inkling she is bearing it very well,” said 
Mrs. Mitford. “ My dear,” she added, turning to her 
husband, who came into the room at that moment, “Miss 
Thompson is talking about our dear Christian. She says 
that the child seems to guess that something is happening.” 

“ I am sure she guesses,” said Miss Thompson, blush- 
ing and trembling a little at her own audacity. “ She 
looks at me with such very questioning eyes, and tries to 
lead me on, as it were, to betray myself.” 

Mr. Mitford laughed. ''Just like Chris,” he said. 
“ She always was a bit of an oddity. But, my dear,” he 
added, turning to his wife, “ we will not tell her, all 
the same. I couldn’t stand the thought of the child crying 
and moaning for the last few days. She may guess — al- 
though I don’t think she can really — but she is not to be 
told. Understand, Miss Thompson, the child is not on 
any account to be told.” 

“ Now listen,” said Mrs. Mitford as Miss Thompson 
was leaving the room; “ you needn’t keep her to her les- 
sons. You may take her to the Zoo or to Maskelyne and 
Cook’s this morning — anywhere just to give her a bit of 
fun. Keep her out as much as you can.” 

“ But she will be so surprised ; she knows that you are 
so particular about her lessons.” 


24 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


** Well, tell her that I think she is lcx>king rather pale, 
and that she may have a holiday. Use some tact, Miss 
Thompson; you can manage it if you like.’’ 

Miss Thompson left the room and returned to the 
schoolroom. Christian was busily engaged pulling out 
her favorite books from their places in the bookcase and 
examining them. She knew that she and Rosy could only 
take one or two books away with them, and she was un- 
decided whether to select her new and beautiful edition 
of the Arabian Nights or a battered old Shakespeare. She 
was extremely fond of Shakespeare, but on the whole she 
felt inclined to take the Arabian Nights. 

“ They will suit Rosy,” she said to herself. ‘‘ I don’t 
believe Rosy has read any of them — or at least hardly 
any ; and Rosy is too young and too ignorant for Shakes- 
peare. Yes, I think I will select ” 

What in the world are you doing, Christian ? ” said 
Miss Thompson as she entered the room. 

Pulling my books about.” 

“ Then put them all back on the shelf at once, 
dear.” 

'' I was only wondering,” said Christian. ‘‘ There’s 
more reading in the Arabian Nights, I think it will do. 
Do you mind my putting a little bit of blue ribbon in my 
copy of the Arabian Nights, Miss Thompson?” 

‘‘ But why, dear — why ? ” 

I shall recognize it then at once. Now I suppose we 
have got to do horrid lessons.” 

“ It’s a very strange thing to me, Christian, that such 
an intelligent girl as you should dislike lessons. I should 
have imagined that you would love your history and your 
literature.” 

I like Spanish history best,” said Christian ; it is the 
most bloodthirsty.” 

My dear, that is a horrid thing to say.” 


A WILD SCHEME 


25 

“ Well, it’s true,” answered Christian. It’s much less 
dull than English history — English history, I mean, as it’s 
written. I wish I could make stories out of it. Wouldn’t 
you all gape and scream and jump about, and feel that 
you must fight like anything, if you listened to my stories ? 
Think of ‘ John of Gaunt ’ ; and think of the ‘ Black 
Prince ’ ; and oh ! think of ‘ Agincourt ’ and the ' Field 
of the Cloth of Gold.’ Oh, dear ! oh, dear ! couldn’t I make 
the whole thing shine? And wouldn’t I just? But 
English history as it is written is very, very dull.” 

“ I don’t agree with you. When you are older you will 
know that English history written by such men as Macau- 
lay and Froude is most beautiful and thrilling. Now I 
have news for you.” 

You do look strange ! ” said Christian ; “ what can be 
the matter ? ” 

“ I have just been down to see your mother.” 

Oh, can I see her ? ” said Christian, a swift change 
passing over her face. “ Can I ? May I ? I want so 
badly to ask her a question.” 

“ She is going out ; she does not wish to be disturbed.” 

Oh, I know all about that.” 

“ You know about it? ” 

Yes ; but never mind. Tell me what your secret is. 
Miss Thompson; I can see it is bubbling all over your 
face.” 

“ Your mother says that you are looking pale, and that 
you may have a holiday.” 

Christian smiled. Her smile came gradually: at first 
it was just a little dimple in her left cheek; then it spread 
to her lips; then it filled her eyes; then a wave of color 
mounted to her face, and she burst into a hearty fit of 
laughter. But when she ceased laughing there were tears 
in her eyes. 

“ My dear,” said her governess, ** are you well ? ” 


26 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Yes, I am quite well. So I am to have a holiday. 
Where shall we go? ” 

“ Where would you like to go ? ” 

“ May we go where I like ? ” 

“ Yes ; but what do you think of the Zoo? ” 

“ Oh, I know it so well.” 

“Would you like Maskelyne and Cook’s?” 

“ No ; I want to do something else, and it will take the 

whole day long. Thompson — dear, darling You don’t 

mind my calling you Thompson, do you ? ” 

“ Well, Chris, I am accustomed to it by now, am I not?” 
“ Of course you are ; and you are a dear ! ” 

Christian flung her arms round her governess’s neck, 
and rubbed her soft cheek against Miss Thompson’s 
somewhat lined one. 

“ What I should really like, Thompson dear ” 

“ What is that, Christian ? ” 

“ Well, to hang on your arm and walk very close to 
you, and chatter all the time.” 

“ You may.” 

“ And not wear my best dress.” 

“ You may wear your common dress.” 

“ Then I do see that things are going to be heavenly ! 
I want to walk slowly — very slowly — up Oxford Street, 
and then down Regent Street, and then down Piccadilly, 
and then up Bond Street; and perhaps we might go tc 
Baker Street. And while we are walking I want to watch 

and watch, and look and look ” 

“ At the shops, do you mean ? ” 

“ No, no ; things in the streets.” 

“ What things, love ? ” 

“ Little Italian girls and boys with monkeys and tam- 
bourines ; and Happy Families, too. Oh, I do love Happy 
Families ! ” 

“ But you can see them any day in the Square.” 


WILD SCHEME 


27 


“ Yes ; but I want to look at them with fresh eyes.” 

“ Fresh eyes, Christian? ” 

'‘Yes. I dreamt about a little Italian girl last night, 
and I felt that I loved her.” 

"We can easily see them,” said Miss Thompson, 
" wherever we are ; and it needn’t take the whole day.” 

" When we are tired we can have lunch somewhere,” 
continued Christian ; " and I should like to give the Ital- 
ians a lot of buns, and the monkeys some nuts. Oh! I 
want to stare well at them all. I want to see for myself 
what the little Italians look like, and how they do their 
dancing, and how they manage their monkeys.” 

"You are a strange child, Christian; but there is 
nothing wrong in your wish to see the Italians. Have 
you any other desires ? 

" Well, I should like — only I’m afraid you won’t do it — 
to go into an awfully slummy place, and walk upstairs 
and see what the bedrooms are like, and to question some 
of the women as to what they eat, and how much they 
pay for what they eat. For, you see, even if you have 
close on eight pounds, it can’t be expected to last forever. 
Oh, dear ! what have I said ? Have I said anything very, 
very funny. Miss Thompson ? ” 

" Yes, Christian, you have; but then, you are eccentric.” 

" So I am. Will you be such a darling as to take me 
into a slummy place ? ” 

" Certainly not. You may look at the Italians from a 
distance, but we will keep in clean streets if you please. 
Now go and put on your things ; I will give you the best 
sort of day I can.” 


CHAPTER IV 


grandmother’s dinner 

Christian had, on the whole, a very interesting day. 
She had never been so captivated by Italian children be- 
fore. She watched and watched the pretty move- 
ments, the quick gestures, the gleam of the white 
teeth, the shining dark eyes. The little monkeys, too, 
were all that was pathetic. She quite made up her 
mind that she and Rosy would earn their living in the 
future as Italian girls — that they would have a monkey 
and a tambourine each, and go about and dance and beg 
for money, and have a happy time. 

Only we must not do it near home,” thought Christian, 
“ for we might be discovered. It would be indeed too 
terrible a fate if, when father and mother are away in 
Persia, Miss Neil should catch sight of us. I should be 
punished then; and poor, poor Rosy — ^her mother would 
half kill her.” 

Christian’s thoughts were so full of keen interest that 
morning that Miss Thompson began to consider her a 
very delightful girl. She was startled, however, in the 
midst of lunch, which they were both enjoying im- 
mensely, by the young girl bending forward and saying 
in an emphatic voice : 

“ If it was necessary for your career, would you greatly 
mind being dyed with walnut-juice? ” 

'' My dear Christian, what a strange remark ! ” 

But I wish you’d answer it,” said Christian emphat- 
ically. 


GRANDMOTHER'S DINNER 


29 

** I can’t understand. It could not be necessary for 
my career.” 

But if it was. If it made all the difference between 
success and failure, between prison and liberty, which 
would you choose ? ” 

“ Oh, the walnut-juice, of course,” said Miss Thomp- 
son. But, all the same, I fail to understand.” 

I don’t want you to understand any more, deal 
Thompson; and you know you are quite a darling. You 
are coming out in the very nicest character. I hope I 
shall have more and more holidays, for I do like going 
about with you.” 

Miss Thompson was to remember Christian’s remarks 
later on, but certainly at the present juncture they had 
no meaning for her. 

When the young girl came back late that evening she 
was informed by nurse that Mrs. Mitford had sent her 
an invitation. 

“ You are to put on your very best company frock. Miss 
Christian, and to look as nice as ever you can, for you are 
to go down to sit with your mamma in her boudoir this 
evening. Mr. Mitford will be out, and you are to have 
supper with her. She means to have supper in her bou- 
doir, and she says that you are to keep her company.” 

Nurse expected Christian to shout with delight, but 
she was silent and looked rather grave. 

Aint you glad, my darling ? ” said the old woman. 

“ Nursey,” said Christian, did you ever have the 
feeling that you were too glad and yet too sorry to be 
able to say what you felt? On the whole. I’d rather not 
see too much of mumsy at present ; but if I must I must, 
and if I go I’d like to look nice. Make me very, very 
nice, please, niursey dear.” 

Nurse set herself willingly to accomplish this task, and 
Christian in her white silk frock, with its many ruchings 


30 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


and ribbons and soft laces, and with her fair hair hangng 
down her back, made as interesting and pretty a picture 
as the heart of mother could desire. 

‘‘ There, darling ! ” said the old woman, ; you are like 
no one else, my own Miss Christian. Kiss me and go.” 

Christian ran up first to her attic. She had secured a 
broken looking-glass, rather a large one, which she had 
placed in such a position that she could see herself when 
she acted the parts of her different heroes and heroines. 
From time to time she had induced the housemaids to give 
her candle-ends, and she possessed a large box of these 
interesting remnants. She lit a couple of dozen now, put 
them in different positions, and was at last able to get a 
good view of her own young figure. She was a rather 
tall and very upright girl, and she looked her best to- 
night. 

“ Is it I or is it another girl ? ” thought Christian. 

Her quick imagination pictured the different heroines of 
history. Which should she select as her own role to- 
night? Finally, after a steadfast glance into her face, 
she decided to belong to the army of martyrs, and to 
imagine herself back in the time when people died for 
their faith. It seemed to her that she read resolution, de- 
termination, and unflinching self-sacrifice in her eyes. 

She blew out the candles, gave a little sigh of relief, and 
ran downstairs. Her mother was waiting for her. Mrs. 
Mitford was very prettily dressed, the boudoir looked 
charming, the fire burned brightly, the lamps were pretty 
with their shaded globes, but Christian could not help 
giving a guilty glance towards that window behind whose 
thick, soft curtains she had listened to the story of her 
proposed fate. 

“ Only it isn’t my fate,” thought the child, “ for I am 
determined — quite determined — to choose the life of 
the free.” 


GRANDMOTHER’S DINNER 31 

Slipper was already on the table, and Christian had to 
take her place. 

“ I hope you will like the meal I have had prepared for 
you, Chris,’' said her mother. Johnston, you need not 
wait,” she continued, turning to the footman ; ‘‘ we will 
ring when we want anything : I have quite thought about 
this little meal with you, Chris,” continued Mrs. Mitford, 
“ and I ordered soles. You love soles, don’t you? ” 

“ Oh, yes, mumsy ; we never have anything nice and 
tasty of that sort in the schoolroom.” 

They have got so terribly expensive,” said Mrs. Mit- 
ford in a fretful tone. “ After the soles we will have 
pheasant ; you are fond of pheasant. And you shall pour 
out the coffee by-and-by. As the sweets — children al- 
ways adore sweets — I hate them myself, but I suppose 
there will be something brought up for you. I ordered a 
savory for myself, but left your sweets to cook.” 

And Fd ever so much rather eat a bit of your savory, 
mother; I don’t so specially care for sweets,” said 
Christian. 

She was somewhat depressed, and yet she was happy. 
The delicately served meal was quite to her taste. She 
said to herself : 

‘‘ This will be something to remember by-and-by when 
Rosy and I are eating red herrings and stale bread. Fll 
often talk to Rosy about this meal. I feel to-night as 
though I wasn’t Christian Mitford at all, but someone 
else ; not a poor martyr, but a sort of queen. How pretty 
mother looks ! I shall never be pretty like her. Yes, she 
has a darling, sweet face, but ” 

Christian did not follow up this '' but,” only it lay like a 
weight near her heart. 

The meal came to an end, the savory was disposed of, 
coffee appeared and vanished, and presently Mrs. Mit- 
ford and her daughter were alone. 


32 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


** Now, mumsy,” said Christian, “ come and sit on this 
deep sofa and let me cuddle up to you. Let me think that 
I am a very little girl once more; I want you to pet me 
and stroke my face. I want to put my head on your 
shoulder. You don't mind, do you, darling? " 

“ Oh, Christian ! " said Mrs. Mitford, the tears rushing 
to her eyes, “ I only wish you were a little, little girl. Big 
girls don’t suit me half as well. I used to p>et you such 
a lot, and you were so pretty. Don't you remember the 
time when I took you out driving in your dark-blue velvet 
pelisse and your blue hat ? Don't you remember how the 
people used to remark on my very pretty little girl ? " 
“Yes, mumsy," said Christian; “but you can imagine 
I am your very pretty little girl again, can't you, mumsy ? " 
Mrs. Mitford said she could ; but she was small and 
Christian was big, and the weight of the child’s head on 
her shoulder tired her. Presently she sat up restlessly 
and said : 

“ We are wasting our time; I have a great deal to talk 
to you about. I don’t often see you ; I am so busy, you 
know." 

“Yes, mother,” said Christian; “but it seems a pity, 
doesn't it ? ” 

“ It can't be helped, dear. Your father is a man of 
great importance, and I am obliged to be with him all I 
can. And this is the. time for your education. I want 
you to be a very accomplished girl. I don't care a bit 
about learning or anything of that sort, but I do want 
you to play well — so well that people will talk and look at 
you, and remark on the brilliancy of your touch. And I 
want you to have a lovely voice. When you are old 
enough you must have the very best instruction for that. 
And then I want you to paint a little, and recite ; recita- 
tions are very popular, only they must be well done. 
And I want you, of course, to be a good linguist; your 


GRANDMOTHER’S DINNER 


33 


French must be perfect. By-and>by you shall go to Paris 
to get a proper accent. German is nice too, but not so 
important as French. Italian would be useful; you are 
sure to spend a few years in Italy. You must dance beau- 
tifully ; but then there is no doubt on that point, for you 
dance well already.” 

Christian sat very upright ; she did not speak. 

“ Well,” said her mother, does my list of accomplish- 
ments appeal to you? Do you want to be all that your 
mother could desire ? ” 

” You leave out some things,” said Christian — the 
story part — all about history and the lovely, lovely things 

that happened long ago. I don’t want just to be ” 

Just to be what, dear? ” 

I can’t explain myself ; but when I think — oh, 
mumsy! I will tell you. You mustn’t be angry with 
me, but I don’t want to be a brilliant, accomplished girl ; 
I want to be a heroine.” 

“You silly, silly child ! A heroine I What do you 
mean ? ” 

“ I want to be the sort of girl who would do great 
things — who would ” 

Eut Mrs. Mitford interrupted her with a little scream. 

“ You want to be an oddity,” she said, “ an eccentric 
horror. Don’t come to me and expect my approbation if 
you are anything of that sort.” 

Just at that moment the room door was opened, and 
who should come in but Mr. Mitford. His wife gave a 
start when she saw him. 

“ I found I could get away earlier than I expected,” was 
his remark. “ I fancied Chris would be with you, and I 
thought we could have a talk. You both look very 
charming.” 

Christian sat close to her mother. 

“What a contrast you both are!— you so dark and 


34 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


piquant, and Christian so tall and fair and blonde. You 
are very like your grandmother, Chris, and she was a 
very beautiful and noble woman.” 

Mrs. Mitford sighed. The color deepened in her cheeks. 

‘‘ I believe,” she said, with a laugh, “ that Christian 
will resemble her grandmother in more ways than one. 
You know what an eccentric woman she was.” 

She was a very good woman, you mean,” said Mr. 
Mitford. 

'' Yes, Patrick; but eccentric — very eccentric. Do you 
remember when she insisted on giving up her own dinner 
to send it to the invalid who lived on the other side of the 
street ? It was ridiculous of her.” 

“ Do tell me ! ” said Christian suddenly. “ Did granny 
give her dinner to a sick person at the opposite side of 
the street ? ” 

Mr. Mitford laughed. His dark eyes fixed themselves 
on Christian’s animated face. He stepped up to her, and 
putting his hand under her chin, looked down at the 
speaking, bright features. 

“You are like her,” he said, with a sigh, “the same 
eyes, the same determined chin, the same expression. 
Well, my child, I can wish you nothing better than to be 
as good as your grandmother.” 

“ But tell me about the dinner, father.” 

Mr. Mitford laughed; then his face grew grave. 

“ We kept a most perfect cook, for your grandmother 
was singularly particular with regard to her food. She 
had a very small appetite, but she always wanted the very 
best prepared for her, and she could not worry herself 
about ordering her own food; she liked it to come as a 
surprise. Now, Adams suited your grandmother’s palate 
to perfection. Day by day the most delicious little dinners 
were served up. Well, one evening, I don’t exactly know 
how she discovered it, but your grandmother happened to 


GRANDMOTHER’S DINNER 


35 


know that there was a poor lady in the opposite house 
who refused to eat anything. She was poor, and the 
house she lived in was nothing like as large and expensive 
as ours. Your grandmother feared that Mrs.* Stirling had 
not a cook to her taste, so that evening she sent her own 
special dinner to her. When she found she liked it she 
sent it again every night.’’ 

“ But why couldn’t she have more dinner cooked for 
the sick woman?” interrupted Christian. 

Ah, that was the point. Adams would only prepare 
this very special and choice dinner for your grandmother. 
She could not be worried to do it for anyone else. Had 
your grandmother told her that the special meals were to 
go to Mrs. Stirling they would not have been worth eating, 
so she gave her own dinner and went hungry. The thing 
lasted for three weeks.” 

‘‘ And then ? ” asked Christian. 

‘‘ Mrs. Stirling died. The people said afterwards that 
your grandmother’s dinners kept her alive for ten days, 
and that she enjoyed them so much that she used to think 
about them all day long until they came. The thing was 
just like your dear old grandmother; she was an oddity, 
but most unselfish.” 

It was a splendid thing to do,” said Christian. “ It 
was exactly the very thing I mean to do. I always 
thought granny looked nice — I mean from her picture — 
but now I am certain about it. She is a great heroine, and 
I mean to copy her.” 

“ There, Patrick ! ” cried his wife ; “ what mischief you 
have done by telling Christian that absurd story ! There 
always was a vein of oddity in Christian. I hope you 
will speak seriously to her, and tell her that during our 

abs I mean henceforward we wish her to attend to 

her accomplishments, that when she is grown up, and — 
we have time, we will take her out and be proud of her.” 


36 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Mr. Mitford continued to stand near Christian, and once 
again he looked into her face; then he said, with a 
sigh: 

‘‘ A girl such as your mother has described would be 
quite acceptable to me. But come, Chris, what have 
you got in your head ? ” 

‘‘ Only that I want to be a heroine,’* she said. 

She stood up as she spoke. Her face looked tired. 

“ I want to do something big ; I want people to remem- 
ber me when I am dead. I’d like to have a great big 
obelisk put up over me, and words written on it. And I’d 
like it to be pointed to, and people to say, ' The woman in 
memory of whom that obelisk was erected was a bene- 
factress.’ That is what I’d like to be, but mother wants 
me to be ” 

Yes,” said her father, who was frowning as well as 
smiling, and looking with intense earnestness at the child, 
** and what does mother want you to be ? ” 

‘‘ A musician, and to be able to dance; a linguist, and a 

fine singer. Oh ! she wants common, common things 

** They’re admirable things,” said the father sternly. 
** I agree with your mother. But why, my dear child, 
should not a benefactress be able to sing and dance, and 
make the world brighter all round? Don’t get confused 
in your mind, Christian. You can be as accomplished as 
anyone in the world and yet be a noble woman.” 

Christian looked puzzled. “ I didn’t think of that,” 
she said. “ I do so want to do something — ^to be a hero- 
ine — and I care so little about being just accomplished.” 

** You had better go to bed now, Christian,” said her 
mother, beginning to yawn. ‘‘ Always do your duty ; that 
is the main thing. Here is a sovereign for you, pet. You 
can go out to-morrow and buy something.” 

Christian looked at it. Her face grew scarlet. Sud- 
denly she said : 


GRANDMOTHER^S DINNER 


37 

“ But may I keep it ? If I don't really want to spend it, 
may I keep it ? " 

“ Of course you may, if you wish ; but what a funny 
child!'' 

Mr. Mitford kissed his daughter with much more con- 
sideration than he was wont to give to her. Mrs. Mitford 
gave her a passionate hug. 

“ Good-night, darling," she said. 

When she left the room Christian's parents looked at 
each other. 

“ Upon my word," said Mr. Mitford, ‘‘ Christian as- 
tonished me to-night." 

“ I do trust she won't grow up odd ! " was Mrs. Mit- 
ford's answer. 

‘‘ My dear," said her husband, ‘‘ don't you see that the 
child is a budding genius ? I always thought so, but to- 
night I am sure of it. I wish I hadn't accepted that ap- 
pointment, Mary. It is very sad to be parted from that 
young creature, the only child we have, for six long years." 

Mrs. Mitford began to cry. 

“ Don't, Mary," said her husband in a distressed voice. 
“ It is worse for me to see you mope even than to see 
Christian moping." 

“ What I feel so awful," said Mrs. Mitford, is her 
not knowing — ^her thinking that we are to go on as usual. 
Poor Christian ! " 

“ It is best," said her husband in a decided voice. “ I 
could not stand her tears ; I am afraid I am a sad coward, 
but it's a fact. Of course, she will get over it." 

** Get over it” said Mrs. Mitford, with a laugh. “ Of 
course she will. She'll just fret for a bit at first. But that 
is a splendid school, isn't it ? " 

“ Yes ; I went to see it. I liked everything about it. 
Miss Peacock is a woman in a thousand." 

“ She will be very happy," said Mrs. Mitford. ‘‘ She 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


38 

wants companions, and Miss Neil will be nice to her when 
she takes her there. She won’t have time to fret. Time 
flies when you are young. She’ll be too busy to fret ; don’t 
you think so, Patrick ? ” 

“ I hope so,” he answered ; “ but I don’t believe she is 
an ordinary child. There, Mary ! don’t let us talk about 
her now any more. We must settle other matters to- 
night.” 

He pulled some papers out of his pocket, and soon hus- 
band and wife were absorbed in abstruse calculations. 

Meanwhile Christian put her treasured sovereign into 
the box which contained all her money. 

“ Certainly fortune seems to favor me,” thought the 
child. “ I shall have eight sovereigns now. Won’t Rosy 
and I have a time ! ” 

She sat down near the fire and began to think. Pres- 
ently nurse came in. 

** Tut, tut. Miss Christian ! ” she said ; “ you aint to be 
dreaming there any longer. You’re to go to bed.” 

“ Nursey, I love you,” said Christian suddenly. 

She ran to the old woman and put her arms round her 
neck. 

“ Nursey, did you ever hear that wonderful story about 
my granny ? ” 

'' What story, darling ? ” 

About her giving her nice, lovely dinner to the dying 
woman.” 

“ It was like her,” said nurse. 

“ Did you know my granny, nurse? ” 

“ Know her ? ” exclaimed nurse. ‘‘ Rather ! There 
weren’t her like anywhere to be found. She was always 
too good for ” 

Nurse drew herself up abruptly. She had meant to 
say, '' Too good for the present Mrs. Mitford,” but she 
restrained herself. 


GRANDMOTHER’S DINNER 


39 

“ There wasn’t her like in God’s world,” she continued. 
“ Dear, it were a sorrowful day when she died.” 

“ Was she very old ? ” asked Christian. 

“ No, lovey, not specially — a little past sixty.” 

That sounds very old,” exclaimed Christian. 

“ It aint when you come up to it,” said nurse. I’m 
sixty-five, and I don’t count myself such an old woman. 
It’s wonderful what a different view you take of sixty 
when you are, so to speak, nigh to it.” 

Christian did not find this an interesting subject. She 
said after a moment : 

“ Was granny like me — in appearance, I mean? ” 

Well, now, darling, sometimes it has come over me 
that you have got her build ; but you being young and she 
old, it’s difficult to say. Still, I own that you have got 
her build.” 

“ Father thinks that perhaps I have got her spirit.” 

God be thanked if that is so. Miss Christian. It was 
her wish that you should be called Christian. It was her 
own name ; she inherited it from the Quakers. Her grand- 
father was a Quaker, and a very strict one ; and her mother 
was called Christian, and then you were, darling. She 
thought a sight of the name. She said the one thing that 
fretted her in not having a daughter of her own was not 
being able to call her Christian.” 

“Was she fond of me when I came?” asked Chris- 
tian. 

“ Yes ; she’d often take you in her arms and kiss you, 
and say that she hoped the spirit of her grandfather, 
Quaker Joseph Bunn, would descend upon you. But 
there ! you aint to be stopping up any more, so up to bed 
you go.” 

Christian went to bed. She felt very thoughtful. Her 
conscience did not prick her at the thought of running 
away. She was still firmly convinced that even her father, 


40 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


who had seemed much nicer than usual to-night, would 
not mind when once she was out of sight. 

“ ' Out of sight, out of mind ' with father and mother,” 
thought the little girl. “ And I could never, never live 
in a strict-discipline school.” 

Nevertheless Christian knew as she dropped asleep that 
her grandmother would not have acted as she was going 
to do. Having always held herself in strict discipline, she 
would not run away from it. She would obey ; she would 
subdue herself. 

“ Then I can't be like granny,” thought Christian, turn- 
ing restlessly from side to side on her pillow, for I want 
my own way; and I won't go to school, for the school 
mother has described is a sort of prison.” 

With an effort she turned her thoughts from her granny 
and her own secret desire to resemble her, and she thought, 
until sleep visited her, of Rosy. For the very next day 
Rosy was to come, and Rosy was to tell her all she had dis- 
covered ; and they were finally to make their plans, for the 
time when Christian would fun away from Russell Square 
was close at hand. 


CHAPTER V 


CHANGE OF A SOVEREIGN 

When Rosy arrived on the following evening she looked 
very much excited ; her eyes were bright, and there was 
a lot of color in her cheeks. Beside her Christian looked 
pale and scarcely pretty at all. 

The little girl sat down on a stool near the fire in the 
nursery and warmed her hands, chatted loud and long to 
nurse, and laughed continually. 

One would think,’* said nurse after a pause, ** that 
you did not love Miss Christian one little bit. I never saw 
anyone in such riotous spirits, and I must say it aint be- 
coming.” 

‘‘ Oh, don’t I love Christian ? ” said Rosy. “ Don’t you 
go and draw wrong conclusions, great-aunt. I love her 
better nor anybody else — there ! ” 

‘‘ Well, child, that’s all right. Here comes Miss Chris- 
tian. Now listen, Rosy. You are not to stay long ; you are 
to go away in about half-an-hour, for my young lady 
lookes very peaky.” 

Christian sat by the fire. Nurse gathered up her work 
and prepared to go into the schoolroom. She knew the 
children would like to be alone, and she had promised to 
help Miss Thompson in her constant search after Chris- 
tian’s possessions. 

** A more untidy child I never saw,” said Miss Thomp- 
son when the old woman entered the room. “ But there ! 
I do pity her. I think it is perfectly awful the way the 
poor child is kept in the dark. It is that that worries me.” 

4 > 


42 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Well,” said nurse, “ there’s sense in it too. She won’t 
have time to fret; it will be one sharp blow and then the 
worst will be over. Miss Christian has got fancies and 
all kinds of romances about her, and she’d conjure up hor- 
rors like anything. Children who conjure up ought to be 
kept from brooding ; that’s what I say.” 

Meanwhile the two girls in the cozy nursery were sitting 
side by side. 

“ I have eight sovereigns,” began Christian. “ I’ve got 
another since I saw you last. Mother gave it to me.” 

“ Oh, golloptious ! ” said Rosy. 

“ Do you think eight sovereigns will go a long, long 
way ? Do you think they will be enough till we have made 
our fortunes by being tambourine and dancing girls ? ” ex- 
claimed Christian. 

To be sure they will ! ” answered Rosy. “ Now, 
Christian, you listen. I have it planned splendid. You’ll 
have to do it this way, and this alone. My friend that I 
told you of aint much to look at, but she’s clever. My 
word! I never came across anyone with such brains. I 
spoke to her last night. She is apprenticed to a dress- 
maker next door to mother, and she’s sick of it.” 

“ But my eight pounds won’t support three people,” 
said Christian, speaking hastily, and with a strong dis- 
like to Rosy’s friend rising up at once in her heart. 

“ You needn’t fear that,” said Rosy. ‘‘ Judith aint 
going to have anything to do with us ; she couldn’t if she 
wished, for she’s apprenticed to a dressmaker, and her 
mother would be mad if she even thought of such a thing. 
But what she will do is this. She’ll meet us and take us to 
some nice lodgings, where we can stay all by ourselves 
for a couple of days. If you say the word to-night. Miss 
Christian, she’ll hire the little room for us. I said you 
wouldn’t mind it being humble, and she said she knew 
one in a very respectable house— of course nowhere near 


CHANGE OF A SOVEREIGN 


43 

here — a little room at the top, where there’d be a cozy bed 
for us. Think of you and me sleeping so warm side by 
side. And we could have a fire if we wanted it, and we 
could cook red herrings and make our own tea.” 

It would be fun,” said Christian, her eyes gleaming. 
“ Children have done that before when they were poor, 
haven’t they ? It would be like the old story-books about 
children who lived in London and nearly starved but came 
out all right in the end.” 

“ Yes, yes,” said Rosy ; “ but you listen. She’ll take the 
room to-morrow if you say the word, and it will be all 
ready for us when we get there on Tuesday.” 

“ Oh,” said Christian — Tuesday ! But oughtn’t we to 
run away on Monday ? ” 

'' No; that won’t do at all. I told Judith, and she said 
you’d be found out. What you must do is this. You must 
get to the station. You must walk up to the book-stall. 
You say to that Miss Neil that you want a picture- 
book ” 

Which I don’t,” said Christian. “ I hate picture- 
books.” 

Well, any sort ; it don’t matter. Then you watch 
your chance and mix up with the crowd and come out, 
and stand outside and wait for me.” 

“ But how will you know what station to go to? ” 

Rosy laughed. ‘‘ You’ll say that I am very clever when 
I tell you,” she answered. “ Do you know that I picked 
up a letter that your mother had dropped, and it was from 
that fine school of yours — oh! I wouldn’t like to be im- 
prisoned there — and all directions were given. You were 
to go from Paddington Station ; so I’ll be there, and so will 
Judith, and we’ll take you away before Miss Neil finds 
out anything. Don’t you see what a splendid plan it is? 
Your father and mother will be off two hours before you, 
and they won’t be fretted at all. By the time the news 


44 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


reaches them that you are lost, you may be able to write 
a letter and tell ’em that you are earning your own living 
in London and doing fine.” 

Christian’s cheeks were now almost as red as Rosy’s. 

“ It does sound too splendid,” she said. I wonder if 
I’ll have strength to do it.” 

“ Why, Miss Christian, what do you mean?” 

Well, you know. Rosy, it isn’t good of me; it’s down- 
right bad of me.” 

“ Oh, I didn’t know,” said Rosy, “ that we was to think 
of the virtues. I thought you wasn’t a bit that sort of 
goody-goody kind.” 

“ Nor am I,” said Christian, reddening. “ But since 
I saw you I have heard about my grandmother, and she — 
she was wonderfully good. And she had spirit, too. 
Rosy — far more spirit than either you or I have. But 
she never thought of pleasing herself ; that was the amaz- 
ing thing about her.” 

“ Well, no one can call you selfish. Miss Christian.” 

But when I run away from the strict-discipline school 
I do please myself, don’t I ? ” answered Christian. 

Rosy had no answer for that; but presently her little 
face puckered up and she began to cry. 

“ I was that troubled,” she began, bringing out the 
words through her sobs ; ‘‘ and Judith Ford — I promised 
her five shillings ; so I did. I knew you’d pay it for getting 
her to hire the room and for going to Paddington with me. 
And I thought I wouldn’t be scolded any more, nor have 
my finger pricked by the horrid needlework, nor anything 
of that sort ; and now ” 

‘^Well?” said Christian. 

You are backing out of it ; I can see that. You aint 
half nor quarter as anxious about it as you were when 
last we met.” 

“ You needn’t be frightened,” said Christian coldly. 


CHANGE OF A SOVEREIGN 


45 


I asked you to help me, and I mean to go through with 
it ; but as to its not being painful — I know it will be neces- 
sary, but it is horribly painful. I can scarcely bear to 
look my mother and father in the face.” 

‘‘Well!” said Rosy, “I could look mother straight 
enough in the face. I didn’t sauce her half as much to- 
day, for thinking that I’d be away from her and the hor- 
rid needlework in less than a week. Oh, I am happy 1 
And we’ll get a Httle monkey and tambourines, and we’ll 
practise like anything in our dear, snug little room; and 
we’ll start walking along the streets and getting pence 
from the passers-by by the end of next week.” 

Christian’s eyes once again sparkled. The scheme was 
fascinating. She found herself, as it were, between two 
positions. At one side was the school, strict — very strict 
— far away from London, where she would be received 
and, as it were, locked up in prison for years and years 
and years; no holidays to look forward to, for holidays 
were to be spent at school; no friends that she loved to 
greet her or speak to her. She was slow in making 
friends, and Rosy was dearer to her than any other girl. 
Certainly the other prospect was more alluring. It did 
not occur to her that the small room would be anything 
but spotlessly clean, with snowy sheets to the bed, and 
pretty, bright furniture, and a dear little fire in the 
grate; and she had always longed to taste red herrings. 
She thought that the food of the poor would be nice as a 
change — at least for a time. Then there would be the life 
in the open air, and the other tambourine-girls looking on 
and envying and wondering. And the monkey should 
certainly be called Jacko, for there was no other name so 
sweet for him. And she would love him and teach him 
no end of tricks, and he would sleep with her at 
night. 

“ Yes, Rosy, I will do it,” she said. “ I am sorry I 


46 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


seemed to hesitate. You can’t quite understand every- 
thing about me; but I’ll do it safe enough.” 

“ That’s right,” said Rosy. And now, do you think. 
Miss Christian, that you could let me have five shil- 
lings?” 

“ What for ? ” asked Christian. 

“ Well, it’s for this : Judith can’t hire us a room unless 
she pays in advance. She has one now in her mind’s eye 
— a beauty — like a bird’s nest, she said — the cosiest spot 
on earth. She wouldn’t like to lose it. She must get it to- 
morrow, and we’ll take possession of it on Tuesday, but 
we must pay a week in advance.” 

I have only got my sovereigns,” said Christian. “ It 
will seem rather strange my changing one.” 

“All right,” said Rosy; “only I don’t suppose I dare 
come again. Can’t you get it for me anyhow? Great- 
aunt has always a lot of change, I know.” 

Christian considered, and then she went into the school- 
room. Her purse containing her treasure was in her own 
private desk, and that desk stood on a little round table 
near one of the windows. It was always kept locked, 
and Christian kept the key fastened on to her watch- 
chain. She unlocked the desk now and took out the 
purse. The night before she had deposited the new 
sovereign with its seven companions. She looked sadly 
at her little store. It seemed a pity to break it. But, 
after all, Rosy’s request was reasonable; Judith Ford 
could not be expected to get a room for them without 
money. 

Both nurse and Miss Thompson were in the room, 
and they looked attentively at Christian as she en- 
tered. 

“ Well, Miss Christian,” said nurse, “ has Rosy made 
herself scarce? Quite time for her to do it, little 
puss ! ” 


CHANGE OF A SOVEREIGN 


47 


“ Yes, Christian, you really must go to bed now,” said 
Miss Thompson. 

Christian colored. I want to change this,” she said, 
and she laid the sovereign on the table. 

‘‘Whatever for, my pet?” said nurse. 

“ It is for Rosy ; I want ” 

“ No ; nothing of the kind,” said nurse — nothing of 
the kind ! Tm not going to have my great-niece taking 
presents from you. Miss Christian; and money, too, for- 
sooth! Just like the brass of that little thing! But I’ll 
soon ” 

“ Nursey, nursey,” cried Christian, almost in tears, 
“ you don’t know ; you can’t understand. Please — please 
let me have some change; I want to give Rosy five shil- 
lings. It isn’t as a present ; it is for something she is to 
do for me.” 

“ Of course you can have the change, Christian,” said 
Miss Thompson ; and she went to her desk, and presently 
laid half a sovereign and four half-crowns on the table. 
She took up the sovereign, and Christian ran into the 
nursery with the money. 

“ Here it is,” she said, thrusting two half-crowns into 
Rosy’s hands; “ and I had great work to get it. Nursey 
thought I wanted to give you a present.” 

“ I’ll have something to say to my great-aunt if she 
doesn’t change her manners,” was Rosy’s response. 
“ Thank you. Miss Christian; you couldn’t, I suppose, let 
me have another half-crown as well ? ” 

“What for?” said Christan, who felt that her money 
was already beginning to melt with wonderful rapidity. 

“ Well, you see, miss, it is to pay for Judith’s time, and 
for me and her to go to Paddington in time to meet you. 
This sort of thing can’t be done without a little outlay. 
Miss Christian. Afterwards, when we are settled down, 
we’l] as eppnpjnical as you like.” 


48 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


‘‘ There, take it,” said Christian. 

She thrust the money into Rosy’s hand and dashed from 
the room. She did not even wait to bid her friend good- 
night; she felt at that moment that she almost disliked 
her. 


CHAPTER VI 


SIX LONG YEARS 

Monday night had arrived. The long days of waiting 
and suspense were nearly over. Christian looked paler 
than ever. She no longer asked questions or tried to draw 
people into betraying themselves. She often sat for half 
an hour at a time staring straight before her. Nurse was 
frightened when she looked at her ; even Miss Thompson 
did not care to meet her gaze. 

Shortly after tea on Monday evening Miss Thompson 
ran downstairs and burst suddenly into Mrs. Mitford’s 
presence. Mrs. M it ford was engaged with her own pack- 
ing, which had to be done in the most judicious way. 
She had given the child to understand that she and her 
father were going to the south of France for a time. 

We are going there, she said to the governess. 
** Don’t look at me so reproachfully. You know we are 
going to Marseilles, and surely that is the south of 
France.’^ 

“ Well,” said Miss Thompson, I must speak. I don’t 
like it, Mrs. Mitford; I don’t like it at all. I’m glad the 
time of deception is over. Sometimes, do you know, I 
think Christian guesses.’^ 

“ Christian guesses ! ” cried her mother. ** How could 
she? I hope you have been careful. I told you all her 
things were to be packed in the north spare-room. She is 
taking almost everything new with her. She needn’t 
have known anything. You have told ; you have betrayed 
your trust.” 


49 


50 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


No, I have not,’’ said Miss Thompson quietly. “ I 
have been as careful as a woman could be. But Chris- 
tian is a sharp child, and she can put two and two together. 
I suppose, Mrs. Mitford, you will soon tell her now ? ” 

“ She is coming down to see me after dinner this even- 
ing. Her father will be present. We will tell her then,” 
said Mrs. Mitford. 

The governess was turning to leave the room. Once 
again she came back. 

“ I know you won’t do it,” she said, ‘‘ and yet I long to 
ask you to. I do so wish you would let me take her to 
school instead of ” 

“ Really ! ” said Mrs. Mitford. 

She was a very imperious little woman; she hated any- 
one even to suggest that her way was not the right 
way. 

‘‘Really!” she repeated. “I am sorry, but I cannot 
have my plans interfered with. My friend Miss Neil 
will take Christian to the school.” 

Tears sprang to Miss Thompson’s eyes. 

“ It is only that she loves me, and she does not care for 
Miss Neil.” 

“ Very silly of her! ” said the mother. “ She will have 
to see a good deal of Miss Neil while we are away. You 
would like me to write that recommendation for you to- 
night, Miss Thompson? Well, I have nothing but good 
to say of you. I hope you will get a comfortable situation 
before long.” 

“ Thank you,” said Miss Thompson a little coldly. 

She left the room and returned to the schoolroom, where 
Christian was pretending to read a new story-book her 
father had given her that morning. It was rather old- 
fashioned. She did not exactly care for it; she thought 
there were too many characters, and that the plot was not 
brisk enough. Nevertheless she went on reading it. It 


SIX LONG YEARS 


51 

would probably interest her later on; she knew that her 
mind was not with the written words that night. 

“ Do you know that you are to go down to see your 
father and mother after dinner ? ” said Miss Thompson. 

“ Yes, of course I do,” said Christian. 

She turned very white and dropped her book. 

“ You are not well, dear; you don’t look at all well.” 

“ I am quite well, thank you. Miss Thompson.” 

“ What dress will you wear, Christian ? ” 

‘‘ I don’t think it matters much.” 

“ They would like to see you looking nice. Your pink 
frock is new ; will you put it on ? ” 

“ If you like.” 

It was between eight and nine that evening when Chris- 
tian, beautifully dressed as usual, and looking tall and 
straight, and with a certain curious defiance about her, 
and yet with an inward trembling, passionate love vibrat- 
ing through her frame, entered the presence of her father 
and mother. Of course she knew what was coming. 
They did not guess that, but the very fact, although it 
reduced her to despair, kept her also calm. There was 
no uncertainty about the moment that lay before her. 

Mr. Mitford felt extremely nervous. He was fond of 
Christian — fonder than he cared to own. He was a very 
busy man, and seldom had more than a minute or two to 
devote to his wife and child, but he felt that Christian 
and he could be great friends if they had enough time to 
get better acquainted with each other. 

Mrs. Mitford was certain that she would burst into 
passionate tears, and thus disgrace herself forever in her 
husband’s eyes. Therefore, when Christian entered with 
her bold, firm step, she could not help looking at the child 
with admiration. 

She will be a beauty by and by,” thought the mother ; 
“ she is remarkable-looking now.” 


52 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


The father, as he glanced at her, thought, She is my 
mother over again; it is a sin to leave her.” 

Filled with a sudden tenderness, he moved up an inch 
or two on the sofa in order to make room for Christian to 
sit by his side.’ 

‘‘We have sent for you, Christian,” said her mother; 
“ we have You tell, won’t you, Patrick ? ” 

He was silent, looking straight across the room at his 
wife; his very lips were trembling. Christian pitied him 
so much that she almost prompted him. She very nearly 
said, “ Go on about the school — the strict-discipline school, 
you know.” 

Mrs. Mitford in the interval rushed into the breach, and 
continued : 

“ You know, Christian, that we are going to the south 
of France to-morrow.” 

Christian did not answer. She gave a brief nod; her 
lips were firmly pressed together; her eyes were bright. 
She was saying to herself, “1 won’t cry. I won’t let tears 
come ; I won’t — I won’t — I won’t ! 

“ Yes,” said Mr. Mitford, “ we are going to Mar- 
seilles; and on a longer journey.” 

Christian looked up at him. He took her hand. Once 
the ice was broken he continued more fluently : 

“ I am appointed Consul-General of Teheran in Persia. 
It is a very honorable position, and ” 

Christian stirred restlessly. Mrs. Mitford looked at 
her. 

“ Why doesn’t she speak ? ” she thought. “ I quite 
expected her to say, ‘ And you will take me with you ? ’ 
— to say those words very earnestly, and be passionate 
and troublesome about it.” 

But Christian did not say anything. She did not even 
express surprise. 

“ We go to-morrow morning,” continued Mr. Mitford 


SIX LONG YEARS 


53 

— your mother and 1. Christian, child, why don’t you 
speak ? ” 

“ I am listening, father,” she said gravely. 

You are a good child,” said her father, flinging his 
arm round her waist and squeezing her to him. 

But she detached herself suddenly. 

‘‘ I’d ever so much rather you didn’t pet me while you 
are telling me.” 

“ Oh, very well ! ” said Mrs. Mitford in a displeased 
tone. ‘‘ I have always thought it, and I must say it : I 
don’t think you have a scrap of heart, Christian. You 
are the only girl I have ever heard of who would submit 
to her parents leaving her for six years without even 
a murmur.” 

“ You didn’t say the number of years, mother,” an- 
swered Christian. 

“ Stop, Mary,” said her husband ; “ you must allow me 
to speak to the child. I am very pleased with you, Chris- 
tian, for having control of your feelings. I don’t for a 
moment think that you are heartless. Far from it,” he 
added, putting his hand under her chin and looking into 
the deep eyes that could scarcely meet his gaze — “ far 
from it,” he continued, and he patted her on the shoulder. 
“ You are a good girl, just like your grandmother, and you 
have got pluck and endurance. Now, do you know what 
we are going to do with you ? You are our little girl, and 
very, very dear to us.” 

“ Of course, Christian, you are our only child,” said her 
mother. “We shall be very proud of you when we come 
back; you will be accomplished then. You will remem- 
ber what I wish : you are to be a great musician and a 
great singer, and your French is to be ” 

“ My dear,” said her husband, “ had you not better let 
me explain to Christian what her position will be during 
our absence ? ” 


54 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ All right, Patrick ; only I did think that the child 
would like her mother to talk to her.” 

“ So I do, mother,” said Christian. 

She had a sudden wild impulse to rush up to that pretty 
little figure and fling herself into its arms ; but she knew 
that her mother would not understand her. She had a 
sort of feeling that her father would, but she was not sure 
of him ; so she sat still and held herself up for all she was 
worth, and thought at intervals under her breath, “ I won’t 
let the tears come — I won’t! ” 

“ We have considered this,” said Mr. Mitford. “ The 
thing has come suddenly, and there has been very little 
time. We could not take you with us, for the country is 
not suited for young people. No girl who is not grown up 
could go there. We shall be away for a long time, and 
during that time, Christian, you must be going on with 
your education in the best sense of the word. Threefold 
must that education be — don’t forget that — ^body, soul, and 

spirit. When we return you will be How old are 

you now, Christian ? ” 

“ Thirteen,” said Christian. 

“ Yes, dear, thirteen in August,” interrupted Mrs. 
Mitford. “ Can you not recall that hot August morn- 
ing when we first saw our little Christian?” 

“ Yes, dear,” replied her husband. “ Well, Christian, 
you are thirteen. In six years you will be nineteen — a 
grown-up woman, ready to take up life seriously — a 
woman like your grandmother.’^ 

“ You may as well turn Christian into a Quakeress at 
once,” said the mother. 

The religious part of the question we need not dis- 
cuss,” said Mr. Mitford. “ In six years’ time Christian 
will be grown up. We shall return with pride and pleas- 
ure to embrace our dear daughter. Now, Christian, we 
have found a school for you — not an ordinary school by 


5 '/;^ LONG YEARS 


55 


any means. The lady who is the Principal is Miss Peacock. 
She is a splendid woman ; her character is superb. She is 
a great favorite with the girls who live under her roof. 
There are only forty girls, so it is a comparatively small 
school. The house is a beautiful old mansion, and the 
end of the garden is washed by the waves of the wide 
Atlantic. The school is in Cornwall, in one of the most 
healthy spots possible. In the summer you will have 
boating and yachting, in the winter riding. The climate, 
compared with that of London, is temperate, and you, 
who are fond of flowers, will have them in plenty. Each 
holiday Miss Peacock has promised to take you some- 
where.’^ 

Christian’s eyes grew bright. 

“ You will love her, for she is worthy of love. You 
are to be treated with singular indulgence.” 

“ What about the strict-discipline school ? ” said Chris- 
tian to herself. 

“ You are to have your own pretty room, and you are to 
be allowed to write your letters without having them 
looked over — that is, to your parents. There are some 
charming girls at the school, and they are all prepared to 
love -you and be good to you when you arrive. My own 
dear girl, you will be there by this time to-morrow night. 

You will leave here early in the morning, and Don’t 

cry, child ; you really have been very brave.” 

“ Do let me just for a minute,” said Christian, flinging 
her arms round her father’s neck. 

Her reserve was broken; she sobbed as though her 
heart would break. 

“ Come and kiss me too, Christian,” said her mother. 

Mrs. Mitford was crying also. Christian sobbed more 
and more uncontrollably. Mr. Mitford got up and left 
the room. 

I couldn’t expect her to keep up all the time,” he 


56 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

thought. “ She was very brave at first, but those tears 
are terrible. Mary at least might have controlled herself. 
Mary is pretty, adored by society, but, compared to Chris- 
tian, heartless. Poor girl, what a face was hers ! I could 
have stood those tears, but that face of tragedy hurt me. 
Poor Christian ! I could almost wish I had not taken that 
brilliant appointment. But there! it may lead to many 
things, and when a man has a child he ought not to be 
selfish. I do what I do for Christian, after all. Poor 
darling I somehow I never seemed to quite understand her 
or to appreciate her until to-night.** 


CHAPTER VII 


‘‘the reformatory school is the punishment 

FOR me'' 

Rosy, who was in some ways so very much wiser than 
Christian herself, had assured the young girl that her 
parents would not be at all frightened by her running 
away. 

“ They won't know anything about it," argued Rosy, 
“ until they get a letter from your own self ; and when 
you tell them, and they see it in your handwriting, that 
you are well and happy, they will be as pleased as Punch. 
I know it," continued Rosy, with emphasis, “ for when I 
am real happy, even if it aint the very thing mother might 
have liked beforehand, she can't help getting a sort of de- 
lighted look on her face. It's the way of mothers, even if 
they are harsh ones ; so think what it will mean to your 
father and mother, Christian, who love you like any- 
thing." 

Christian was so much interested, and her mind was so 
fully made up, that she listened to Rosy's specious words, 
and even composed in her own mind the little letter she 
would presently write; a passionate letter, full of love, 
but at the same time with a beseeching tone running 
through its depths; the letter in which she would assure 
her father and mother that she would be the straightest, 
most upright, most unselfish, noble sort of tambourine-girl 
in the world. 

After her father had left the room Christian lay still on 
the sofa, her arms around her mother's neck and her head 


57 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


58 

buried against Mrs. Mitford’s soft white neck. She had 
ceased to sob. She had almost ceased to feel. 

By and by Mrs. Mitford roused the child. 

“ The years will pass quickly ; your father and I will 
think of you, and the years will go by with lightning 
speed. Soon we shall be together again.” 

Oh, no, mother,” answered Christian ; it will be a 
long time — a long time ! ” 

You think so, dearest, but you are mistaken. Now, 
go to bed, darling ; I daren’t allow you to trouble yourself 
any longer. You must sleep, Christian-, for my sake, or 
we shall both be ill to-morrow when we most want to be 
fresh and bright.” 

“ Suppose, mother, I were to write you ; when would 
you get the letter ? ” 

“You had better write straight to Bombay. Your 
father and I will spend some weeks there before we pro- 
ceed to Persia. You can write when you are settled at 
school. Here is the address.” 

Mrs. Mitford opened her desk, took out an envelope 
carefully addressed and stamped, and put it into the 
young girl’s hand. 

“ Now, good-night, dearest. You will soon sleep 
sound. The worst will be over before long.” 

Christian left the room without another word. She 
scarcely kissed her mother as she parted from her. All 
of a sudden her conscience began to prick her. She dared 
not listen to it, however ; there were others involved in the 
mad game she was playing. Whatever happened, she 
must go on with it. She got quickly into bed, covered her 
face with the clothes, and pretended to sleep. She was 
alone in the dark ; even nurse had left her. 

The house quieted down. Mr. and Mrs. Mitford were 
to leave at seven in the morning. Christian would not 
leave until nine, her train not going from Paddington 


THE REFORMATORY SCHOOL 


59 


until a few minutes to ten. Just before she dropped 
asleep she resolved, whatever happened, to be up in time 
to rush down to kiss her father and mother; but, what 
with her distress and the fatigue which her excitement had 
caused her, she slept heavily until nurse called her. She 
started up then with a cry. All that was to take place 
flashed upon her. There would be no nurse to-morrow 
morning; only a little room in the slums, and Rosy her 
companion. Well, even that was better than a strict- 
discipline school. 

“ Nursey,” she cried, '' what is the time? ” 

“ Twenty minutes to eight, deary. You will have to 
leave soon after nine. I didn’t want to wake you a min- 
ute before the time.” 

“But have they gone — have they gone?” 

“ Of course, darling ; they left at seven. They came 
up, both of them, and kissed you. It went hard to see 
them, particularly my master. Ah ! he’s a good man, but 
maybe stern and a bit absent-minded ; but he is a good man 
when all is said and told.” 

Christian did not say a word. The knowledge that 
her father and mother were really gone lay on her spirits 
as a crushing weight. Then she began quite wonderfully 
to cheer up. The worst was over. The pain of leav- 
ing the old house, the wonderful dream-attic where 
the happiest time of her childhood had been spent, 
nurse, the servants. Miss Thompson, was all as noth- 
ing. 

She got up and dressed. She thought with a smile, 
how to-morrow she would be wearing very different 
clothes. She was not at all nervous; she was sure that 
Rosy’s and her great plan would succeed. 

Breakfast was over in a short space of time. Chris- 
tian’s private money had been put into a little bag under 
her skirt. Nurse had made the bag for her; it had a 


6o 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


string attached to it, and nurse had shown the young 
girl how she ought to tie it round her waist. 

“You are to get more money from time to time,’^ said 
nurse ; “ and once a year I am to come down to Cornwall 
to see you. The place is called Penwerne, and is near 
to the town of Tregellick. They say the house is that 
beautiful ! But there, darling, do eat something ! ” 

Christian ate and drank. She then bade the servants 
good-by; she hugged Miss Thompson, but her last most 
fervent embrace was for nurse. Nurse cried, but Chris- 
tian did not shed a tear. She had said good-by to 
her attic the night before, and had determined not to visit 
it again. 

At last she was seated in the cab. Nurse and Miss 
Thompson promised to write to her, and Miss Neil, look- 
ing stitf and somewhat severe, desired the cabman to pro- 
ceed, and they were ofif. The house in Russell Square 
seemed to vanish like a dream ; they turned a corner and 
went rapidly in the direction of Paddington. 

Christian scarcely spoke. There was a cold sensation 
round her heart; she wondered if Miss Neil would give 
her a chance to escape. She was soon relieved on that 
score. 

“ As soon as we get to the station, Christian,” said her 
companion, “ I will have your luggage registered. You 
have still a great deal of luggage, although one large box 
was sent off last week. I will see it registered, and you 
will stand by me. But we must get our tickets first.” 

Christian longed to ask a question or two, but her 
tongue clave to the roof of her mouth. She was so 
terribly afraid of betraying herself that she was silent. 

They reached the great station, and Miss Neil, accom- 
panied by her young charge, approached the ticket-office. 
A string of people were waiting their turn. Miss Neil 
bought a single first-class ticket for Christian and a re- 


THE REFORMATORY SCHOOL 


6i 

turn for herself. A porter was standing by with Christian’s 
voluminous luggage piled up on his truck. Miss Neil and 
he entered into an animated conversation. They moved 
a little aside. Christian watched them, standing stock- 
still herself as though she were turned into stone. 

Suddenly a wild desire to be going quietly down to 
Cornwall took possession of her. She considered 
for a minute how easy it would be for her 
to abandon her scheme, to stay by Miss Neil’s 
side, to enter the carriage which she had selected, 
to be conscious of the fact that the luggage was in the 
luggage-van. There was nothing against her carrying 
out this sudden wish — nothing at all — except Rosy’s dis- 
appointment and Judith Ford’s annoyance. Christian 
would be going to the school selected by her father and 
mother, and all would be well. 

I could send Rosy a letter through nurse,” thought the 
young girl, “ and I would send her a whole sovereign in 
a postal order. She could give some of it to Judith, and 
there would be an end of the matter. I think I will give 
it up,” was her next thought. Now that it is so near, 
it seems too awful to go through.” 

But just then Miss Neil turned and spoke sharply to 
her : 

“ Don’t stay back there, Christian ; come to my side. 
And pray, don’t stand on one foot in that ugly way. Do 
hold yourself erect ; I hate the manner in which girls hold 
themselves nowadays. Thank goodness, when you are at 
Penwerne you will be taught that and other matters! 
Yes, it is a good thing you are going to that severe school. 
What did you say?” she continued, turning to the por- 
ter. “ Over weight? But we have first-class tickets. 
One pound to pay? Preposterous! ” 

“ Well, madami, I assure you ” began the man. 

He and Miss Neil entered into a sharp dispute, while 


62 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Christian glided away. She would carry out her scheme ; 
Miss Neil herself had decided it. 

Two minutes later she was in the affectionate embrace 
of Rosy Latimer, while Judith Ford, a rough-looking girl 
with a freckled face and high cheek-bones, stood near. 
She wore a showy hat with a lot of cheap red velvet on it. 
Her jacket was too small for her, and her gloves had 
holes in them. Christian scarcely glanced at Judith 
Ford. 

“ Come, quick ! ” said Rosy. Oh, aint you a darling? 
Aint we going to have a good time? Oh, Christian! you 
don’t know what Judith has done for us.” 

“ Don’t you tell,” cried Judith. “ You always do let the 
cat out of the bag. We’ll let Christian see for herself.” 

“ Christian,” thought the young girl, “ Christian. 
Have I come to be called that by a girl of the Judith Ford 
type ? 

The three girls ran down a side street, and a moment 
later Judith beckoned to the driver of a decrepit-looking 
cab with a broken-down horse to draw up to the edge of 
the pavement. They jumped in, and off they went. 
Christian tried to shut away from her imagination the 
sound of Miss Neil’s excited, terrified voice when she 
missed her. She tried to shut away from her mental 
vision the thought of Miss Neil at all; she would forget 
her now. She would also forget the school at Penwerne, 
and the cozy first-class carriage. She would even cease 
to remember her parents, who must now be crossing from 
Dover to Calais. She would forget everything but the 
great, marvelous, wonderful adventure itself. Oh, how 
often during the last few days had she pictured it I Now 
she was living through it in reality. It was a big, big 
story — a wild, thrilling thing — she was about to live 
through it. She had been an imaginary heroine so often ; 
now she would be a real one. Oh, yes, she was safe; 


THE REFORMATORY SCHOOL 63 

Miss Neil could not possibly find her. She was safe, and 
it was — yes, delicious. 

But as this last thought came to her Judith’s very sharp 
voice sounded on her ears, and Judith’s emphatic nudge 
poked itself into her side. 

“Why don’t you talk?” cried Judith. “Be you the 
sulky sort, as hugs their grief to ’em and hasn’t a word to 
say to their kind friends ? Oh, won’t we have a time to- 
night ! You’ve got the chink all right, haven’t you ? ” 

“ The what ? ” asked Christian. 

Judith burst into a loud laugh. 

“ The chink,” she cried. “ Why, Rosy, is she such a 
softy as not to know what chink means ? We’ll teach her 
a few things, you and me ; won’t we. Rosy ? ” 

“ Miss Christian knows a lot of things,” said Rosy. 
Her voice sounded quite refined in Christian’s ears. 
“ She knows ever so much that we don’t know. We’ve 
got to treat her with respect,” continued Rosy. 

“ Not a bit of it! ” exclaimed Judith, with another loud 
laugh. “ We’re all in the same boat now.” 

Christian looked at her with a growing terror. 

“ And here we be,” continued that young person. 
“ Now then, cabby, look spry. There aint no luggage, so 
you must let us off cheap. How much is the fare, cabby ? 
Don’t you try to humbug me. I know a thing or two; 
as much as you do.” 

Judith began to haggle loudly. The cabman answered ; 
Judith overtopped his voice with her screaming one. 
Poor Christian felt that the most strict-discipline school 
on earth would be paradise compared to her present 
surroundings. But, after all. Rosy had tact. She came 
up to her little companion and whispered in her ear : 

“ Judith aint going to stay, so don’t you think it. She’s 
just showing off, and no more. I’ve seen the room, and 
it’s quite nice ; and if we don’t like it we can change, for 


64 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


we have plenty of money. Don’t fret, Miss Christian ; I 
can’t abear to see that sort of look on your face.^’ 

“ Come along now,” said Judith, having settled her 
dispute with the cabman. '‘I lead; you follow. I’m 
leader in this game.” 

She entered a hideous, dirty, tumble-down house. 
Christian held her skirts tightly round her; she could not 
bear that they should touch the filthy walls. She scarcely 
liked to tread on the black and broken stairs. 

They went up flight after flight, and at last entered a 
small attic at the top of the house. Compared to the 
stairs, it was fairly comfortable, but poor Christian had 
never imagined that anyone could live in a room of this 
sort. 

I was thinking,” said Rosy, who was watching her 
little companion earnestly, “ that you and me. Miss Chris- 
tian might go out presently and buy a few things. You 
see, Judith,” she added, turning to the other girl, “ Miss 
Christian has been accustomed to a very different life.” 

It will do her a sight of good to know how the poor 
live,” was Judith’s remark. But as to buying things, 
you and she had better lie low for a day or two, for they’re 
sure to make no end of a fuss, and have the police after 
her, and all the rest. It wouldn’t do to have the police 
after us,” continued Judith, fixing her malicious eyes full 
on Christian’s white face, “ for running away is a crime 
punished by law. You gets locked up for running away, 
and a pretty long sight of prison too, to say nought of the 
disgrace. You wouldn’t like that, would you, miss ? ” 

It isn’t true,” said Christian. I don’t believe it.” 

“Oh, don’t you, miss? Well, I’m sorry for you. 
There’s a woman in the next room — a very nice friendly 
woman ; her name is Mrs. Carter ; she helped me to tidy 
up the room this morning. We’ll ask her.” 

Before Christian could prevent her, Judith bounded into 


THE REFORMATORY SCHOOL 


65 

the adjoining room, and came out accompanied by a tall 
woman with a head of tousled hair, curl-papers all round 
her forehead, a broken bodice, and a red skirt. This 
woman had heard from Judith all about the proposed plan, 
and thought it a very fine joke indeed. 

This young lady is Miss Qiristian Mitford — ^the 
Honorable Miss Christian Mitford,’’ said Judith, laughing. 
“ You’ll have to drop your curtsy to her, Mrs. Carter.” 

“ I aint a-going to drop no curtsies to anybody who 
lives in this house,” said Mrs. Carter. 

Christian walked to the window and turned her back on 
the other inmates of the room. Oh, she was punished! 
was it true what that awful girl said, that if she were 
caught now the law of the land would put her in prison ? 
She wished the ground would open and swallow her up. 
Oh, where was the delight and excitement of the adven- 
ture that had looked so fair before it began? 

“ You just tell her plain out what’s the truth, Mrs. 
Carter,” said Judith. 

“ About what, my dear? ” said Mrs. Carter. 

“ Aint it the case, ma’am, that if you run away from 
your lawful guardians, you being, so to speak, a minor — 
that means under age, miss,” she added, nodding to Chris- 
tian — “ aint it the case that you are locked up ? ” 

Mrs. Carter looked hard at Judith. She then glanced 
at Christian. Christian was well dressed; beyond doubt 
she was rich. She must frighten her and then soothe her, 
for get money out of her she should, and would and could. 

“ Miss,” she said, “ I’m sorry for yer. My heart bleeds 
for yer, miss. Whoever made yer get into this scrape? 
It’s true, miss ; it’s true. It happened to my first cousin. 
She was well born, miss — not like me. Her parents were 
most genteel. When a child she ran away from school, 
and for two years she was in a reformatory, miss — a 
prison-school. She was indeed, miss. She never come 


66 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


to any good ; and she’s in prison again now, miss, serving 
her time for burglarious action.” 

Christian had not the slightest idea what burglarious 
action was, but it had an awful sound. Her heart stood 
still with agony. It was scarcely likely that both Mrs. 
Carter and Judith were wrong. Mrs. Carter had her 
facts so glib, and she had such a wicked knowing look. 

I’m sorry for yer, miss, but the only thing for yer is 
to keep tight in here ; and if the police come you can hide 
under my bed, miss, and you’re kindly welcome. And i) 
there’s anything I can do for you young ladies in the 
way of hot water for making a drop of tea, or anything 
of that sort, you have but to tell me; for it’s neighborly 
we’ll be, miss, and you won’t regret it so much when 
you know, so to speak, the in and out of our lives. We 
may be poor, but we have our good p’ints, and our mo- 
ments of ’joyment too.” 

“ You clear out now,” said Judith, pushing Mrs. Car- 
ter towards the door. She shut it, and then came up 
to Christian. 

You’d best give me a little of the chink,” she said, 
*’and I’ll go out and buy food for us all. I can show 
my nose as much as ever I like, for I haint run away; 
but you and Rose must keep tight, for if you show your- 
selves it’s the reformatory school you’ll get into. It’s 
the reformatory school; that’s the punishment for you.” 


CHAPTER VIII 


PLAY-ACTING 

With trembling fingers Christian lifted her skirt and 
produced the little bag which contained her precious 
savings. There were still seven pounds ten shillings in 
the bag, for she had given away the last half-crown of 
her first ten shillings to Judith in order to settle with the 
irate cabman. It was in reality only a one-and-sixpenny 
ride, but Judith, as she pocketed the shilling, assured 
Christian that it cost half-a-crown and was cheap at 
that. Christian knew too little about the ways of the 
poor to make any remark, but she did feel certain that 
her money would not go far if it was required at so 
rapid a rate. 

“ Here,” she said, opening her bag and producing 
half-a-sovereign; “I ought to get a lot of change out 
of that.” 

“So yer will,” said Judith, snatching it from her; 
“ and ril bring in all sorts of things. What do you 
think we’ll want. Rosy? You’d best make a list.” 

“Oh! I wish I could go with you,” said Rose, whose 
eyes glistened at the sight of the gold. 

“ But you can’t,” said Christian, “ I should die if I 
were left alone in this awful, awful place.” 

“Awful, is it?” said Judith. “My word, you be 
hard to please! I ’ates the ways of your haristocrats, 
always with their noses in the air, sniffing at everything, 
pleased at nothing. The sight of trouble I had to get 
this sweet little room I And I’m sure it’s as pretty a place 

67 


68 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


as can be found. And if that aint a nice, clean bed for 
the two of yer to sleep in, I don’t know where you’ll find 
a better. And there’s a fireplace and a table. And oh, my 
word! here’s a cupboard in the wall. What more could 
the most particular desire ? And here’s a chest of 
drawers. Jolly, I call it ! And two chairs — one for me, 
and one atween the two of you. If this room aint spry 
and cozy, the only thing I can say is that I hope you’ll 
never find yourself worse lodged. Now then. Rosy, tell 
us what you want.” 

Rosy began to count on her fingers. She had arranged 
everything beforehand in her own acute little mind. She 
knew exactly the food they would require, the matches 
and the chips of wood for lighting the fire and the coal to 
fill the grate. She ordered matches and wood and coal 
now, also red herrings, a little loaf of the best fresh bread, 
some butter, some tea, sugar and milk. 

“ You must see about the coal the first thing,” said 
Rosy ; “ we can’t do any cooking until it has come. And, 
Judith, we must have a saucepan and a kettle and a little 
frying-pan, and some cups and saucers, and spoons and 
knives, and a pinch of salt, and wood to light the fire, and 
half a dozen eggs. Can you remember all those things ? ” 

“ That I can,” said Judith ; “ but if you think there will 
be much change out of ten shillings you’re uncommonly 
mistaken.” 

“ But there ought to be,” said Rose, her cheeks grow- 
ing crimson. ‘‘ Mother ’ud get all them things and have 
summat to spare out of five shillings. Look you, Judith, 
there aint to be any larks with Miss Christian’s money. 
You’re to bring back five shillings change, or I’ll go out 
and buy the things myself, whether I’m caught or not.” 

The smirky, impudent look left Judith’s face. 

We needn’t stay here at all,” continued Rosy. “ Miss 
Christian might so happen to get tired of this here joke. 


PLAY-ACTING 


69 

She might so happen to want to go back to her own peo- 
ple, and we will go back, both of us, even if they are 
angry, if you play any pranks. Now you understand.” 

Judith nodded. “ It’s a nice opinion you have of me. 
Rose Latimer,” she said. “ What pranks would a poor 
girl like me be up to? You needn’t fret about me and 
my morals. Rose Latimer, for I’m as straight as a die, I 
can tell yer.” 

She ran downstairs, utterly regardless of the dirty walls 
and the broken stairs. She flew along, leaping over 
obstacles, and clearing two or three stairs at a time in 
her headlong flight. 

When her steps had died away Rosy looked at Chris- 
tian. Christian’s back was to her ; she was standing by the 
window. She had not removed her hat and jacket. In her 
heart was a dull weight — the weight of absolute despair. 
Even Rosy, as she watched Christian and seemed to guess 
by a sort of instinct what she was feeling, began to find 
the adventure less adventurous, and even began to see a 
certain amount of good in the dressmaker’s room where 
she usually sat, cozy and warm, machining long seams 
and turning out yards and yards of flouncings. Yes, 
even the dressmaker’s room was better than this attic, 
with Christian, as Rosy expressed it, in a sulk. 

'' Miss Christian,” said the little girl. 

Christian made no reply. She drew a step or two 
nearer the window, and stared out with the most forlorn 
feeling in her heart. The only view she could obtain from 
the very small dormer-window of the attic was of some of 
the neighboring roofs, black with smoke and smuts. 
They were hideous in the extreme. Christian had never 
before known what real, absolute ugliness meant. She 
shuddered, and yet, with a certain fascination, drew 
nearer. A cat, meant by nature to be white, but of a dull 
uniform gray, stepped gingerly over the roofs towards her. 


70 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


He met a brother cat, and they saluted each other in the 
customary manner. Christian turned away with a shud- 
der. 

“ Miss Christian,” said Rosy again. 

What is it, Rose?” 

“You are miserable,” said Rosy, “and you blame 
me. 

“ Well, I never thought it would be like this. I never 
imagined anything so awful. And is it true that as we 
ran away we — we’d ” 

'“ Nonsense, Miss Christian! I don’t believe it’s true 
for a single minute. It’s only Judith’s way to frighten 
you, miss.” 

“ But Mrs. Carter said the same.” 

“ Yes, Miss Christian, I know it; but she was put up to 
it by Judith.” 

“ I thought you said you liked Judith — ^that you 
thought her a nice girl.” 

“ I never seed her afore in the light I do to-day, miss, 
and that’s the truth.” 

“ Rose, I’m frightfully miserable.” 

“ Well, I aint too happy,” said Rose. 

“ Can’t we get away from here ? Pm frightened.” 

“We might creep out of a night, for certain, but in the 
daytime they’re a-watchin us.” 

“ Who ? Who are watching us ? ” said Christian. She 
went up to Rose and clasped her hand in an access of 
terror. 

“ Well, that Mrs. Carter ; and most like there are others 
in the house, and they all know you have money. I tell 
you what. Miss Christian, there’s only one thing to do.” 

“ What is that ? Oh, what ? Oh, I am frightened I I 
never thought I should be so terrified.” 

“ It’s a clear case when one ought to be terrified,” said 
Rose, and she sank down on one of the chairs and stared 


PLAY-ACTING 


71 


straight in front of her. “ Yes/^ she repeated, “ it’s dear 
it means terrifying ; there aint a doubt of that.” 

“ What is to be done ? ” said Christian. “ Oh, if mother 
could see me now! Oh, father, father! Rosy, I’d rather 
be in the most awful strict-discipline school in the whole 
world than here.” 

You think so because you aint at the school,” was 
Rosy’s astute reply. “ Now, Miss Christian, let me think ; 
don’t speak for a minute. It were I who got you into this, 
so it must be me to get you out; that’s but fair.” 

It is — it is; but can you?” 

‘‘ Let me think, miss. Judith will be back in half an 
hour. I’ll think for a bit and then speak.” 

To Christian those few minutes seemed like eternity. 
At last Rosy stood up. She crossed the room, went to 
the door and examined it. 

“ There aint never a lock,” she said. “ That’s bad. 
But we can put the chest of drawers agen’ the door to- , 
night, so that no one can come in without us hearing ’em. 
And if we are really frightened we can push the bed up 
agen’ the chest, and squeeze it in between the door and the 
wall ; then we’ll be as snug and safe as any girls could be. 
Then we must take the first chance that offers to get 
away; we must. Judith aint what I thought her. We 
mustn’t tell her — ^not on any account. We must steal 
away when she aint here. The folks here won’t let us go 
if they think we want to, so we must pretend.” 

Pretend ? ” said Christian, in amazement. 

“ For sure, miss; there aint no other way. We must 
pretend we are delighted — you to be free of the school, me 
to be your companion. We must have a right good time 
to-night and turn Judith’s head with our merriment. We 
must laugh and sing and pretend to enjoy ourselves. We 
must have a sort of feast, and we must talk a lot about 
buying the tambourines ; and Judith must see about hiring 


72 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


a proper tambourine-girrs dress for you and another for 
me. It will mean maybe five shillings more, but that can’t 
be helped. We must catch ’em by guile, Miss Christian — 
Mrs. Carter and the rest. They must hear me talking to 
you about the awful prison life you has escaped, and you 
must say out very loud that you never did enjoy yourself 
so much before. We must take ’em in. You leave it to 
me, miss. You follow up when I speak. When I give 
you a look you will know what I mean. That’s it, miss. 
Then to-morrow we’ll creep away. If anybody meets us 
we’ll say we are going out to buy things. We’ll leave the 
cups and saucers and things behind us, and we’ll never 
come back — never. That’s what we must do. It’s the 
only way, for I don’t believe that we can be locked up for 
running away. But I do think the folks in this house 
will keep us from ever getting home again ; or, at any rate, 
from getting home until they have got all the money they 
can from us.” 

Rosy spoke with great confidence. Christian felt 
cheered by her words. 

It will be horribly difficult,” said Christian ; “ and I 
hate deceiving. I never did deceive anyone yet in my 
life.” 

“ It’s a case of play-acting,” said Rose stoutly ; and if 
you aint been play-acting all your born days, I don’t know 
who has. Haven’t you been Joan of Arc one day, and 
Charlotte Corday another and poor me Marat in his bath, 
waiting for you to stab me — and William Tell and the 
characters in the Bible? There aint no fear that you 
can’t act. You’ve just got to act once more.” 

“ But what?” 

Why, a girl who loves the slums, and dotes on her 
freedom, and is determined that nothing shall make her 
a slave. Now you know what to do. Oh, here comes 
Judith I Fd know Judith’s step in a thousand.” 


PLAY-ACTING 


73 

As Rosy said the last words she began to hum in a high, 
excited, staccato voice : 

“ For Britons never, never, never shall be slaves.” 

Judith burst into the room. She carried a heap of par- 
cels and a sack full of coal. 

“ If this aint love ! she said. “ If this aint, so to 
speak, the height of devotion ! Now then, look spry, both 
of you.’' 

“ Oh, yes,” said Rosy, bursting into a loud and appar- 
ently delighted laugh, you are good. Now we’ll have 
fun. Bustle up. Miss Christian; take off your hat and 
jacket. See, aint I thoughtful? I brought a little apron 
for you in my pocket. You slip it on, deary miss, and 
then you won’t spoil your nice things.” 

“ What do it matter if she spoils her things or not ? ” 
cried Judith. “ She can’t go on dressing in that fashion; 
she’d be nabbed at once. The police would bustle round 
her just like birds round a strange bird. She’ll have to 
dress like the poor folks. The best thing is to pawn her 
dress, and get her one of them thick woolen sort like the 
tambourine-girls wear from the pawn-shop.” 

That’s the right thought, Miss Christian, aint it?” 
said Rosy. “ And you’ll be sure to get a good price for 
such solid clothes as you wear. I could go out now and 
pawn them.” 

No you don’t ! ” said Judith. “ If there’s any pawn- 
ing to be done, I do it. And you needn’t think for a mo- 
ment that your Miss Christian — your fine, guarded young 
lady, who’d get finely punished by the law of the land were 
it known what she’d done — would get much for her 
clothes. It’s very, very little she’ll get; although, of 
course. I’ll do my best for her.” 

Oh, I am so hungry ! ” said Christian, making a val- 
iant effort to speak naturally. 


74 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


For one instant she looked towards the window. It 
was like looking out of prison. Even the roofs, so close at 
hand, seemed to her at that moment the land of the free. 
But it was true she had often acted before, and she could 
and would act for dear life now. So she fell on her knees 
and began to build up the fire. How badly she did it! 
Judith roared with laughter, and dropping down by her 
side, began to give directions. Presently Rosy pulled 
them both aside and lit the fire herself. She was quite 
an adept at this sort of thing. For a wonder the chimney 
did not smoke, and the sight of crackling wood and cheer- 
ful blaze brought the first moment of comfort to poor 
Christian’s heart. When the fire was lit the dirty table 
was laid with the plates and cups and saucers, and pew- 
ter spoons, and ugly black-handled knives. Judith 
thought they were very fine, but Christian, if she had not 
been acting a part, would have found it impossible to have 
eaten with them or on them. 

But the tea was fairly good, and it was made in the 
tiny little brown teapot ; and the herrings were put on the 
pan to fry. Mrs. Carter, attracted by the excellent smell, 
popped her nose in at the door. 

“ My word ! ” she said, “ here’s comfort ; here’s dain- 
ties ; here’s a real feast. Would a poor neighbor who has 
scarcely tasted a morsel all day be welcome, or would 
she be unwelcome? You say the word, miss — welcome 
or unwelcome — the truth, miss, and nothing but the 
truth.” 

Rosy gave Christian an anxious glance. Christian, still 
forcing herself to continue her play-acting, replied in a 
hearty tone : 

“ Of course you are welcome.” 

‘‘ Then do, like a good creature,” suddenly exclaimed 
Judith, who by no means wished the feast to be shared 
by anyone else, “go and take out those curlers. Oh, I 


PLAY-ACTING 


75 


know they are Hinders, but take ’em out — take ’em out — 
and come in looking like a decent, civilized ’uman being.” 

Mrs. Carter hastened to comply, and soon the four, on 
two chairs, were seated round the board. Rosy shared 
half of Christian’s chair, and Judith and Mrs. Carter, 
pushing each other violently from time to time, subsided 
on the other. It cracked under their joint weight. Mrs. 
Carter said that if they were unlucky enough to break it, 
the landlord would charge Christian the full price of a 
new chair. 

He’d do nothing of the sort,” said Judith. ‘‘ Why 
should he, I should like to know? This one is as old as 
the hills, and didn’t cost more than one and elevenpence 
when it was new.” 

She had scarcely uttered the words when crash, crack 
went the chair, and the two were prostrated on the ground. 

They got up amidst peals of laughter. Mrs. Carter as- 
sured Christian that the chair cost seven and sixpence, 
but that she’d make it good with the landlord for half-a- 
crown if Christian would entrust her with that sum. 

We’ll see about it to-morrow,”" said Rosy. I think, 
ma’am, we have all had our meal, and there’s a deal for 
me and this young — person,” she glancing at Christian as 
she spoke — '' to see to. We has to begin our trade to- 
morrow morning. We are poor — very poor.” 

'' Oh, my ! ” said Mrs. Carter. 

She glanced at Judith, who winked back at her. 

“ Yes, desperate,” continued Rosy. “ Aint we. Miss 
Christian ? ” 

“ Certainly we’re very poor,” replied Christian. 

“ But, all the same,” continued Rosy, “ we’re very 
happy ; aint we, missy ? ” 

“ Very,” said Christian again. ‘‘ And we are so thank- 
ful to our kind friends who helped us to run away. 
We are ” 


76 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“Nonsense!’' interrupted Mrs. Carter. “To think' as 
you like this better nor the palaces you have come 
from.” 

“We are Very happy, and there is such a thing as 
drudgery even in a palace,” continued Rosy. “ And this 
young — person — she don’t call herself a lady any more — 
was going to a sort of prison school. She prefers liberty, 
even though liberty aint, so to speak, self-indulgence. 
We’re both happy; aint we. Miss Christian?” 

“ Very happy,” replied Christian. 

“ And how do you mean to live ? ” said Mrs. Carter, im- 
pressed in spite of herself. 

“We thought of going and dancing in the streets. This 
young person can dance most beautifully.” 

“ Well, I never I You’ll make up as Italians, no doubt.” 

“ It’s you that has an acute brain, ma’am,” said Rosy 
in a voice full of admirationu “ That’s what we mean to 
do — aint it, miss ? ” 

“ It is,” said Christian. 

“ And we mean to begin,” continued Rose, “ to-morrow 
morning.” 

“ Oh, no, you don’t ! ” said Mrs. Carter. “ That would 
be dangerous.” 

“ Dangerous or not, we are going to risk it,” said 
Rosy. 

“ Yes, we’re going to risk it,” said Christian in a stout 
voice. 

“ And what I was thinking,” continued Rosy — “ that is, 
if it is agreeable to you, Christian — is that every day, 
while we are out earning our fortunes, we might give 
Mrs. Carter, say, fourpence a day to keep our fire in and 
our room tidy, and perhaps to have the kettle boiling for 
us when we come in at nights If you like, Mrs. Carter, 
I think Christian and me would make it worth your while 
for fourpence a day.” 


PLAY-ACTING 


77 


“ Fm agreeable to that same, if you make it sixpence.” 

“ No, ma’am, we can’t possibly do that. Fourpence is 
too high. If you don’t like it, ma’am, say so, and we’ll 
get a woman downstairs to do it for threepence, or maybe 
twopence.” 

Well, I’ll do it for fourpence if you throw supper into 
the bargain.” 

Can we throw in supper, Miss Christian ? ” asked 
Rosy. 

“ I think so,” said Christian, trying to act the part more 
forcibly than ever. 

“ Fourpence and supper, then,” said Rose. “ But it 
can’t be paid any day that you don’t make yourself useful, 
Mrs. Carter.” 

“No fear of me,” said Mrs. Carter, with a toss of 
her head. 

“And what part shall I have?” said Judith, who was 
absolutely taken in by Rose’s cheerfulness. 

“ You can come and see us when you like, and when- 
we have made enough money we’ll now and then give 
you a treat ; and Mrs. Carter shall come with us. But,” 
added the little girl, emboldened by the effect her words 
were producing, “ we won’t have any of the other people 
of this house. The more you keep us to ourselves, Mrs. 
Carter, the more you will get. Do you understand?” 

“ For certain I do, honey ; and I must say it’s a real 
sensible plan.” 

“ So we will stay here quietly to-night,” said Rosy, 
“ and enjoy ourselves^ and to-morrow morning we will 
go and buy what we want. We’ll start our trade about 
midday. We’ll dress as Italians, of course.” 

“ I’d like fine to see you doing it,” said Mrs. Carter. 

“ You mustn’t follow us on any account — anyhow, not 
for a day or two. We’d feel more nervous, like, if we 
thought you was looking on at us.’^ 


78 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ You be a ’cute un,” said Mrs. Carter. 

Now theui, make yourself scarce, ma’am,” said Judith, 
“ for we have a lot to attend to.” 

Mrs. Carter retired. She was apparently in the height 
of good-humor. Rose instructed Christian how to wash 
up the tea-things. 

By and by Judith also took her leave. 

‘‘ For if I’m not back home before four o’clock, folks 
may suspect and hunt me up, and maybe find you into the 
bargain,” she said to the little girls, and so she left them 
to themselves. 

Yes, at last they were alone. Mrs. Carter had gone 
out ; they heard her heavy tramp as she went downstairs. 
She was the only other lodger on this floor, and the place 
was now comparatively quiet. 

“ If only we could lock the door,” said Rosy. “ But 
there, we can’t.” 

“ Shall you sleep at all to-night. Rosy ? Aren’t you 
•terrified ? ” said Christian. 

“ It’s just this,” said Rosy : I mustn’t let out; I must 
pretend I’m not the least bit frightened.” 

“I don’t suppose you are. You are wonderfully 
brave.” 

“ Now then, let us settle down and let us plan,” said 
Rose. 

They sat close to each other and kept up the fire, and 
they had no idea of saving their small amount of coal. 
What did it matter when they meant to go away on the 
morrow ? 

Presently day faded. They had forgotten to supply 
themselves with candles. Rose did not dare to go out. 
Christian clung to her. 

We’ll keep up the fire all night,” said Rose. “ You’d 
like another cup of tea, wouldn’t you, darling Miss 
Christian ? ” 


PLAY-ACTING 


79 

No/’ said Christian; “I’m not hungry. Rosy, if I 
hadn’t done it I’d have been nearly at school now.” 

“ Yes, darling.” 

“ And I wouldn’t be feeling such an awfully wicked 
girl.” 

“ You can’t help it,” said Rosy. “ It’s the way of life ; 
we are punished when we do wrong.” 

“ Do you think we did very wrong? ” 

“ For certain we did. I knew it all along, but I couldn’t 
hold back from the fun.” 

“ Do you think we are in danger now, Rosy ? ” 

Rose was silent. 

“ Rosy, do you think anything will happen to us to- 
night?” 

“ Miss Christian, you always were brave.” 

“ Yes,” replied Christian, “ but I never did suppose 
that I could be in my present surroundings. I am fright- 
ened to-night, and I don’t pretend I am anything else.” 

“ We will do what we said,” answered Rose. “ We’ll 
put the chest of drawers against the door, and move the 
bedstead against the chest of drawers, and that will fill up 
the space as far as the opposite wall. Then no one can 
get in. Isn’t that a good plan? ” 

“ Let’s do it,” said Christian ; “ and let’s do it now 
while Mrs. Carter is out, for if they heard us moving 
about the room they might try to get in.” 

“ Come along, then. Miss Christian. Let’s be quick. 
We never did a bit of play-acting to equal this before.” 

“ Never,” replied Christian ; and/’ she added under 
her breath, “ I don’t think I will ever, as long as I live, 
want to play-act again.” 


CHAPTER IX 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 

The two girls carried out their plan in all its details. 
They moved the chest of drawers against the door, and 
then they moved the bedstead. By this means they had 
practically locked the door. They were very thankful 
for this later on, for as night advanced and the people 
came home, and the house became full, their terrors in- 
creased. They were now so frightened that they did not 
dare to speak even to each other about their fears; and 
when, shortly after they had secured themselves against 
intrusion, someone first tapped at the door and then 
turned the handle and pushed, and then after a moment 
of silence steps were heard going away, they could only 
clasp each other’s hands and sit close together, almost 
paralyzed with terror. 

“ They’ve shut themselves in,” Christian heard Mrs. 
Carter say to someone on the landing. They’re the 
’cutest young folks I ever see’d.” 

Then the someone who was spoken to growled, and 
Mrs. Carter and this person went into the adjoining room ; 
and there they moved about at intervals, and at intervals 
remained quiet. Christian felt positive that they were 
waiting to do something, and Rose knew that they were 
waiting, but neither girl expressed her terror to the other. 

“ They can only get in by breaking through the door,” 
said Christian, “ and they will scarcely do that.” 

But Rose knew that such people as Mrs. Carter and 
her husband would think very little of breaking through 
an old door if they wished to get at their neighbors’ attic. 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 


8i 


How glad the children were that they had fuel ! They 
piled up the little grate and made the fire burn hot and 
strong; and by and by Rosy tried to persuade Christian 
to have another cup of tea. But Christian was now so 
sick with terror that she could not touch the tea. 

We won’t lie down at all,” said Rosy. We’ll sit 
close to each other by the fire. We won’t sit on the floor, 
for it aint too clean, but we’ll sit on a chair each, and put 
our arms round each other. It’s only for one night, my 
own darling Miss Christian — only for one night — and I 
think somehow God will keep us safe.” 

“ I haven’t prayed to Him,” said Christian in a broken 
voice, “ because I have done wrong. When you do very 
wrong you can’t pray.” 

Maybe you could repent, and then you could pray,” 
said Rosy. 

“ I don’t know,” answered Christian. 

The night went on. There were stars in the sky. The 
children could see the stars from the dormer-window of 
their attic; and presently the moon — a full one — rose and 
flooded the outside world. Christian, from where she sat, 
could see the cats stealing about, making great shadows 
on the neighboring roofs, and she could hear their cry z.s 
they met each other ; she could also hear, far down below, 
the great roar of London itself. And in the house she 
could hear the cries of children and the angry, excited 
words of men and women, and she felt that in all her life 
she had never even imagined anything quite so awful. 
Her one drop of comfort lay in the fact that Rosy — pretty 
Rosy — was cuddled up close to her, and that Rosy cer- 
tainly would not leave her. 

The two young girls did not attempt to undress, and 
Christian’s bag of money was still firmly secured under 
her skirt. 

By and by silence began to reign. Even in a house 


82 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


like this people must sleep sometimes, and the drunken 
men and women lay down on their respective beds, the 
children slept heavily, and in the adjoining attic all was 
still. Then Rosy began to nod and to fall half-forward in 
her chair. Christian had great work to keep her from 
sliding to the ground. Perhaps it was this fact that 
made Christian so wide awake herself; but certain it is 
she could not sleep. 

She was glad that there was a moon in the sky; she 
was glad that the terrible house was quiet at last. Poor 
Christian ! she little knew what lay before her. 

The time passed on, and notwithstanding her determi- 
nation not to close an eye, the silence and the soothing 
effect of Rosy’s presence began to make her drowsy. 
She put her arm more firmly round her little 
companion and let her body lean against Rosy’s, 
and was really beginning to nod her head, when 
suddenly there came a great shadow between her 
and the moonlight. She looked up, and there was 
Mrs. Carter on the roof, trying to get in at the 
v/indow. How she had got out on the leads Christian 
never knew, but she had done so, and was now feeling 
all along the fastening of the dormer-window and was 
endeavoring to open it. 

In one minute it seemed to the young girl that the blood 
of Joan of Arc and Charlotte Corday, and many more of 
the great heroines of the past, rushed through her veins. 
She gave Rosy a jerk — unintentionally, for she did not 
mean to wake her. She did not care about Rosy then, nor 
did she want her. . She felt all-sufficient to herself. In an 
instant she had sprung forward, and going to the window, 
opened it a little way. 

“ Go back this minute,” she said. “ You are not on 
any account to come in ; I will push you down if you try. 
I don’t care whether I hurt you or not ; I will push you off 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 83 

the roof if you try to get in. You have no right here ; go 
back.” 

Mrs. Carter was so amazed by the mere fact of Chris- 
tian’s being up and awake, when she expected her to be 
in bed and sound asleep, and so startled at the girl’s un- 
looked-for courage, that she was absolutely mute. 

Go away,” repeated Christian. “ I know what you 
have come about : you want to steal my money. You think 
I have got some. Well, if I have, it isn’t for you. You 
told me lies to-day about being punished for running 
away, but I don’t tell you any lie when I say that you 
can be put in prison for this — yes, you and your husband. 
I will push you right down off the roof — I don’t care 
whether it hurts or not — if you try to get in.” 

There was a very ugly look on Mrs. Carter’s face. 
Even in the shadow, with her back to the moonlight, 
Christian noticed it; but not a single word escaped her 
lips. Her footing was insecure and dangerous ; one strong 
push from a big girl like Christian standing firmly within 
the room would not only knock her down, but cause her to 
drop a matter of thirty feet on to another roof at a little 
distance. She therefore began cautiously and quietly, 
and still with that evil look on her face, to back away from 
Christian, and in a few minutes the young girl perceived 
by the absence of all shadow that Mrs. Carter must have 
returned to her own attic. 

Then Christian shut the window, fastened it firmly, 
and stood close to it. Mr. Carter might come now that 
his wife had failed, but if he did both Christian and Rose 
would fight him. Christian was certain that between them 
they would be a match for anyone who tried to get in at 
the window. 

‘‘ Rose,” said Christian. 

Rose began to mutter in her sleep. She had fallen for- 
ward now, and was half on the chair and half on the floor. 


84 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


I did not mean it, great-aunt,” she began. It was 
just that I were tempted, and I never, never thought that 
Miss Christian ” 

"'Wake up. Rose,’’ said Christian; wake up. You 
have got to stay awake.” 

Then Rose did open her dazed eyes. 

Whatever is the matter ? ” she cried. 

“ Build up the fire and Til tell you,” said Christian. 

There was a new tone in Christian’s voice ; it was firm 
and strong and almost triumphant. It had the conquer- 
ing note in it which Rosy had noticed when they played 
games sometimes in the attic. 

“ Oh, Miss Christian,” she said, “ what is it? ” 

Christian told her what had occurred. 

I am not proud,” said Christian, “ not a bit. It was 
just given to me to say the words, and I am sure God 
was helping me. I am sure God is sorry for us, and He is 
going to help us both. I don’t feel a bit frightened, but 
we must keep them out. Rosy. If two of them come to- 
gether it will be hard work, but we must be strong and 
firm and push them over if they try to come in. We will 
stay by the window all night, and you shall stay near to 
me, and we won’t leave it except to stir up the fire.” 

The rest of the night was spent in that fashion, and as 
the hours went by and the moon set and darkness really 
came on. Rosy’s fears began to return to her very badly; 
but Christian was not at all afraid. 

** We will keep them out,” she said. If they had been 
coming back they would have come by now. And even if 
they do come back they will find us here.” 

Perhaps Mr. and Mrs. Carter were not quite such val- 
iant people as Mrs. Carter would have given the children 
to understand, for certain it is that, although Christian 
fancied she heard a step on the roof outside the window 
towards morning, it did not come any nearer. Perhaps 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 85 

Carter was only prowling round to see if the children were 
still up and awake. 

When the morning dawned there were two very tired 
little faces gazing sadly each at the other. 

“ This is the longest night I have ever lived through,” 
said Christian, “ and yesterday was the longest day. 
There is only one thing now to be done : I will go back to 
nursey and Miss Thompson and Miss Neil, and tell them 
everything. I will write to father and mother. I have 
done dreadfully wrong, and I ought to be punished, and I 
am quite, quite willing to go to the strict-discipline 
school.” 

That's all very well,” cried Rose. “ but what 
about me ? ” 

The terrors of the night were over, and once again she 
began to feel a certain charm in a life of independence; 
the little attic, with the winter sunshine streaming in at 
the dormer-window, was not altogether despicable; and 
surely there was a great fascination in the thought of 
dancing and playing and taking a monkey round the 
London streets. 

You did wrong too. Rose,” said Christian. ** Of 
course, you wouldn’t have done it but for me. I will 
stand up for you all I can. I will tell your mother myself. 
She’ll be angry, of course, but she wouldn’t be a true 
mother if she didn’t forgive.” 

“ Oh, Miss Christian ! you don’t know what it means. 
If you only would ” 

Then she looked at Christian’s face and changed her 
mind. It was useless to talk any further; Christian was 
resolved. She had been resolved to run away, and she 
had done so; she was now equally resolved to return to 
the straight paths. 

'' I tell you what it is. Miss Christian,” said Rose ; ** if 
you’d only speak to great-aunt, and ask her to let me live 


86 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


with her until you come back again, I’d be as happy as the 
day is long. You’ll ask her, miss, won’t you? ” 

“ Perhaps,” said Christian ; “ but it is time we were off, 
and we are not going to pretend any more.” 

Rosy had made tea, and Christian drank a cup and ate 
a morsel of bread ; and then they pulled the bedstead away 
from its place beside the door, pushed the chest of draw- 
ers aside, and prepared to leave the attic. But first 
Christian took half-a-crown from her pocket. 

“ Whatever’s that for ? ” asked Rosy. 

“ It’s for the chair that Judith and Mrs. Carter broke,” 
said Christian. 

She had scarcely said the words before Mrs. Carter, 
with a pretended smile on her face and her hair quite 
tidily arranged, opened the door of her attic and came out. 

“ Well, now, dearies,” she said, and how are you 
both? And how did you sleep? ” 

Christian looked at her in some wonder. Mrs. Carter 
did not even blush. 

Why, now,” she said, “ the way poor wom.en are 
misunderstood! You fastened your door, timorous 
young things, supposing as the neighbors might be break- 
ing into your room and getting your bits of gold. You 
had no cause to fear that with me a-sleeping on the same 
floor; you had but to shout to me and I’d have come to 
you, and there aint a neighbor in the house as would do 
anything to little gels when Martha Carter’s blood is up. 
Well, you shut your door, but I couldn’t sleep. I said to 
Willyum, * Willyum,’ I sez, ‘ I can’t get any rest for 
thinking of those two poor little haristocrats next door. 
They don’t trust us, Willyum,’ sez I, ' and I’ll open the 
winder and steal out on the leads and look in at ’em, just 
to see that they’re cozy and fast asleep.’ 

“ ‘ Do,’ sez Willyum ; and I gets out, and, my word I I 
was took back. You turned into a young savage, miss. 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 87 

and you threatened to murder me, and I as good-natured 
a woman as ever walked. 

“ Back I goes to Willyum. * They’re young sparrer- 
haws,’ sez I, ‘ and we’ll leave ’em to ’emselves. I’ll 
have no more dealing with ’em. I never was took up with 
haristocrats, and these are the worst of their species.’ 

Willyum agrees with me, and we drop asleep. Well, 
miss, I meant no harm; you mistook me — that was 
all.” 

Christian’s clear eyes fixed themselves steadily on Mrs. 
Carter’s bad face; then she said in a gentle tone: 

** We are going away. We don’t like this house, and 
we are going. You can do what you like with the 
crockery and the frying-pan and the coals, and you can 
have that half-crown in order to get the broken chair 
mended. And I paid for this room for a week, and you 
can use it until the week is up. Good-by; we are going. 
Don’t keep us. If you or your husband follow us I shall 
scream for the police, and I shall tell the whole truth 
about everything. You’d best not follow us. Come, 
Rose.” 

She took her little companion’s hand, and they ran 
downstairs. 

As they ran the neighbors on each floor peeped out to 
watch them, and one or two made as though to follow 
them ; but somehow they stopped short, for there was an 
expression on Christian’s face which seemed to daunt 
them. She was walking very upright, and there was not 
a scrap of fear about her. Rosy, who stepped by her 
side, looked altogether small and insignificant by com- 
parison. 

** My word ! ” said Mrs. Carter, who came downstairs 
behind the children, turning as she spoke to address a 
slatternly woman who had come out of her room to 
see the sport, as she expressed it — ‘‘ my word ! that eldest 


88 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


girl, she’ll do what she said. She’s a character, she be. 
Why, if you’ll believe it, last night, when I stood .by the 
winder as kind as kind can be, just to see if the pore 
little dears were sleeping sound, she threatened to mur- 
der me, she did — no less. They’re a good riddance, they 
be, and I’m going to see the landlord about that bit of a 
room. Pore man, I don’t think he’ll ever see his rent.” 

“ See his rent ! ” screamed Mrs. Peters, the woman who 
had been spoken to. You know as well as I do that it 
was paid in full by that queer girl what came here yester- 
day. If there are any spoils in that there room, we’ll share 
with you, Mrs. Carter.” 

The excitement which this remark caused was really 
good for the children, for it so distracted Mrs. Carter’s 
attention, and so fierce was the quarreling which ensued, 
that they were absolutely forgotten. They walked on si- 
lently for some little time. Rosy’s heart beat hard, but 
Christian felt herself more like Joan of Arc than ever. 

We must try and get home,” she said. “ We have 
plenty of money, and I shall ask the police the best way 
to Russell Square.” 

Rose clutched her hand. 

** Don’t, Christian, don’t ! ” she cried. You mustn’t. 
I don’t care ; I am frightened. That story may be true or 
it mayn’t. S’pose it is true ; s’pose they’re angry ; and — 
Oh, dear ! oh, dear ! Look, Christian — look ! ” 

She pulled Christian forward. They were just passing 
a police-station, and there, pasted to the walls of the front 
of the house in very large letters, was an exact descrip- 
tion of themselves : 

“ Missing. — A tall girl of about thirteen, with long, 
fair hair ; and a shorter girl with dark, curly hair.” 

A long description followed, giving, item for item, all 
particulars with regard to the children. The tall girl wore 
a dark-blue serge dress and jacket, and the small girl was 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 89 

in red. A “ substantial reward ” was offered for the re- 
covery of these two girls. 

When Christian read this very startling description she 
felt the courage oozing out of her finger-tips. 

‘‘ I suppose that awful woman is right. She must be 
right when the police are looking for us. This notice is 
outside a police-station. What is to be done ? 

As Christian spoke she held Rosy’s arm more firmly 
than ever. The two girls stood opposite the police-station, 
and once again Christian read the words of the advertise- 
ment. As she did so a stoutly built man of the laboring 
type came up. 

He read'the advertisement, and then he glanced at the 
two girls. Once again he read, and once again he looked. 
Christian was so absorbed in the description of herself 
that she did not notice the man ; but Rose saw him. 

“ Is there anything I can do for you, lydies ? If so I’ll 
be pleased,” he remarked suddenly. 

Christian replied eagerly, Do you know your way to 
Russell Square? It’s a big square in Bloomsbury. Can 
you tell me how to get there? ” 

'' Bloomsbury,” said the man, scratching his forehead. 
“ Never heard tell of it. Is it far from Lunnon, lydy ? ” 
No,” replied Christian ; ** it’s a place in London, and 
we want to get there as soon as possible.” 

I daren’t go home,” whispered Rosy. “ You know, 
Christian — you must know what it means.” 

Christian took her hand. “ Come on,” she said firmly ; 
'' we’re all right. If we can get home without the police 
finding us, do you think that my dear nursey or Miss 
Thompson will lock us up? The thing is to get back to 
Russell Square and tell everything, and then we shall be 
a|l right.” 

“ I’m willin’ to go with you, lydies,” said the man. 
** I know my way all right about this part of Lunnon, 


90 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


which aint, so to speak, a respectable part ; and when we 
get to the neighborhood of the houses where the gentry 
lives, it’s but to ask my way and I’ll be told. I’m willin’ 
and anxious to oblige you two lydies. Oh, I know I be 
a son o’ toil, but I may say I’m honest. You may trust 
me — that you may.” 

Just then two policemen came out of the station ; they 
stood on the steps and talked to each other. Presently 
one of them fixed his eyes on Christian. Her appearance 
evidently interested him, and he spoke to the other in a 
low voice. This decided the young girl. 

“ We’ll go with you,’^ she said to the man ; ‘‘ only you 
must be very quick. We want to get to Russell Square 
early this morning.” 

Right you are, lydy,” said the man, and he stepped on 
in front. 

The two girls followed him. They walked in this 
fashion for the greater part of a mile, and all the wonder- 
ful dreams that Christian had ever dreamt about the 
happy life which she and Rosy would spend together dis- 
appeared as though they had never existed. She saw 
herself at last as she was — a very naughty, discontented 
little runaway girl. She had done nothing great or 
noble; on the contrary, she had been fearfully disobedi- 
ent, and had doubtless given intense trouble to those 
who loved her. She to dare to compare herself to Joan 
of Arc or Charlotte Corday! She writhed now as she 
saw herself in her true colors. There was only one thing 
she was thankful for, and that was for the fact that her 
father and mother were out of England. 

‘‘ They at least do not know what I have done,” she 
thought ; and by the time they do know, they will have 
got my letter, and I’ll have told them — oh, yes. I’ll have 
told them — ^how sorry I am.” 

Suddenly the man turned and faced the children. 


A NIGHT IN THE SLUMS 


91 


“If you two lydies,” he said, “ aint hungry, I am. 
Aint you got any money about yer?” 

“ Oh, indeed we have,’’ said Christian. “ We can give 
you quite a nice meal if you wish for it.” 

“ But we aint got too much,” said Rosy. She nudged 
her companion and gave her a warning look. 

“ Here’s a shop where they have prime vittles,” said the 
man ; and as he spoke he stopped before a common-look- 
ing eating-house and beckoned the children to follow him 
inside. 

It didn’t look nice, Christian thought; but then they 
were very hungry — in fact, they were half-starved. 
Never before in her whole life had Christian known what 
real, desperate hunger meant — for they had scarcely 
touched any food for the last twenty-four hours. 

Within the shop was an appetizing smell of fried fish 
and baked potatoes, and there were long tables with 
marble tops, and plates and cups and saucers. Coffee, 
too, was smoking in a great urn. A woman with two 
tired little children came in and ordered cocoa, and the 
cocoa looked good and rich and steaming hot. Oh, yes, 
they did not mind how ugly the place was outside ; within 
there was food, and they were so terribly hungry. 


CHAPTER X 


JUDITH FORD 

Now, it SO happened that while Christian and Rose 
were struggling to get back to their homes, Miss Neil, 
Miss Thompson, and poor nurse were nearly at their 
wits’ ends. 

When Miss Neil had missed Christian on the day 
before, she had rushed at once to the bookstall, for she 
knew that the young girl adored books, and she felt certain 
that she would find her there. But of course no Chris- 
tian was to be found. The porters were asked, and 
even the stationmaster came out and a thorough and 
complete search was made; but by this time Christian 
herself was far away; as poor Miss Neil said, she had 
vanished like smoke off the face of the earth. 

A truly terrible day followed. It was impossible to 
communicate with Mr. and Mrs. Mitford, and yet the 
child must be found without delay. By twelve o’clock the 
whole affair was put into the hands of the police. Re- 
wards were offered, and advertisements were issued far 
and wide all over London. It was in consequence of this 
fact that poor Christian was so terrified by the adver- 
tisement at the police-station. 

These advertisements were got ready very quickly, and 
it so happened that late on the evening of the very day 
when Christian had disappeared Judith Ford saw one of 
them. Judith read it with great interest, and as she did 
so a pleased sensation crept round her heart. She was 
the sort of girl to do nothing except with an eye to the 
main chance. It was entirely because she hoped to make 


92 


JUDITH FORD 


93 


money that she had helped Christian and Rose. Now it 
suddenly occurred to her that perhaps, after all, it might 
be her best plan to try to obtain “ the substantial reward '' 
which was offered to anyone who would find the missing 
children. Although she had fully intended to possess her- 
self of the greater part of Christian’s little purse, yet this 
might mean a still more profitable transaction. She there- 
fore made up her mind to go that very night to Russell 
Square and tell Miss Thompson and the nurse where the 
children were to be found. 

But when Judith reached her mother’s house she came 
into the midst of a family catastrophe. One of her 
brothers had been badly hurt in a fall from a ladder. He 
happened to be Judith’s favorite brother, and even she for- 
got her avarice in the agony she experienced when she 
saw him lying insensible and evidently in danger. 

But when by and by the boy was removed to the hos- 
pital, and quiet reigned once again in the family, Judith 
remembered the advertisement and what it might mean 
for her. It was too late that night to go to see Miss 
Thompson, but early the next morning — soon after eight 
o’clock — a stoutly built girl might have been seen mount- 
ing the steps of the great house in Russell Square. 

I am Judith Ford,” she said to the butler, ** and I 
want a lydy of the name of Thompson. You stir yourself 
now and bring her down to me. You think nought of me, 
no doubt, but I’ve got that which you’d give your eyes for. 
Hurry up and get the lydy down, for I’m the person she’s 
a-wanting to see.” 

The butler looked indignant, but as Judith did not mind 
this in the least, and as her face expressed a good deal of 
resolution, and wore also a most knowing air, he decided 
to admit her. 

Whatever he said to Miss Thompson brought that lady, 
and also nurse, down very quickly. 


94 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ I know where the two children are/’ said Judith. “ I 
know it for the best of good reasons, because I was with 
’em, poor dears ! I warned ’em all I could not to do it, 
but they wouldn’t listen to me. They’re in quite a re- 
spectable place, and I meant to come straight and tell you 
last night, but my brother Joe nearly died from a fall 
from a ladder. I can take you to the children, and I will. 
What is the money you are going to give me? I want a 
good lot. No one else can find them, but I can.” 

“ We’ll give you five pounds,” said Miss Thompson. 
“ Be quick; there isn’t an instant to lose. Judson, please 
call a four-wheeler.” 

But Judith planted her feet firmly on the rug. 

“ ’Taint to be done,” she said. ‘‘ I won’t go for no five 
pounds. I want ten — ^not a penny less. Why, I could get 
more than that from Miss Christian; aint she got it in a 
little bag under her skirt ? ” 

Oh, the darling ! ” cried nurse, nearly bursting into 
tears. ** And didn’t I make the bag, and tell her how to 
wear it, and ” 

“ Most like there aint much of the money left by now,” 
said Judith. “ It wasn’t my fault as your Miss Christian 
ran away. I got ’em both into a respectable room, and I 
meant to help ’em. But you have offered a ‘ substantial 
reward,’ and a substantial reward means ten pounds or 
it means nothing at all. Is it yes or no ? ” 

It’s yes, of course,” said Miss Thompson. “ Nurse, 
not a word ; the child must be found. Judson, call a cab ; 
and you must come with us. You will sit on the box, 
Judson.” 

Judith smiled grimly. She was having things pretty 
much her own way. Really this adventure was turning 
out well. 

Soon nurse and Miss Thompson were seated in a four- 
wheeler. Judith faced them, and Judson took his place on 


JUDITH FORD 


95 


the box with all the dignity he could muster. Judith now 
enjoyed herself vastly. 

“Look slippy/’ she said to the cabby; “Til tell yer 
where to go. Drive first to Paddington Station, and then 
take the first turning to the left, then the second to 
right then first to left again. You’ll find yourself in a 
low part, but never you mind that. When you get to 
the fifth turn to the left you stop, and I’ll get on the 
box and order you where to go. Oh, yes, there’ll be 
room for me, as well as his lordship the butler. Now 
then, hurry up.” 

The cabman whipped up his horse, and the cab was 
jolted forward. Miss Thompson, in her agony of mind, 
clutched nurse’s hand. 

By and by they reached Paddington Station, and the 
cabman took the turns that Judith indicated. Judith 
herself now sat with her head and half of her body out 
of the window, shouting directions. At last the cab 
drew up. 

“ I can’t go any farther,” said the cabby, looking 
round at Judith. 

“ Frightened, be yer ? ” said that young woman. 
“ Now, then, lydies, you keep quiet. We be going 
into rough places, but never mind ; I'll be on the 
box.” 

She scrambled up and squeezed herself between 
Judson and the cabby. Judson had never felt so insulted 
in his life, but Judith did not mind that. 

“ Turn to your right,” she cried to the cabman. “ Now 
to the left; now down that street. A bit bobby, are yer? 
No call to be. You look slippy! You’re a bit of a soft, 
aint yer, cabby? ” 

The cabman chaffed Judith, and Judith chaffed him 
back. Judson, with his arms folded, sat as though he 
were a statue. 


96 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


By and by they stopped at a street which led into a 
court called Paradise Court. It was in this awful court 
that the poor children had spent the night. Judith now 
sprang from the box and opened the door. 

“ Out you get, lydies,’’ she said. The butler can 
walk behind.” 

She swept her hand towards Judson as she spoke. 

'' You and me,” she continued, turning to Miss 
Thompson, “ and t’old nurse can keep together in front. 
We’ll keep nurse atween us, being the most ancient of 
the party. There aint nought to fear. This night will 
have done ’em both a sight of good. They want to be 
shown how wicked they was when they left their com- 
ferable homes.” 

By and by the little party reached the house where 
the children had lodged, and very slowly they went up- 
stairs. They reached the top landing, and here Judith 
with a vigorous kick pushed Christian’s room door open. 
The sight within was not calculated to reassure either 
nurse or Miss Thompson. For Mrs. Carter and Mrs. 
Peters from below-stairs had evidently come to an ami- 
cable arrangement, and were now finishing the pro- 
visions left in the attic by the two children. Further- 
more, the half-crown which Christian had laid on the 
table had been expended on beer and sausages. The 
sausages were frying on the fire, and the kettle was 
boiling. 

Nothing could exceed the horror of this scene to poor 
Miss Thompson. As to nurse, she was now so fear- 
fully anxious about Christian that she had no time to 
be alarmed or shocked on any other count. 

Where is my child — my darling? ” she cried. 
‘‘Where have you hidden her? Oh, you bad women, 
what have you done with my pet? Tell me at once.” 

“ Highty-tighty! ” cried Mrs. Carter, jumping to her 


JUDITH FORD 


97 


feet and putting her arms akimbo; “and who may 
you be? 

“ You know who I am, at any rate,” said Judith. 
“ And, let me tell you, this is my room, for I paid for 
it with money of the realm. So out of it you go. Where 
have you put those young lydies? These two lydies have 
come along for 'em, and they're going to pay me well — 
and better than well — so you must bring 'em out from 
where you have hidden 'em. Where are they? '' 

“ Sakes! '' cried Mrs. Carter, who had not recognized 
Judith at first, and now thought it best to humor her, 
“ there's no need to get into a fluster. The young uns 
have gone. Notwithstanding the rare kindness with 
which they was treated, they walked out nearly an hour 
and a half ago; and where they are now dear only 
knows, for I don't.'' 

Judith asked a few more pertinent questions; then she 
turned to Miss Thompson. Her face looked decidedly 
frightened. 

“ We've got to follow 'em,'' she said. “ Of course, 
we'll soon overtake 'em. Let's go back to the cab, 
and be quick.'' 

They went downstairs. Miss Thompson described 
her feelings afterwards as those of a person who was 
stunned. 

“ I could not have felt worse if I had heard that 
Christian was dead,'' she said; “and the awful thing 
was that her father and mother were away. If they 
had been at home I might have borne it.” 

Now, while these good people were searching high 
and low for the missing children, the children them- 
selves were having a very bad time. How it happened 
they did not know, but when they had finished their 
meal — their warm and delicious meal of fried fish and 
fried potatoes and hot, strong, sweet cocoa — they be- 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


98 

came wonderfully sleepy — so sleepy that they could not 
keep their eyes open. And the man who had looked 
after them and ordered them food, and had' really 
seemed quite attentive and kind, and, as Rosy expressed 
it, most respectable, suggested that they should stay 
just where they were and have “ their little snooze 
out.’^ 

“ You are fair done,” he said. I don’t know what 
kind of a night you had, but hungrier children I never 
saw; and now, I may add, I never saw sleepier. You 
have your sleep out, and I’ll come back in an hour or 
so. I’ll go and have a smoke. It’s early yet in the day, 
and we’ll get to Bloomsbury and that big square you 
spoke of in less than no time; so have your sleep out 
now.” 

Christian said afterwards that of course she ought 
not to have yielded, but she really scarcely knew what 
she was doing; her head would fall forward and her 
eyes would close. Presently she found herself leaning 
against Rosy, and Rosy found herself leaning against 
Christian, and unconsciousness stole over them. 

They never knew how long they slept, but when they 
did come to themselves, and Christian, rubbing her 
eyes, looked around her, and Rosy, sitting up, ex- 
claimed “ Oh, dear ! ” several times, they neither of them 
recognized their surroundings. For they were far away 
from the eating-house; they were in the open air, sitting 
side by side, two most desolate little objects, in the 
midst of a great builder’s yard. They were leaning up 
against a huge building, and there were stacks and stacks 
of wood close to them, and the pleasant smell of newly 
sawn wood not far off. And there was the whir of a 
saw also in their ears. But how had they got there? 
And where was there? In what part of the whole wide 
world were they now? 


JUDITH FORD 


99 


** Oh, Rosy, what is it ? said Christian. 

“ I don’t know,” said Rosy. 

“ I wonder if we are dead and this is ” 

** Oh, this aint heaven!” said Rosy. '‘I never felt 
more frightened in all my life. Where can we be? ” 

“ Oh, dear ! oh, dear I Can’t you remember anything 
at all?” said Christian. ‘‘I had a dream,” she con- 
tinued, rubbing her eyes as she spoke. “ I thought I 
was eating — oh, such good things! — and that, however 
much I ate, I was still hungry. And then I dreamt that 
I was sleepy, and I slept, and I wanted — oh, so badly ! — 
to be back in my own little bed at home; but all the 
things I wanted I couldn’t get. Oh, dear ! ” she added, 
with a bitter sigh, ** I do remember now. We have run 
away from home. We were at an eating-house. There 
was a man, and he seemed quite respectable, and we fell 
asleep when we had eaten some good things — fried fish 
and potatoes. But how have we got here?” 

Rosy’s dark eyes opened wide. She suddenly fell on 
her knees by Christian’s side and began to feel her. 

“ What are you doing now? ” said Christian. 

Your pocket, Christian — the little pocket under 
your dress with the gold.” 

“ Oh, that’s all right,” said Christian. “ No one 
knows of that.” 

She started up, although she felt very faint and giddy. 
She began to feel under her dress. The next minute 
she uttered a cry. 

“ Oh, Rosy, it’s gone ! It’s gone altogether. See ! the 
string is cut,” she added, lifting her skirt. And I had 
two shillings in my upper pocket, and that is gone too. 
All our money. Rosy — it’s all gone.” 

Then I understand,” said Rosy briskly. '' It’s bad, 
but it might be worse. We’ll go straight home. We 
have been robbed. I don’t know how they did it, but 
L ofC. 


lOO 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


they have done it. We’ll go straight home, and at 
once.” 

She had scarcely uttered the words before a good-na- 
tured-looking man of the working-class, but with a very 
different expression from that of the so-called respect- 
able man, came towards them. He was holding a bull- 
dog in leash; and the bulldog, suddenly catching sight 
of the children, strained to get near them and began to 
bark loudly. 

“ Hold that noise. Tiger,” said the man; and then he 
came to the children and looked at them. 

Notwithstanding their torn and draggled and tired 
appearance, neither Christian nor Rose looked like or- 
dinary tramps. The man continued to gaze at them at- 
tentively. 

“ However did you get here?” he said. 

Please, sir,” said Rose, ‘^will you be kind to us? 
We are two most unhappy girls. We ran away from 
home yesterday, both of us — me from a very humble 
home, and Miss Christian Mitford from her grand one. 
We don’t pretend that we are not the very worst young 
girls in the world, but we’re that sorry, and we want to 
get back home again. We’re so sorry that we can’t even 
speak of it.” 

“ And we’ve been robbed,” said Christian. “ I had 
over seven pounds when I left home, and it is gone. A 
man took it, I think, in an eating-house.” 

“Why, bless me!” said the man, “you must be the 
very children who are being advertised for all over Lon- 
don. Come, I’ll see about this; I’ll soon put the matter 
straight for you.” 

The man tried to take Christian’s hand, but she moved 
away from him. 

“ I — I am frightened,” she said. “ Is it true — is it — 
that the police can lock us up?” 


JUDITH FORD 


loi 


“ Dear me! ” said the man, with a laugh. “ Whoever 
heard of such a thing? No; of course it isn’t true. You 
trust me and I’ll see you safe back to wherever you 
came from. Come along into the house. There’s my 
mother; she and I always live in the yard, for it’s won- 
derful how folks do manage to creep into a builder’s 
yard and steal things. Come along, little ladies. She’ll 
give you both a cup of tea. Oh, dear, this is a find I ” 

As the man spoke Christian lost all fear of him, and 
even Rose looked happy and comforted. So they fol- 
lowed him into a very little house, where an old woman 
was bustling about. 

“ Well, Albert,” she said, at the sight of the tall man, 
“and what is the news now?” 

“ Rare good news for us, mother,” was his answer. 
“ Didn’t I tell you that we’d just get that money in the 
nick of time? And here it is, mother. Here are the 
little hostages who will get us over our difficulty.” 

As he spoke he drew Christian and Rose forward. 

“ The missing children,” he said. “ And when you 
have given them a cup of hot tea each, and a bit of your 
celebrated hot toast. I’ll take them home. Make the 
tea strong, mother, for it’s my belief the poor creatures 
have been drugged.” 


CHAPTER XI 


LITTLE PROVIDENCES 

Never — never to their dying day — did Christian and 
Rose enjoy anything so much as their comfortable seat 
by the carpenter’s fire, and the hot, strong tea which 
the carpenter’s mother gave them. She informed them 
that her name was Morris, that her son was called John 
Morris, and that they were both thoroughly respectable. 

“ You have had such a queer adventure that maybe 
you won’t know just for a bit who is respectable and 
who is not; but me and John is. Aren’t we, John?” 

“ Strikes me you are about right, mother,” said John 
Morris; and then he sat down and stared at the two 
children. 

“ It is too wonderful,” he kept saying; and when he 
said this he began to ruffle up his thick hair and to 
rub his forehead. 

'‘What is wonderful?” said Christian at last. “Do 
you greatly mind, Mrs. Morris? but if your son wouldn’t 
stare so very hard, Rosy and I would like it better.” 

“ Oh, ’taint at you he’s looking,” said Mrs^ Morris. 
“ Don’t you fash yourself, my dear.” 

“ But he is looking first at Rose and then at me,” 
said Christian. “Aren’t you, Morris?” she added, 
turning to the tall young man. 

“ Well, I be and I been’t,” was his reply. “ I’m look- 
ing through you, miss, and that’s the fact.” 

“Oh, dear!” said Christian; “I think that makes 

matters a little worse.” 


lOZ 


LITTLE PROVIDENCES 


103 


“ Would you like to hear a bit of a story, my deary? ” 
said Mrs. Morris, drawing her straw arm-chair close to 
the fire as she spoke. “ You don’t mind the children 
hearing it, do you, John, my son?” 

“ No, mother,” was his answer. “ You tell ’em just 
as much as you think fit.” 

Well, loveys,” said Mrs. Morris, it was just like 
this. John and me, we owed a bit of money — exactly 
seven pounds ten — and we didn’t know how on the wide 
earth to get it, and the man to whom we owed it was 
about to sell us up. He was going to put the brokers 
into this little bit of a house, my darlings.” 

” Who are they? ” asked Christian. 

“ Men, lovey — cruel men. They come and take pos- 
session of your house, and you can’t call even the bed 
you sleep on your own, to say nothing of your little fry- 
ing-pan and china-lined saucepan. And when a day or 
two has gone by they sell everything and take away the 
money, and you are left without stick or stone belong- 
ing to you.” 

“ That must be very awful. I never heard of any- 
thing quite so awful,” said Christian; ‘'and only for 
seven pounds ten.” 

“ I’ve heard of it,” said Rosy. “ There’s one thing 
about poor folks: they do hear of that sort of thing. 
It’s very bad, Mrs. Morris,” she continued. 

“ I think it is about the most cruel thing I ever heard 
of,” said Christian. “Oh! if only my seven pounds 
weren’t stolen you should have them all.” 

“Aint they dear children, both of ’em?” said Mrs. 
Morris, looking at her son, and the tears filled her 
eyes. “ But, my darlings, maybe you’ll be the means of 
giving us the money after all; for a reward is offered by 
your friends, loves, and if anybody earns that reward 
now it is my son John.” 


104 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


'' If the little ladies are ready, perhaps we’d best be 
going,” said John Morris. 

“ Oh, yes, we’re quite ready,” said Christian. Hadn’t 
we better have a cab? I feel rather tired,” she 
added. 

'*We can’t have it,” said the man; “there aint any 
money to pay for it.” 

“ But it can be paid for when we get home,” said 
Christian. 

“ We won’t risk it,” said the man. “ They may have 
left the house; there’s no saying what might have hap- 
pened. We’ve got to walk, misses/’ 

“ I’m so tired,” said Christian again; but Rosy nudged 
her and said: 

“ Keep up your heart. You can rest as long as ever 
you like when you get home.” 

So they bade good-by to Mrs. Morris, and thanked 
her for her tea; and she kissed them and called them 
“ little providences ” and “ little hostages to fortune,” 
and smiled at them as they went out of the door, and 
looked so happy that it almost broke Christian’s heart to 
see her. 

“To be happy — oh, so happy! — in such a tiny, tiny 
house, and then to want just seven pounds ten, and be- 
cause of the lack of so little, to have the terrible fear of 
her furniture being sold! Indeed it shall not be!” 
thought Christian; “ I’ll see to that.” 

But as she walked through the dirty, sloppy streets by 
John Morris’s side she could not help wondering if she 
had any right to ask anything at all. For the thought 
of what she had done and the misery she had caused 
kept cropping up ever and ever before her mind, and 
with ea.ch thought her sin seemed to grow blacker, and 
her ingratitude to her parents greater. 

’ “ And they’re not even at home,” thought the young 


LITTLE PROVIDENCES 


105 

girl. “ Oh, who will give the poor carpenter seven 
pounds ten?^’ 

From the part of London where the children had been 
found to Russell Square was a long way, and soon Chris- 
tian was so weary that she could scarcely drag herself 
along. 

“There’s no help for it,” said the carpenter; “I’m a 
strong man and can carry you for a bit, missy. Come,” 
he added; “ put your arms round my neck. Now then.” 

Christian felt heartily ashamed of herself. A great 
girl to be carried through the streets of London! But 
oh, how weary she was! Her feet felt quite blistered, 
and the carpenter’s arms were very strong, and he had 
such a kind face. 

“ Are you sure — quite sure — carpenter,” she said 
after a pause, “ that you will get that money? Are you 
certain that you will be rewarded — that the people who 
advertised will give you as much for finding us?” 

“ I guess that’s about the sum,” said Morris, and then 
he laughed. 

What with one adventure and another, it was dark — 
quite dark — past six o’clock — before the runaways 
reached the old family house in Russell Square. Nurse 
and Miss Thompson had both returned. Judith, dis- 
comfited and miserable, had gone back to her mother’s 
house. A tall policeman was standing in the hall, and 
Miss Neil, who had also come to the fore, was talking to 
him very earnestly. He was suggesting this thing and 
another, and as he suggested, and Miss Thompson’s 
pale face looked up at him, and Miss Neil’s rather in- 
dignant one was fixed on his face, and nurse wept in the 
background, there came a loud pealing ring at the front- 
door. 

“ To save my life I couldn’t go to answer it,” thought 
nurse to herself. “ Something tells me as there is news. 


io6 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

good or bad, and for the life of me I can’t stir a step to 
meet it.” 

But Judson, his pride a good deal ruffled, was not far 
away, and he stalked to the front-door and flung it 
open. 

Then there was a scream — which, on the part of Miss 
Neil, almost reached a shriek — for in the arms of a tall 
man was a big, fair-haired girl, and by his side stood a 
little, dark-haired girl, and the next instant all three 
were in the hall. Christian, when she saw the police- 
man, very nearly cried again; but the welcome the 
wanderers received must soon have reassured them. 
Miss Neil was the only one who even tried to look 
severe. 

“ Well, you have very nearly killed me,” she said. 
“ But there, there ! thank God in heaven you are back. 
Miss Thompson, see the poor children. How fright- 
fully tired they look! I have no doubt they have been 
in horrid, dirty, smelly places, and have brought back 
the most horrible complaints.” 

But Christian and Rose hardly heard the words, for 
the home feeling was so comfortable, and nurse’s 
kisses, given indiscriminately first to her nursling and 
then to her great-niece, were too delicious for words. 

It was Christian who first recovered herself. She 
heard someone talking in the hall, and looking up, 
she saw Morris, looking very upright and very re- 
spectable, on the mat. Now, no one had noticed 
Morris ; and perhaps, being not at all an aggressive sort 
of man, he might have gone away from the house 
without any reward but for Christian. The look on 
his face brought her quickly to herself. 

‘‘ Miss Thompson,” she said, “ Miss Neil,” she stood 
between the two in the hall, “ I don’t pretend that I 
haven’t been a very naughty girl. I am sorry, although 


LITTLE PROVIDENCES 


107 


that doesn't mend matters; but neither Rosy nor I 
would perhaps have ever got back home at all if it had 
not been for this man. His name is Morris — ^John 
Morris — and he lives in a timber-yard, a very nice place 
indeed. And he and his mother have a little house 
there, and they’re in great trouble because of seven 
pounds ten. Please, I want him to have seven pounds 
ten at once for finding us.” 

“ You did mention, ma’am,” said Morris, touching 
his forehead with great punctiliousness, “ or at least 
the parties who put up the advertisement mentioned, 
that the reward for them as found the little ladies 
would be substantial.” 

‘‘ It was I who put those words,” said Miss Neil. 
'' I regretted having to do so, but there was no way out.” 

“ My mother and me, we do want money,” said 
Morris, or I wouldn’t make so bold as to ask for it, 
for it’s real happiness to have brought the little ladies 
home.” 

Very naughty children they are,” said Miss Neil; 
“ but of course we must keep our word. How much. 
Miss Thompson, ought we to give this man?” 

“ Seven pounds ten at the very least,” cried Christian. 

“ Hush, Christian! you certainly have no voice in the 
matter.” 

“We promised that bold girl, Judith Ford, ten 
pounds,” said Miss Thompson. 

“ That is quite true; and this man ” 

“ Oh, he was so kind! ” said Christian. “ He carried 
me when I nearly fainted from tiredness ; and he and his 
mother gave us such delicious tea. Didn’t they. Rosy? ” 

“ That they did,” said Rosy. “ I haven’t never took 
such a fancy to anything as I did to that hot buttered 
toast,” she added. 

Morris smiled and his dark eyes twinkled. 


io8 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

^‘You must come another day, missy, and see my 
mother,” was his answer. 

“ But now let us consider the reward,” said Miss 
Thompson. 

“It certainly can’t be less than ten pounds; and I 
should say,” remarked Miss Neil suddenly, “ that seeing 
everything, and also having an eye to the fact that we 
were about to offer a very much larger sum, we ought to 
give this good man fifteen pounds.” 

“Miss Neil!” almost screamed Christian. “Oh, I’ll 
never think you hard or old-maidish again!” 

She ran forward and caught Miss Neil by the arm. 

“At present, my dear,” said that good lady, eyeing 
her with marked disapproval, “ we will have done with 
heroics. We will attend to business. Perhaps, sir, you 
will step into the study. Judson, show this man into the 
study; we will go there and give him the money.” 

So Morris, hardly knowing whether he was stand- 
ing on his head or his heels, went home that night with 
fifteen pounds in his pocket. 

“ Mother,” he said as, an hour later, he entered the 
very humble little home, “ it wasn’t only that they were 
providences, those two dear little ladies, but they have 
set us up for life. I can now get that machine I have 
always been hankering after, and so add a lot to my 
weekly earnings.” 

“ And what a good thing you did find the poor little 
dears!” said Mrs. Morris. “I am just going out now 
to get some sausages, for you haven’t had what may be 
called a meal for some little time, John.” 

So John and Mrs. Morris were helped, and as far as 
they were concerned, Christian’s mad adventure seemed 
to have borne good fruit. 

To Christian herself, after Morris went, no one said 
a harsh word; but Miss Neil sat down and began to 


LITTLE PROVIDENCES 


109 

write a long letter, which was to reach the girl’s parents 
in Bombay. Occasionally as she wrote she put up her 
handkerchief to her eyes to wipe away some fast-falling 
tears; for she was not all hard, as Christian had sup- 
posed, and she had really suffered horribly for the last 
two days. 

Rose, having been regaled with an excellent meal, 
was taken home by nurse herself. Mrs. Latimer re- 
ceived her little girl with scant favor. 

A fine mess you have got into! ” she said. 

'‘Don’t scold her, poor child!” said nurse. “I am 
going, if I possibly can, to have her to live with me in the 
coming winter. She did what she did because she’s so 
took up with Miss Christian; and, bad as the whole 
affair was, it was a blessed thing for Miss Christian 
that she had Rosy with her.” 

“ Then if you are going to look after Rose, aunt,” 
said Mrs. Latimer, “ she needn’t go on learning the 
dressmaking.” 

No, that she needn’t, for I’m going to train her to 
be a proper lady’s-maid. Miss Christian will want 
someone whom she can really trust when she is grown 
up. You must remember, Mary, that our Miss Chris- 
tian is the daughter of very rich people, and very im- 
portant people too, and will be quite a great lady in 
her own way by and by.” 

So Rose’s home-coming was not nearly so bad as she 
she had feared, for her mother was not going to be 
too cross with a little girl whom her aunt was, to all 
practical purposes, going to adopt. 

“Sit down, child,” she said; “or, if you have had 
enough to eat, do for goodness’ sake take yourself off 
to bed. You look half-dazed.” 

“ That’s about true, mother,” said Rosy. 

In Christian’s room a bright fire was blazing, and 


lO 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


nurse herself, the moment she came back, began to 
attend to her nursling. 

“ To think of where we slept last night,’’ mused 
Christian. 

But if her thoughts were back in that short and 
dreadful experience, she could not bring herself to speak 
of it for to-night at least, and nurse did not speak of it 
either. She went on just as though nothing had hap- 
pened. But when the young girl was warm and snug in 
bed, and the dreadful past seemed wonderfully like a 
dream, nurse sank down by the bedside, stretched out 
her arms over the coverlet, laid her head down on them, 
and burst into tears. 

“ Miss Christian,” she whispered, “ for all the rest of 
my life I will believe in God Almighty and in the power 
of prayer. For I did pray so terribly hard; and now, 
see, God has answered me.” 

“ Yes,” said Christian; but she did not say any more. 

That night she slept soundly. She did not guess that 
nurse had dragged a little sofa-bed into the room and 
was lying down near her; she was too weary to know 
anything. 

In the morning she awoke, and the dream-feeling of 
the past grew greater and greater. She got up slowly 
and went into the schoolroom. How strange the house 
seemed! Just the old house, with all the old furniture, 
and the same servants, and nurse there and all; and yet 
her father and mother away, and she herself having no 
right to be there. 

At about eleven o’clock Miss Neil bustled into the 
room. 

“ Christian,” she said, “ you have been, from what I 
hear, in a very unhealthy and dangerous place, and you 
m.ay have contracted some illness while there. That 
being the case. Miss Peacock does not wish you to go 


LITTLE PROVIDENCES 


II 


to school for at least ten days. During that time you 
will stay with nurse and Miss Thompson, and the doctor, 
whom I have sent for, will call to see you once or twice. 
When you are pronounced absolutely free of all danger 
of infection I will take you to Penwerne. But for the 
next ten days you will consider yourself free. You will 
have holidays, and Miss Thompson will take you where 
she likes. Now, my dear, I am off, and I can only say I 
am glad your mad escapade has not ended in anything 
worse.” 

Christian tried to speak, but Miss Neil did not give 
her any time; she whisked out of the room and went 
downstairs. 

“ I have told her. Miss Thompson,” she said to the 
governess, who was waiting for her in the hall. “ I 
don’t suppose she has caught anything, but it will serve 
her right if she has. Anyhow, it is only fair to the 
school that it should not be endangered by such a 
naughty girl.” 

“ And we may do what we like for the next ten days? ” 
said Miss Thompson. 

“ Anything; only don’t bother me.” 

We won’t indeed.” 

I will send in a doctor to see her. She looks per- 
fectly well, only a little pale. Yes, amuse her; do what 
you please. It is not my place to punish her. Thank 
Heaven she is not my child! ” 


CHAPTER XII 


GOING TO SCHOOL 

Notwithstanding all that went before, Christian 
enjoyed her ten clays. She knew she ought not to feel 
happy, but nevertheless happiness would nestle up close 
to her. She was not troubled; she was calm. She felt 
that, naughty as she had been, God had forgiven her. 
During those ten days Christian was very gentle in her 
manners. She had a sensation in her heart that she 
could never be naughty again. She was so impressed 
by this feeling that, the night before she left for Corn- 
wall, she said to nurse: 

Nursey, darling, I suppose all things are for the 
best. I feel that I am a much wiser girl than I should 
have been if I had gone to Cornwall that time when 
father and mother left.” 

“ What do you mean, lovey? ” replied the old nurse. 

** Well, you see, I have been quite bad, and I have 
had great terrors, and I have lived through the sort of 
things that open your eyes, and I see now that I was 
a selfish girl, and naughty and deceitful, and not a bit 
of a heroine; but since I came back I have vowed that 
I will never be naughty again, and I don’t mean to be.” 

“ To be sure, dear,” said nurse gently. ‘‘ It’s all very 
fine to promise that to yourself, isn’t it, but how do you 
think you will keep it up? ” 

Simply by not yielding to temptation. You know 
I have a passionate nature, and I have lived a great deal 
alone, and I dare say I might have found it hard to 


zia 


GOING TO SCHOOL 


”3 


be thrown with other girls and to give up my own ways. 
But I am not at all afraid now, for after what I have 
suftered I have vowed to be good — very good^ — all the 
rest of my life.” 

“ Well then, you have just to bear this in mind,” said 
nurse: “ God Almighty must help you, and desperate 
hard too, or you will fail. I prayed for you, my darling, 
when I didn't know that Fd ever see your sweet face 
again, and Fll go on praying for you; and I hope you 
will be happy at school, and that you will learn a lot, so 
that when your father and mother come back they will 
be proud of you — as I always am, my dear, sweet lamb.” 

Miss Neil came early on the following morning and 
took Christian to Paddington; and this time there was 
no attempt at running away, and no adventure of any 
sort, for Miss Neil and Christian had a first-class car- 
riage to themselves for the greater part of the journey. 

They reached Tregellick at six o'clock, when it was 
quite dark, and there a brougham was waiting for them ; 
and after driving for about a mile they found themselves 
outside the town, in the heart of the country. They 
drove on a little farther, and Christian, gazing out 
through the darkness, fancied she saw the gleam of 
white foam caused by the waves of the Atlantic, and the 
noise of the sea came loudly, with an insistent splash, 
against her ears. This noise moved and delighted her. 
She grasped Miss Neil's hand. 

“ I shall like living here,” she said. 

Miss Neil replied calmly, “ I hope you will, Christian. 
You quite understand, my dear, that the school is a strict 
one, and the first thing you have to learn is absolute 
obedience. From what I hear, there is very little liberty 
granted to the girls of Penwerne; but for those who are 
right-minded there is to be found in your new school a 
growth and strength both moral and physical.” 


114 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Oh^ .dear, I do wish she wouldn’t speak in that lectur- 
ing sort of way! ” thought Christian to herself; but then 
she remembered her vow that she would never be cross, 
even with Miss Neil, again, and she shut her lips and 
said nothing more. 

By and by the carriage drew up outside some tall iron 
gates, which were opened by a neat-looking woman in 
a white cap. Christian caught sight of the lodge, with 
a bright lamp placed in one of the windows, as they 
drove swiftly up the long avenue. They stopped before 
a very long, low house, with many lights twinkling in 
many windows, and a deep porch to the front door. As 
soon as ever the sound of wheels was heard, a neat-look- 
ing servant flung the door wide open; then she came 
out and helped Miss Neil and Christian to get out of 
the cab. 

“ Will you have the goodness to tell Miss Peacock 
that Miss Neil and the little girl, Christian Mitford, 
have arrived?” said Miss Neil to the servant. “And 
see, please, that Miss Mitford’s luggage and my hand- 
bag are brought indoors.” 

“Yes, madam,” said the servant. “Will you walk 
this way, please? ” 

She took them into a very wide hall, brightly lighted 
with electric light, and with an ingle-nook at the farther 
end where a great fire of logs burned on the hearth. 

Christian was cold, and a sense of depression, not- 
withstanding all her brave efforts, was creeping over 
her. She looked at Miss Neil, and thought she had 
seldom seen a more disagreeable or sterner face. 

“ I am so thankful,” thought the child, “ that she is 
not going to teach me — that she is not going to stay 
here. I couldn’t be good with her; that’s quite certain. 
But, all the same, I will keep my vow.” 

They were shown into a small, cheerful room, which 


GOING TO SCHOOL 


also had a fire burning. The servant withdrew, saying 
in a respectful voice as she did so, “ I will tell my mis- 
tress, and she will send someone to you.” 

“ Dear me, Christian! ” said Miss Neil when the door 
had closed and they found themselves alone; “what a 
particularly pleasant, cheerful sort of place this seems 
to be! Not at all my idea of a strict school. My dear, 
do hold yourself up; you don’t know how that stoop 
ruins your appearance. Your parents are very particu- 
lar about you, and they expect so much of you that the 
very least you can do now is to make extra efforts to be 
good in the highest sense of the word. Goodness in- 
cludes deportment, Christian; perhaps you don’t under- 
stand that.” 

“Oh, yes, I do. Miss Neil,” said Christian, who was 
almost biting her lips to keep her tongue from saying 
something pert. 

“ You of course also understand,” continued Miss 
Neil, “ that you are not now arriving at school with any 
eclat. You have been exceedingly naughty, and I rather 
fancy your punishment awaits you here. I am not cer- 
tain, of course, but I rather fancy that such is the case.” 

“What do you mean?” said Christian, in alarm. 

“My dear, I say nothing further. Time will prove; 
time will prove. But it really is most kind of Miss 
Peacock to have you at all. There were moments when 
I feared you would not be received at Penwerne. That 
fact would have been a slur upon you all your life. Ah! 
and here comes ” 

The door was thrown open, and a tall, very graceful 
woman of about forty years of age entered. Her face 
was very sweet, but there was no lack of power in it; 
on the contrary, it looked strong, steadfast, self-as- 
sured. The eyes were the brightest Christian had ever 
looked at. She felt certain, on the spur of the moment, 


ii6 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


that this woman had known sorrow — that she had con- 
quered sorrow. Her heart went out to her on the 
spot. 

Miss Peacock bowed to Miss Neil, and then, taking 
both Christian’s hands, she drew the young girl towards 
her and kissed her gravely on the forehead. 

“ Welcome,” she said. 

The one word seemed full both of strength and love. 
The depression which had fallen upon Christian van- 
ished on the spot. 

I will be good,” she said, and she raised her eyes 
full of tears and fixed them on her mistress’s face. 

“ I hope you will. But this is not the time to talk of 
goodness or of naughtiness; you are so tired that what 
you want is rest. Never mind to-night about being 
good or bad, clever or ignorant. You must have your 
supper and then go to bed. Miss Neil, I am glad to tell 
you that I am able to give Christian, for a time at least, 
a little bedroom to herself. Susan Sykes as a rule shares 
the room, but she is ill and not able to return. Until she 
does Christian will have the room to herself.” 

“ Oh, I am glad! ” said Christian. 

‘‘ And you ought to be, Christian,” said Miss Neil in 
her tartest voice, “ for you don’t deserve indulgences.” 

“Oh, come!” said Miss Peacock. “We never talk 
of faults — at least in this house — except when we are 
punishing them; and I think Christian was punished. 
She begins here with a clean sheet. Now, my dear, I 
am going to put you in the charge of Jessie, who is my 
right-hand and looks after all the comforts the girls 
require.” 

'As Miss Peacock spoke she touched the electric bell 
by the side of the fireplace, and the same pleasant-look- 
ing servant-girl who had shown them into the house 
appeared. 


GOING TO SCHOOL 


117 

“ Ask Miss Jessie to step into the hall waiting room,” 
said Miss Peacock. 

The servant withdrew, and in a very short time a 
girlish-looking person, who might have been one of the 
schoolgirls herself, entered. That was Christian’s first 
impression with regard to Miss Jessie Jones, but when 
she looked again she began to perceive that Miss Jessie 
was not quite so young as she appeared. She was 
dressed in a peculiar and old-fashioned way. Her rather 
skimpily cut skirt reached barely to her neat ankles, and 
over it she wore a muslin apron with a bib. The apron 
was frilled all round, and daintily finished with bows of 
pale-blue ribbon. Miss Jessie’s hair was in short ring- 
lets — it was of a soft, blonde color — her face was pink- 
and-white, and her eyes blue. Her little figure was also 
exceedingly neat. She ran into the room, and said in 
a gay voice: 

“ Well, dear Miss Peacock, here I am.” 

I want you, Jessie, to take this young girl — my new 
pupil, Christian Mitford — and look after her. You 
must do everything for her that she requires; and I 
should like her to go early to bed. Did you ask Robin- 
son to light a fire in her room? ” 

“ Certainly, dear Miss Peacock; the room is in perfect 
order, and there is a bright fire.” 

“ Well then, good-night, Christian,” said Miss Pea- 
cock. “ I leave you in safe hands. You will see your 
friend Miss Neil to-morrow.” 

“Good-night, Christian,” said Miss Neil; “and be 
thankful for your mercies.” 

Christian left the room, accompanied by Miss Jessie. 

“ I am. glad you have come at last,” said the latter. 
“ We have been all looking forward to seeing you. You 
can scarcely imagine how disappointed we were when 
you could not arrive a fortnight ago.” 


ii8 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Oh, please don’t speak of it! ” said Christian. 

“ But why not? We were so sorry. Dear Miss Pea- 
cock said you were unavoidably detained. She did not 
tell us what had happened. She only said you could 
not come to school for at least ten days.” 

It was sweet of her,” said Christian. Then she 
added impulsively, Isn’t she the very nicest and best 
woman in the world? ” 

“Ah!” said Miss Jessie, with a laugh, “you have 
fallen in love with her, as we all do. There never was 
anybody quite like Lavinia Peacock. Don’t you think 
her name sweet? Lavinia, like an old-fashioned flower; 
and then Peacock — like that gorgeous bird. But noth- 
ing could be too good for her; she is perfect. The girls 
adore her — they love her almost too well. Yes, she 
makes sunshine wherever she goes. Not that it’s all 
sunshine at Penwerne by any means. But I will tell 
you about that presently — not to-night; you look tired. 
Are you tired? Have you quite got over whatever de- 
tained you? ” 

“ Quite; and please don’t speak of it.” 

“ I won’t if you don’t wish. The mistresses here 
never do anything to worry the girls; we never nag, if 
you understand what that means.” 

“And are you a mistress?” 

A sad look came into the sweet face of little Miss 
Jessie. 

“No; I am not exactly one of the mistresses,” she 
said. “ I don’t exactly know what I am, except that my 
province in the school is to spread happiness. That is 
what dear Lavinia wishes. ‘ Make them happy, Jessie, 
and you’ll do all that I require,’ she says. I generally 
get a new girl for the first night — perhaps longer. She 
trusts me. You see, I am not at all a frightening sort 
of person.” 


GOING TO SCHOOL 


119 

“ I shouldn’t think you were,” said Christian. 

“ You look a very nice girl, dear — nice-looking, I 
mean — rather distinguished. Lavinia wouldn’t like me 
to say anything of that kind, so I oughtn’t to; but you 
really do. Now then, will you come in to the refectory, 
or will you have something brought up to your own 
room ? ” 

“ Oh, something in my room, please, if it isn’t too 
much trouble,” said Christian. 

“ Trouble, dear? Whenever did Jessie find anything 
a trouble? It is her business to do this sort of thing if 
it adds to the happiness of anyone. We will go straight 
upstairs, then; you won’t want to see any of your com- 
panions to-night?” 

I think not.” 

Miss Jessie paused. It seemed to Christian as they 
were walking up the low, softly carpeted stairs, and 
down first one long corridor and then another, that there 
was a murmuring sound as though of bees. She could 
not make out if it was caused by the Atlantic or by 
voices. 

“ They are anxious to see you. They begged and im- 
plored of me; but you shall have your way.” 

“ I would much rather not see anybody but you until 
to-morrow.” 

“ You dear child, you shan’t be crossed. But just 
one moment.” 

Miss Jessie paused outside a door. The sound of 
bees was now unmistakably changed for the sound of 
voices. 

‘‘No, darlings, not to-night; she is tired. Don’t ask 
it, pets. You never cross Jessie, do you? That’s all 
right, loves.” 

The door was shut again, and she took Christian’s 
hand. 


120 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ They are dear girls, although we have one or two 
black sheep. Of course I must not name them. We 
are all trying — we who belong, I hope, to the white 
sheep — to turn them from the error of their ways. 
Now then, here is your room.’’ 

The door was opened, and Christian found herself in a 
dainty chamber lined with white enameled wood. The 
wood went right up to the ceiling, and across it; and in 
the ceiling itself were two bright eyes, caused by electric 
light. Miss Jessie showed the young girl how she could 
turn it on and off. In a pretty grate lined with pink 
tiles a bright fire was blazing. There were two beds at 
the farther end, one covered with a pretty Liberty cover- 
let and unmade, and the other with a snowy white sheet 
turned down. The look of the little bed was most in- 
viting. There were white dimity curtains to the win- 
dows. The white effect of everything, with the pink 
tiles, the blazing fire, and the crimson felt on the floor, 
made Christian feel that she had never been in so sweet 
a chamber before. 

“ You will be happy here, I know,” said Miss Jessie. 
“ We are all intensely happy at Penwerne. Who could 
help it who was under the guardianship of Lavinia 
Peacock? ” 

When Miss Jessie had seen that Christian had all she 
required, even to a can of nice hot water, she kissed her 
and went away. Christian thought that she would not 
see her again that night. She felt contented, soothed, 
and happy. How silly she had been to dread this charm- 
ing school, this life so full of interest! As she thought 
of Miss Peacock, and remembered the look on her face, 
she felt her heart glow already with love for her new 
mistress. Then how sweet and kind dear Miss 
Jessie was! 

As she ate her supper, and unlocked her trunk and 


GOING TO SCHOOL 


I2I 

took out just what was necessary for the night’s re- 
quirements, she thought again of Miss Peacock’s great 
kindness in not speaking to the school of what had 
really happened. 

“ She said I was unavoidably detained,” thought the 
child. “ She shielded me. There are very few who 
would do that. I love her already. If I am not good 
after so much kindness, I shall be the very worst girl in 
the world.” 

Christian said her prayers — quite earnest ones, in 
which she implored of God to help her — and then she 
got into bed. She was just getting warm between the 
cozy sheets, when the door was softly opened and little 
Miss Jessie peeped in. 

“ Ah! you are in bed,” she said; that’s right. I have 
only come to fetch the tray. Your fire will burn for 
some hours. It is so cold just at present that we will 
have it lit before you get up in the morning. That is a 
special indulgence which will only be granted to you 
just for to-morrow. To-morrow will be a complete holi- 
day for you. I thought you might like to know. You 
will be able to unpack and get everything into apple-pie 
order. Then you will make the acquaintance of the girls, 
and get to know the ways of the school. You will 
probably have some lessons to prepare for the next day, 
but only if you are quite well enough to undertake 
them. Miss Peacock said I was to be very careful 
about you. I suppose that is on account of your illness 
that kept you from school.” 

As Miss Jessie said the last words Christian sud- 
denly sat up in bed. 

“ I wasn’t kept away from school by illness,” she 
said in a choking voice. 

“Well, never mind, dear; it doesn’t matter what it 
was. Our dear head-mistress knows.” 


t22 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Miss Jessie/’ said Christian, “ I don’t know what 
your other name is.” 

“ I am never called by it, dearest. My other name is 
Jones; quite a common name, isn’t it? But I am always 
known here as Jessie, or Miss Jessie. Lie down now 
and go to sleep.” 

“ I can’t until I tell you something. I must tell you.” 

‘‘Well, love, if it relieves your mind; but really and 
truly I would much rather ” 

In the firelight little Miss Jessie’s face looked quite 
troubled; she took both of Christian’s hands. 

“You are excited,” she said. “You have traveled 
far; the effects of your illness are still perceptible.” 

“ Oh, I wasn’t ill ! It is about that I want to speak 
to you. You at least must know the truth.” 

“ Oh, but I never know things of that sort,” said 
Miss Jessie in an alarmed voice. “ Dear Lavinia Pea- 
cock would be distressed. I beg of you, my child. Oh, 
what is it? Actually the dear child is crying. Well, of 
course, Christian, if it relieves your mind, dear ” 

“ It does — it does ! ” said Christian. “ I couldn’t sleep 
to-night if you didn’^rknow it. It wasn’t illness.” 

“ My dear, dear child.” 

“ It was naughtiness.” 

“ Children are often naughty,” said Miss Jessie. 

“ But not like my naughtiness. It was big — it was 
worse ; it was wickedness. I ran away.” 

“You did what, dear?” said Miss Jessie; and now 
she backed from Christian and looked at her with her 
round, rosy, good-natured face paling with horror. 

She said afterwards to herself, “ I was glad there was 
only firelight, and that I was standing with my back to 
it, for the poor child would have seen how horrified 
I felt.” 

“ Yes,” said Christian, “ I ran away that day a fort- 


GOING TO SCHOOL 


123 


night back when you were expecting me. I went to 
the station with Miss Neil. I left her and went away 
with another little girl. We had planned it all out to- 
gether. We went to an awful place in the slums for the 
night. Oh, it was fearful — ^fearful! We nearly died from 
fright. We were well punished. The next day we got 
home, but it was a terrible adventure, and it nearly killed 
us both. It was not illness; it was what I have said.” 

Miss Jessie had now recovered her ordinary 
composure. 

“ My dear,” she said, I am glad and sorry you have 
told me. You may be quite sure that I shall never 
repeat it to anyone. There is just one thing, Christian: 
you must not on any account — on any account what- 
ever — breathe this story in the school. It would not be 
understood, dear. It would make your position unfor- 
tunate. I cannot explain matters. Our code of honor 
is very high, and we like all our girls to have a clean 
record — never to do what is daring and downright 
wicked. Ah, yes, Christian, we repent, but somehow the 
flavor of the sin remains. Ah, Christian, I will tell you 
a story of another little girl some day — not to-night. 
Good-night, now. It was brave of you to tell, and I will 
speak to Lavinia about it ; but whatever happens, this 
must on no account be known in the school.” 

Miss Jessie tripped softly away, and Christian, 
soothed by the light of the fire, by the knowledge that 
she had unburdened herself, by the resolve that, come 
what would, she would do the very best that was pos- 
sible for a girl to do in the future, dropped asleep. 


CHAPTER XIII 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 

There were forty boarders at Penwerne House. 
Their ages varied from thirteen to eighteen. They were 
almost all English girls, well brought up, and of good 
family. The house was very old, but extremely roomy. 
There were corridors and long passages and endless 
small rooms in every imaginable direction. But al- 
though the house was really so very ancient, the ap- 
pearance of the rooms themselves spoke of a far more 
luxurious state of living than people required at the 
time when Penwerne Manor was built; for Miss Pea- 
cock had taken extraordinary pains with her school, 
and the old rooms, wainscoted in the first instance, 
were now enameled many pale shades of beautiful colors 
— some ivory white, some the palest green, some blue, 
some pink. There were whole corridors with only pink 
rooms, and whole corridors with only blue ones ; but the 
girls who had the choicest and largest rooms were those 
who slept in the white chambers, as they were called. 

Christian's room was one of a series that went down 
the entire length of a corridor. Each of these pretty 
rooms boasted of two windows, and in each two neat 
brass-mounted bedsteads were placed. Christian 
thought herself in great luck to have a room to her- 
self at first, and prepared to enjoy herself thoroughly. 

Miss Neil came up to the young girl’s room to say 
good-by to her early on the following morning. 

“ Well, my dear,” she said, I am sure you are in 


184 


THE MANOR SCHOOL . 


125 


luck. What a nice little room! Not little, though — 
quite a good-sized room. And you have it to yourself. 
You ought to be exceedingly thankful, Qiristian; you are 
a most lucky girl. I shall write to your dear father and 
mother without fail by the next mail. You had better 
do the same. They will have got over their dreadful 
shock about you by the time they receive that letter. 
And now, dear, I must say good-by. Here is a little 
money that you may need for pocket-money; and when 
you want anything more you have but to write to me — 
Elm Lodge, Denvers Road, Southsea. See, I have writ- 
ten the address distinctly on this paper. Miss Peacock 
knows that she is to apply to me in any difficulty. You 
will stay here at Easter, or go away with Miss Peacock, 
just as she thinks best; but if you like to spend some of 
your summer holidays with me, I dare say I can arrange 
it, but I cannot positively promise. I will do my best. 
Here are the two sovereigns. You must make them do 
until Easter; as every possible want is supplied, you 
cannot require more money than this. I have asked 
Miss Peacock, and' — somewhat reluctantly, I must say — 
she has complied with my wish that your letters are, for 
the present at least, to be overlooked; except, of course, 
those to your parents. It is necessary, Christian, that 
this should be done; and there is no use in your frown- 
ing over the matter, for a girl who could behave in the 
disgraceful way you did cannot expect to be trusted. 
You are, of course, absolutely forbidden to correspond 
with that naughty little Rose Latimer; and even your 
nurse can only receive letters which Miss Peacock^ has 
read. Now, I think that is all. Be good. Thank your 
lucky star that you have come to such a considerate 
mistress; for if she had proclaimed through the school 
the enormity of your act you would have had a sorry 
time. I certainly never asked her to conceal it. 


126 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


I thought she naturally would tell, and I felt that if she 
had done so it would be a due punishment to you for 
your disgraceful behavior; but she thinks otherwise, and 
as she has the care of your education for the present, 
I must of course bow to her decree. Gk>od-by, Christian. 
I trust you will keep well, and be — as you ought to be — 
happy.” 

Miss Neil gave Christian a little peck on her fore- 
head and then on her lips, after which she hurried from 
the room. 

According to Miss Jessie’s promise, a fire had again 
been lit in the young girl’s chamber, and a neat-looking 
servant had brought in coffee, toast, and rolls. 

Christian ate her breakfast, and then waited somewhat 
shyly, wondering what would happen next. Presently 
a great bell sounded all over the house, and a minute 
later Miss Jessie bustled in. 

*‘Ah! you are dressed,” she said; ‘‘that is right. 
And very neat you look in your pretty gray dress, with 
that nice frilled apron. Miss Peacock will quite approve 
of your appearance. Most of our girls wear their hair 
plaited behind, but I see you wear yours quite loose. 
Well, never mind; you have pretty hair, dear — ^very 
pretty. Now then, come with me, for the prayer-bell 
has rung. You will see your companions at prayers. 
Soon, I trust, you will be quite happy, and a busy mem- 
ber of a useful family.” 

Miss Jessie took Christian’s hand and walked quickly 
down the corridor. Doors were pushed open as she 
went, and more than one bright head, with curling hair 
and laughing eyes, looked out. Christian felt a sudden 
anid intense accession of shyness; she dared not glance 
at any of her schoolfellows. Her heart began to beat 
loudly in her ears, and by the time she reached the great 
hall, where prayers were always read by Miss Peacock, 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


137 


she was scarlet. There was a tittering laugh from a girl 
as she went up to the seat appointed for her near Miss 
Jessie. Another girl said “Hush!” and then in the 
midst of the solemn stillness Miss Peacock read the 
lesson for the day. This was followed by a short prayer, 
and after the girls had risen from their knees and the 
servants had withdrawn, Miss Peacock mounted a little 
dais near her own desk and looked around her. 

“Wait a minute, girls,” she said; “I want to intro- 
duce you to your new schoolfellow. Come here, Chris- 
tian Mitford.” 

Christian advanced tremulously. 

“ This, my dear young people, is Christian Mitford, 
your new companion; and, I trust, your new friend. She 
has never been in Cornwall before, nor has she ever 
been in a boarding-school. Is that correct, Christian? ” 

“ Yes, madam,” said Christian in a low voice. 

“ Our ways, therefore,” continued the head-mistress, 
“ will be strange to her, and I trust that each girl in the 
school will do her utmost to make her happy by kind- 
ness, by sympathy, by showing her the ropes, by letting 
her feel that you are glad to have her with you. I trust 
you all, my dear girls, and know you will do your best 
for this young stranger. I put her into the care of — Ah! 
Louisa Twining, my dear, come here.” 

A slender girl, with soft, neat brown hair and brown 
eyes to match, left her companions and walked up the 
room. 

“ Louisa,” said Miss Peacock, “ this is Christian Mit- 
ford. Will you please see after her a bit, and let her 
stay by you in class, and take her into the playground 
afterwards, and tell her all about the school and the 
life here?” 

“ Yes, Miss Peacock,” said Louisa. 

She looked kindly at Christian as she spoke. 


128 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Christian/' said Miss Peacock, you are in safe 
hands when I give you into the charge of Louisa 
Twining. She is one of my oldest and most trusted 
pupils. Now then, dear, it is the custom that the new 
pupil should not have any lessons to do on the day 
after her arrival. Your time is therefore absolutely your 
own, and you can unpack your things and put them 
away in the neat cupboards in your room. You can ar- 
range your schoolroom desk, and ask for what books you 
require from your English teacher, Miss Forest; and, 
in short, do anything you please. I should counsel you 
to take Louisa absolutely into your confidence, for she 
is a very sure guide for a new-comer. To-morrow you 
take your place with the other pupils. I shall be glad 
to see you in my own private room at five o’clock to 
tea. And now for the present, good-by, dear.” 

Miss Peacock nodded to Christian, smiled at Louisa, 
and left the room. 

Louisa looked hard at Christian. 

“Come,” she said; “we must be great chums, 
mustn’t we? ” 

“Oh, if you would be kind to me!” said poor 
Christian. 

Her shyness was getting worse; the tears were very 
near her eyes, but she did not dare to let them appear. 

“ I will introduce you to some of the others,” said 
Louisa. “ The sooner you know us all the better. First 
of all, how old are you?” 

“ I shall be fourteen in three months’ time.” 

“Oh, we make a great fuss about birthdays here; 
but yours is some way off yet. You are only thirteen 
at present. Do you know that I am nearly sixteen, and 
I am not much taller than you.” 

“ I always knew that I was very tall,” said Christian. 
“ I hate it myself ; Fd much rather be a little girl.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


129 


If you happened to be a little girl you would any- 
thing but wish it, I can assure you. But now here we 
are; here is a whole bevy of the girls, all so curious 
about you, and so anxious to be nice and kind.’" 

“ Well, Twine dear,'’ said a merry-looking girl of 
about fourteen years of age, bounding forward when she 
saw Louisa issuing out of the hall accompanied by 
Christian, “ so you have got her. You are the privileged 
one. Now, I wanted to be. It’s most unfair that you 
should have all the plums, Twiny.” 

“ Don’t be a goose, Florry. You know that Miss 
Peacock would not give the charge of a new g^rl to a 
little mite like you.” 

“ Little mite indeed! ” laughed Florry, tossing her 
head. “ Well, I suppose, whatever happens, I may talk 
to the sacred being.” 

“ Don’t I ” said Christian suddenly, and speaking with 
irritkion. 

“She hates to be laughed at; can’t you see that?” 
said Louisa, speaking angrily. 

She had scarcely said the words before a mocking 
voice, which seemed to come from over their heads, 
cried in a high staccato: 

“ She hates to be laughed at; can’t you see that?” 

Christian looked round. She was startled and 
alarmed. 

“That’s only Star; she is incorrigible,” said Louisa. 
“ You will have to get accustomed to her. But come 
now; you would like to see the schoolroom. You will 
have your own desk, but its exact position I can’t tell 
you; your teachers will first have to find out what you 
know.” 

Now, Christian knew a great deal. From her earliest 
days she had been well educated, and with regard to her 
attainments she was decidedly above the average girl. 


130 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


As she remembered this fact a sense of satisfaction stole 
over her. Nevertheless she felt exceedingly depressed 
and considerably alarmed. 

Louisa and Christian walked quickly to the farther 
end of the hall^ and Florence returned to her compan- 
ions. Louisa now spoke quickly. 

“ You must not get frightened; or, at least, if you are 
frightened you must not show it. I assure you if you do 
your life won’t be worth living here. We are all rather 
a nice set of girls, but there are a few of us who have an 
intolerable habit of teasing. If it is noticed that you are 
easily impressed, or thin-skinned, you will be made 
thoroughly unhappy. Your only plan is not to care one 
little bit what anyone says to you, or what anyone does. 
Don’t be startled when stupid jokes are sprung on you. 
You did look so ridiculously alarmed when Star called 
out that sentence just now.” 

“ Of course I was. I can’t think how she did it. Was 
she hanging on to the ceiling anywhere? ” 

“ Not a bit of it. Star Lestrange is immensely pop- 
ular, because she has got the power of ventriloquism. 
She can throw her voice anywhere. I assure you there 
was a time when she terrified me. But now I am ac- 
customed to her, and she is so funny — so audacious. 
On one occasion she whispered just above Miss Pea- 
cock’s forehead, “ Bless you, sweet angel ! ” She nearly 
got into a scrape about that, for although we are treated 
in this school in the most heavenly way, Miss Peacock is 
intensely particular, and the discipline is sound — I must 
say it. There can be no crooked ways in this school, 
nor obscure corners in the life of any girl who lives here. 
Woe betide her if she has anything in her past that she 
wants to hide. Why, how red you are getting! Aren’t 
you strong? ” 

“ Yes, thank you.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


131 

**You are nervous. Now, do take my advice: don’t 
show it to the others; just uphold your own dignity. I 
wish you could have seen Star when she first came to 
the school. They tried to bully her a bit, some of the 
most mischievous spirits, but didn’t she crush them all 
round? She’s awfully good-natured, you know, and she 
wouldn’t hurt you really for the world; but she has such 
mad spirits, she has to give way now and then. Now, 
I mustn’t gossip any more. We work here from nine to 
eleven.” 

“ But isn’t it long past nine now ? ” asked Chris- 
tian. 

Louisa laughed. Of course not,” she said. “ It is 
five minutes to nine. You had your breakfast at seven. 
You will have to come down to refectory breakfast to- 
morrow. You are going to be awfully indulged and 
petted to-day. I suppose that is on account of your 
illness.” 

“ But I haven’t been ill,” said Christian, and her face 
became crimson. 

Then what was the matter with you? Why were you 
unavoidably detained?” 

“ Oh, please don’t question me,” said Christian. 

“ Why can’t you speak? The girls will expect you 
to do so this evening. We always get a new girl to tell 
us as much as ever she can of her life’s story — after dark. 
You look as though you were a splendid story-teller. 
Are you? ” 

I could tell you some stories,” said Christian. 

She thought of her darling attic and the heroines of 
her past life. Nevertheless, her terrors were getting 
greater each moment. If the girls insisted on question- 
ing her with regard to the unlooked-for circumstances 
which were supposed to have detained her, she would 
certainly betray herself; and for a girl like Star 


132 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Lestrange to know of such an escapade would cause 
poor Christian almost to lose her senses. 

I will introduce you to the nicest girls/’ said Louisa, 
who was watching her face — “ the nicest and the kind- 
est — and I will ask them to look after you when I am 
not with you myself.” 

“ But mayn’t I stay near you all day? Oh, I wish — 
I wish you’d let me.” 

“ You dear young thing, of course you may. But 
then you see to-morrow will come, and the day after, 
and the day after that. I am in the sixth class of the 
school. I am rather young to be there, but I am, all 
the same; and I am proud of it, I can tell you. You, 
of course, will be in a different class, and you must 
associate with the girls of lyour own age. You see, 
you can’t help yourself. You vrill have great fun after 
a bit. Here come the mistresses and the girls, and 
lessons have begun. Sit down near me at this desk, 
and listen with all your might. Miss Forest and 
Mademoiselle le Brume may question you a bit about 
your attainments this morning. I am not quite certain, 
but I think they will.” 

“ I wish they would; I’d much rather,” said Christian. 

“Would ypu really? Then I’ll go and speak to Miss 
Forest at once.” 

Each desk now had a bright and merry or a grave 
and serious girl seated before it, and foi^ty pairs of eyes 
were darting from time to time in Christian’s direction 
— some quizzical, some indifferent, some alive with curi- 
osity; some sober, earnest, kind. But whatever the 
feelings that dwelt in the minds of the girls who owned 
the eyes, they all kept gazing at Christian, who felt at 
last as though she were under forty pairs of burning 
glasses, so keen became the torture. 

Presently Louisa returned. 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


133 


Miss Forest will see you in half and hour, and 
Mademoiselle says you must go to her in the French 
room when the rest of us are at play. Our music- 
master, too, Mr. Frederick, is coming to-day, and you 
may as well let him hear what you can do. Oh, you 
will soon be very busy and very happy. And now 
don’t look at the girls; or if you want to look at them, 
stare well. That will put them in a good humor, and 
they will stop staring at you.’’ 


CHAPTER XIV 


SCHOOLGIRLS 

Christian went through the ordeal with the mis- 
tresses and the music-master with much eclat. Miss 
P'orest was evidently surprised at her knowledge of 
English history and literature, at her grammatical ac- 
curacy — for she set her a short essay to write — and at 
her knowledge generally. Madamoiselle was equally 
delighted with the purity of her French accent, and with 
the admirable way she translated a paragraph from a 
rather difficult French story-book. And, finally, Mr. 
Frederick said that she had real talent for music, and 
that he looked forward with much pleasure to conduct- 
ing the studies of a pupil who would do him such credit. 

Christian enjoyed herself during this time. She for- 
got her fears; she felt stimulated to do her very best. 
Finally, she returned to the schoolroom with a sort of 
halo round her brow. She was certain that she had 
done well. 

Soon it was whispered all over the school that Chris- 
tian Mitford was nothing short of a genius — (that she 
was one of the cleverest girls who had ever come to the 
school. These reports were of course exaggerated; 
but still the solid fact remained that she was put into the 
fourth class for all English studies, and into the lower 
fifth for French and music. That a girl of thirteen 
was in such a position spoke for itself. Florry, whose 
other name was Burton, looked at her with great black 
eyes of envy. Star Lestrange flung the words to the 
ceiling just above Christian’s head: 


*34 


SCHOOLGIRLS 


*35 

“ She’s a genius, and she knows it, the darling young 
thing.” 

The look on Florry’s face and the expression of mis- 
chief in Star’s bright dancing eyes brought Christian 
back to the fact that attainments alone and a strong 
wish for study did not necessarily secure happiness in 
a school like Penwerne Manor. She could not get over 
her nervous fears. 

“ I deserve it,” she said to herself. “ I should not 
be one scrap — no, not one scrap — afraid if I hadn’t done 
wrong; but it is just the terror of their finding out that 
keeps my heart beating so hard. Oh, dear! oh, dear! 
There’s no way out, for I can’t run way again, and 
father and mother are nearly in India now. As to Miss 
Neil, she saw no sympathy with anyone; and poor dear 
nurse and Miss Thompson can’t help me even if they 
wish to. Oh, dear ! I am an unhappy girl.” 

Christian was standing by herself in one corner of 
the great playground as these thoughts visited her. 
Presently a hand was laid on her shoulder, and beautiful 
little Star stood by her side. 

Let’s be friends, Christian,” she said in a hearty 
voice. 

“Will you?” answered Christian, her eyes brighten- 
ing. 

“ I’d like to,” said Star. “ I took a fancy to you the 
moment I saw your face, even though you did look so 
alarmed and so startled.” 

“ You’d have been startled too,” said Christian 
stoutly, “ if you had heard an awful voice on the ceiling 
above your head talking about you.” 

Star laughed; then she looked grave. 

“ I can’t help it,” she said. “ I really can’t break my- 
self of it. Darling Miss Peacock is sometimes angry; 
but who could resist the fun who had the power? Oh! 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


136 

the fright on your face a couple of hours ago was kill- 
ing. You looked as though anyone could knock you 
down.” 

But you did it twice,” said Christian. 

Yes, my young genius, I did. But never mind me; 
when I ventriloquize, just acknowledge my talent, but 
at the same time consider me your friend. You and I 
are in the same class, and we can’t help knocking up 
against each other. By the way, where is your bed- 
room? In the White Corridor?” 

Christian nodded. 

I thought as much. I am in the White Corridor 
too. We may as well be friends, for I’m sure I’d be 
a disagreeable enemy.” 

“ I’d love to be your friend,” said Christian. “ Do 
you really mean it?” 

I always mean what I say. You ask Lucy Norris. 
Have you met Lucy — little, satin-faced Lucy, with hair 
that shines like a looking-glass, blue eyes, rosebud 
lips, and cheeks the color of the peach? Ah, there she 
is! I’ll call her. Lucy, beloved. Lucy! I say, Lucy! 
Lucy ! ” 

The girl whom Star had so cleverly described looked 
round her in a startled way; then her eyes met the 
bright ones of Star Lestrange, and she ran up to 
her. 

“What is it. Star? What do you want?” 

“ Your Satinship,” replied Star. “ I want very 
specially to introduce you to my new friend, Christian 
Mitford. I want you and me and one or two others to 

form a sort of bodyguard round her. You see ” 

Star’s voice dropped. She bent towards Lucy and 
whsipered something in her ear. 

Lucy colored and nodded. “ You don't really think 
so?” she said. 


SCHOOLGIRLS 


137 


“ I am certain of it,” responded Star. “ That is what 
will happen unless we take care. Oh, don’t you be 
frightened, my love,” she continued, patting Christian 
with a sort of affectionate condescension, on the arm. 
“ Lucy and I and ” 

“ Angela Goring,” suddenly burst from Lucy’s lips. 

“ Good, Lucy — capital ! Lucy, Angel Goring, and 
I We must have one more, Lucy. Jane Price.” 

“ Oh, why Jane Price? ” said Lucy. 

“ Because she’s just admirable. She’s so stolid, you 
know, and so matter-of-fact, and so intensely sensible. 
We don’t want all the flyaway girls of the school.” 

I’m not flyaway. I’m sure,” said Lucy. 

“ Except when you follow the erratic movements of 
the Star,” replied Star, her eyes twinkling. 

“ You do lead us, and you know it. Star,” said Lucy. 
“But, there! Angela will do nicely.” 

“ Find her, then, love,” said Star. 

Lucy rushed away. 

“ What do you mean by a bodyguard? And why 
should I require one?” said Christian. 

“ My dear love, it will be only for a week or a fort- 
night, just to get you into the ways. The fact is, this 
school, for all its admirable qualities, has in it one or 
two black sheep. Now, I mustn’t breathe any names; 
dear, sweet Miss Peacock never guesses at their ex- 
istence, and we none of us ever mean to tell. You are 
the veriest of all very victims for such girls ; therefore I 
want to guard you. Ah! here comes Angela. Hasn’t 
she a nice face? ” 

A very tall, very slight girl, with coal-black hair and 
large, luminous dark eyes, now appeared. She was 
dressed in a rough gray tweed, with a leather belt round 
her waist. Her hair hung in a thick plait far below her 
waist. 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


138 

** Angela,” said Star, “ Lucy has told you what we 
want you for.” 

And I am very pleased,” said Angela. 

She spoke in a low, somewhat deep voice. Her eyes 
were resting on Christian as though she were already 
protecting her. 

“ Now for Jane Price, and our guard is complete,” 
said Star. 

Lucy appeared, leading Jane by the hand. Jane was 
a short, dumpy, and very plain girl. She had an enor- 
mous forehead and thin hair. Her hair was cut to a 
line level with her neck. Her dress was short, sensible, 
ugly. Her hands were big and somewhat red. She 
had small, honest eyes and a large mouth. 

“ Jane,” said Star in a sprightly tone, “ you are just 
the very person we want. This is the victim; we will 
guard her, won’t we?” 

Three cheers ! ” cried Lucy. Of course we will.” 

“ You must come to us if you are in any difficulty, 
Christian,” said Angela. 

And just let me know and I’ll punch ’em all round,” 
was Jane’s remark. 

Christian’s face was very pale. 

“ Thank you all,” she said. ‘‘No doubt you mean it 
in kindness, but I feel more frightened than ever.” 

“ Oh, dear ! the poor, swoet thing ! ” said Star. “ Has 
anybody got a lollypop?” 

Immediately three hands were thrust into three 
pockets. Star’s alone was unattacked. She shook her 
head sadly. 

“ I haven’t got any,” she said. “ I ate all mine up 
last night after I got into bed. Four-and-twenty I con- 
sumed, and I was none the worse this morning.” 

“ You know that was very naughty of you. Star,” said 
Angela. 


SCHOOLGIRLS 


139 


** My dear, I can’t help my propensities ; never could. 
Oh, dear ! oh, dear ! sometimes I scarcely like to look 
into the beautiful, kind eyes of our beloved Lavinia, so 
naughty do I feel. And yet I’m not really naughty. 
I’m not rabid, I mean; am I, girls?” 

You are a duck and a darling,” said Lucy. 

** Well, your Satinship, have you got any sweeties, 
any fondants, any caramels?” interrupted Star. 

A few rather sticky ones were produced. Christian 
suddenly found her voice 

'‘Do you really care for sweets?” she asked. 

“ Do we really care for sweets? ” cried Star. “ Aren’t 
we schoolgirls? What do you mean?” 

“ Only that I have got such a big box. Miss Thomp- 
son bought them for me; and another box full of little 
cakes.” 

A wild cheer immediately was given. Handker- 
chiets were waved in the air; the girls clapped and 
laughed until they nearly cried. 

“ Isn’t she worth guarding? Won’t we guard her 
double quick?” said Star. “ You angel, we will attack 
those dainties presently, but now let us pace up and 
down in this corner of the playground.” 

“ I am to see Miss Peacock at five o’clock,” said 
Christian. 

“You lucky young beggar! But, of course, I for- 
got; first-day girls are always fussed over. You will 
be all right to-day, Christian; it’s to-morrow that the 
tug-of-war will begin.” 

Christian was silent for a minute; then she said 
slowly : 

“ I thank you four girls very much indeed. I 
suppose it is safer for me to have you as my 
friends.” 

“Safer!” cried Angela. “Having us as your 


140 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

friends, you will never, never know what you have 
escaped.” 

“ But would you mind telling me who the girls are? 
I mean the specially dreadful girls who are likely to be 
unkind. If I only knew I should not be so frightened.” 

“ And that information we will never give you, dear 
genius,” replied Star. “ If you find out for yourself, 
alas for you! I only trust you will never find out. 
There’s the tea-gong. Come in now; and you will sit at 
my table, as you belong to my class.” 

An hour later Christian found herself in Miss Pea- 
cock’s presence. Miss Peacock was standing under a 
rose-colored lamp. She was reading a letter. Sud- 
denly she raised her eyes and saw Christian. Christian 
was a striking-looking girl. She had a splendid car- 
riage for her age; she held herself very erect, and kept 
her head well back on her shoulders. Her golden hair 
shone in the lamp-light. She came slowly forward, her 
eyes very wide open, her face pale, a look of entreaty 
round her mouth. 

‘‘Ah, Christian!” said Miss Peacock in a kind 
voice; “and how are you, dear? Are you taking your 
place in the school? ” 

“ I don’t know,” replied Christian. 

Miss Peacock took no notice of this vacillating re- 
mark. She motioned to Christian to seat herself in a 
shady corner, where she knew the young girl would be 
more comfortable than when exposed to the full glare of 
the light. 

“ I have got a very good report of you from your dif- 
ferent misitresses and your music-master, dear,” she said. 
“ They all say you are remarkably well advanced for 
your age. That being the case, you will soon win a 
character for cleverness. A clever girl is always re- 
spected and thought a good deal of; and I trust you 


SCHOOLGIRLS 


141 

will be respected and looked up to, Christian, and that 
you will help to bring a good influence into this school 
— a religious and moral influence, the efficacy of which 
can never be overrated.’’ 

“ Oh, please,” said Christian, with a little gasp, '' you 
know what I have done ! ” 

Miss Peacock was quite silent for a minute. 

“ What you did,” she then said very gravely, “ hap- 
pened before you came to me.” 

“ I know; but it was because of you — because of com- 
ing to the school — ^that I did it.” 

Miss Peacock’s eyes twinkled for a minute. 

“ Would you rather discuss the whole thing with me, 
Christian, or, on the other hand, would you rather let it 
lie — forget it, cover it up, go straight forward as though 
it had never been?” 

“•I think Pd rather discuss it with you. And,” con- 
tinued Christian, I think Fd rather ” — her voice 
faltered; it sank almost to a whisper — “I think Fd 
rather the other girls knew.” 

These words evidently startled Miss Peacock very 
much. 

You would rather your schoolfellows knew? But 
it has nothing to do with them.” 

There would be nothing then to find out,” con- 
tinued Christian. As it is, I shall live in fear. Oh! 
it was good of you — it was sweet of you — to keep it 
dark; but I think I would rather they knew.” 

Miss Peacock was amazed. She sat quite still for a 
minute; then she rose and walked to the other end of 
the room. She rang a bell, and in a few moments 
Jessie appeared. Jessie wore the same peculiar ex- 
pression as she had worn the night before. The look 
of extreme juvenility, which vanished almost as soon as 
she began to speak, and her girlish dress, her girlish 


142 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 

V- 

face, and her non-girlish voice, made her at once both 
striking and interesting. 

I understand from what Jessie has told me, that 
you have confided this matter to her, Christian,” said 
Miss Peacock, turning to the young girl. 

“ I have. I had to; she was so very good to me, I 
could not let her live under the impression that I had 
been ill.” 

“ I never gave anyone to understand that you were 
ill. I simply said that you were unavoidably detained. 
The girls are at liberty to form their own conclu- 
sions.” 

There is an idea in' the school that I was very ill,” 
said Christian; “ and,” she added, “I don’t like it, for 
you know ” — she raised her clear eyes to Miss Pea- 
cock’s face — “ it is not true. You know it, don’t you. 
Miss Peacock?” 

Miss Peacock looked back at her with so intent a 
gaze that it seemed to the young girl that she was read- 
ing her through. 

“ Come here, Christian,” she then said. 

Christian rose. She now stood in the full light, and 
both Miss Peacock and Jessie could see the vivid pink 
in her cheeks and the brightness of her eyes. There 
was something about her which impressed them; the 
'wonder on both their faces grew. At last Miss Peacock 
laid her hand on the girl’s shoulder. 

“ Christian,” she sai4, you are a remarkably brave 
girl. You are a great deal braver than you have any 
idea of yourself. It would not be right to take you at 
your word without explaining matters. My dear, to 
have this escapade of yours known in the school would 
mean ” 

“ It cannot be known,” interrupted Miss Jessie. 
‘‘ Miss Peacock, dear, it must not be known.” 


SCHOOLGIR^LS 143 

“That certainly was my feeling, Jessie; but if the 
child herself ” 

“ No, no,” repeated Miss Jessie. “ Even you. Miss 
Lavinia, can’t guess all that goes on in a school like 
this.” 

“ I shut my eyes on purpose,” said Miss Peacock. 

A school is a little world. In that world there must 
necessarily be evil ; without evil good would have noth- 
ing to overcome. The brave girls will overcome the 
evil and rise on the wings of good. I don’t want any 
girl at Penwerne Manor to be subjected to too severe 
a discipline, however — a discipline which may be greater 
than the strength of the girl can meet. Now Chris- 
tian, you have asked me an extraordinary thing. You 
wish the school to be told about your conduct before 
you came here. You don’t know enough, my dear, to 
make it possible for me to grant your request — ^at least 
yet. But come to me again at the end of a month, and 
if you still make the same request, I shall have 
pleasure in giving my own version of the whole affair 
to the girls of Penwerne Manor. I think that is all, 
Jessie; you can attend to your usual duties. Christian, 
come and sit on this stool near me; I should like to talk 
to you about long ago.” 

Miss Peacock drew the girhdown to a seat close by 
her side. 

“ After what you have said, I put you in my own 
minft on a different footing fron» the other girls,” she 
remarked. “ Now, I am going to tell you something. 
I felt a great sense of rejoicing and a great sense_of 
personal pleasure when I received a letter from your 
good father to say that he wished to place you at Pen- 
werne Manor during his absence.” 

Christian made no reply. She raised her eyes and 
fixed then) on Miss Peacock. Miss Peacock noticed 


144 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


the frank, earnest look in the large eyes, and she put 
out her soft, well-formed white hand and smoothed back 
the hair from Christian’s forehead. 

“ My dear child,” she said, “ my reason for being so 
pleased was that I owe, I think I may say, all that is 
good in my own life to your grandmother.” 

“ To granny? ” said Christian, in astonishment. Then 
she added, “ I scarcely ever heard anything of granny 
until lately, but father spoke of her, and said that I — I 
wonder if it is true — that I resemble her.” 

“You are decidedly like her in appearance; only, of 
course, when I knew her she was an elderly woman. 
But you are more like her in mind. That was exactly 
the sort of thing she would have done. She would have 
been intensely naughty, and then intensely repentant. 
But there, dear! you are looking tired and flushed. 
Perhaps you had better go up to your own room early. 
Be sure you come to me in any difiiculty, and regard me 
as your special friend. Good-night dear, and God 
bless you.” 


CHAPTER XV 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 

Christian’s head ached; she had gone through a 
good deal that day. At Penwerne Manor, for all except 
the Sixth Form girls, supper was a very simple affair. 
It was held in the refectory at half-past seven, and con- 
sisted of bread and butter, stewed fruit, and milk. 
Christian sat down to the simple meal, but she was not 
hungry. For the first time she was absolutely thrown 
on her own resources. Lousia Twining, being one of 
the Sixth Form girls, was not present at the other 
girls’ supper. Christian’s bodyguard was also nowhere 
to be seen. She sat near a quiet-looking girl of the 
name of Agnes Temple, but x\gnes seemed as much 
afraid of Christian as Christian was of her, and did not 
venture to question her at all. 

As soon as supper was over the young girl went up 
to Miss Jessie, who was standing at the top of the 
room. 

Are you cold, Christian? ” said Miss Jessie. Come 
and warm yourself by the fire.” 

“ I wanted to know,” said Christian, “ if I might go 
to bed; I am tired.” 

Certainly, if you like.” 

But as Miss Jessie spoke she glanced round the 
room. Suddenly a tall, awkward-looking girl, whom 
Christian had not noticed before, stood up. 

“ Has Christian Mitford asked to retire nearly an 
hour before the usual time?” was her query. 


145 


146 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Certainly, Sukey ; and seeing that she is very tired, 
I am about to give her leave.” 

Bui I am afraid that I, Susan Marsh, and Maud 
Thompson and Mary Hillary and Janet Bouverie, as 
well as several others in the school, cannot give Chris- 
tian Mitford leave to go to bed without the usual cere- 
mony being gone through.” 

Christian looked with some amazement first at the 
tall girl, then at Miss Jessie. To her surprise, she 
noticed that Miss Jessie’s face got very red and then 
very white. The little lady went quickly down the 
length of the room, and laying a hand on Susan Marsh’s 
shoulder, whispered something in her ear. She had 
to stand on tiptoe to make her remark, and Susan 
looked down at her and shook her head gravely. Miss 
Jessie then turned to the other girls, who also shook 
their heads. By and by the little lady had to go back 
again to Christian. 

“ It can’t be helped, Christian, dear,” she said. 
“Every girl goes through it; it is a sort of ordeal 
which seems to be part and parcel of the Manor. I 
can, if you wish it, apply to Miss Peacock; but I think 
I would rather not, and if you are wise you will not do 
so. It would squash the whole thing, but it would not 
be for your best happiness.” 

“ Oh, I am not afraid — not really,” said Chris- 
tian ; “ and please don’t say anything to Miss Pea- 
cock.” 

“ You are a good girl. Now, the best thing you can 
do is to appear quite indifferent; then they won’t get 
much fun out of you, and you will be all right.” 

“ What is that about Christian, and llaving much 
fun, and being all right?” suddenly said a gay voice; 
and Star Lestrange, in a pale-blue frock, looking as 
pretty as a girl could look, danced into the room. 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 


147 

The usual thing; you know all about it,” said Miss 
Jessie. 

“ Of course I do; and so does Lucy Norris, and so 
does Jane Price, and so does Angela Goring.” 

So many,” said Miss Jessie in a tone of relief. 

‘‘ Yes, Jessie, my honey, so you may go to bed with 
an easy mind; your new fledgling won’t come to any 
harm. Now, come along, Christian. You have us>four 
to look after you. We can’t appear publicly as your 
bodyguard, but see if you won’t feel our influence.” 

Christian, in her relief, almost squeezed Star’s 
hand. 

“ Don’t,” said Star, who seemed to read her thought in 
her eyes. It’s not the fashion at Penwerne Manor to 
show much outward affection. I mean we never kiss, 
and we don’t clasp arms much, or anything of that sort 
— not until we turn ourselves into what we call ‘ lover- 
ettes.’ Sometimes two girls make a great friendship 
and declare it publicly in the school; then they’re dubbed 
‘ loverettes ’ by their fellows, and are allowed to sit 
alone, and walk about arm in arm. But that sort of 
thing doesn’t often happen ; and, for my part,” continued 
Star, I hate it.” 

“ And yet I should have thought you were very affec- 
tionate,” said Christian. 

“Should you?” answered Star, favoring her with a 
full glance, which caused the young girl to shrink into 
her shoes. 

In the corridor outside Susan Marsh was waiting. 
She had the most peculiar face Christian had ever seen 
in her life. It was not only plain, it was downright 
ugly; there was not one feature in harmony with an- 
other. She was very tall and very awkward in her 
movements. Her complexion was of a dull mud color; 
her hair was a dull, very light brown; her eyes were 


148 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


small, her nose broad at the nostrils and very retrousse, 
her mouth wide. She had good teeth, but otherwise 
scarcely a redeeming feature. The expression of her 
face was as little pleasing as were her features. Never- 
theless this girl had an extraordinary power over her 
fellows; she was never seen without a following, and 
many a little girl looked at her with a mingling of awe 
and terror as she waited now for Christian. 

“ So you are coming, Star,” she said. “ Well so 
much the better; we’ll have some fun. Cheer up, vic- 
tim; it’s your night to go through the ceremony,” 

“ But what is it? ” said Christian. 

“You will know, my pretty victim, when the time 
comes. We always have it in the big attic. It is great 
fun; it is the most delightful time in our lives. We 
were all very keen for your arrival, but you don’t sup- 
pose it was simply for. the sake of enjoying the first 
night of your sweet society? Nothing of the kind. It 
was on account of the ordeal.^ The ordeal is such 
fun!” 

“ Don’t mind half she is saying,” said Star Lestrange. 
“ But come along, Christian. It is quite true; there 
is an ordeal, and you must go through it before you 
can really be what we pride ourselves on being — a 
Penwernian.” 

They now turned and went upstairs, past the nice 
rooms where the girls’ bedrooms were located, and up 
again some narrow s^irs, until, having opened an attic 
door, Christian found herself in a huge attic which ran 
right across the front of the house. This room had 
evidently been got ready for a ceremony. Candles 
in tin sconces were arranged along the wall ; each sconce 
was fastened in its place by a small tack, and as the 
girls entered a short, very dark, stoutly built girl was 
going from one to the other lighting them. When 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 


149 

the illumination was at last complete, from twenty to 
thirty candles were burning in the front attic. 

Christian had a curious feeling that she was back 
again in the attic at home. When she got upstairs 
her fears suddenly left her. She was to be the heroine 
of probably a very disagreeable adventure, but had she 
not herself from her earliest days encountered adven- 
tures of all sorts in the attic at home? What thrilling 
moments had not her dolls lived through? What times 
of ecstasy had been hers when she was Joan of Arc! 
Oh, that night when she had imagined herself tied to 
the stake! Had she not really tied herself to the post of 
the old bedstead, and had she not crowded round her torn 
pieces of paper, and shut her eyes, and tried to imagine 
the upward ascent of the flames? Had she not, finally, 
almost screamed in her agony, for had not real pains 
taken possession of her, so vivid and intense had been 
her imagination? 

“ After all,’’ she said to herself, ‘‘ I have my body- 
guard, and they do look faithful, and nothing can be 
worse than what I lived through in imagination before 
now.” 

Whfn Christianas eyes grew accustomed to the gloom 
she perceived that every single girl in the school, ex- 
cept three or four of the sixth form, was present. They 
seemed to her to have augmented in numbers, and to 
be a great deal more than the forty girls she had been 
told lived at Penwerne Manor. They stood about in 
groups, and all looked eager and pleased. 

Christian noticed that a large wooden bowl had been 
placed upon the ground almost in the center of the 
attic, and a little straw chair, of a twisted, crooked, 
rickety, and decrepit nature, stood within a few feet of 
the wooden bowl. She herself remained near the door, 
and she was surprised as she entered the room to 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


150 

notice that Star Lestrange immediately left her and 
walked right across the attic to the farther end, where 
she sat down on a turned-up box. 

Very soon quick steps were heard running upstairs, 
and Lucy Norris, looking more smooth and sleek and 
satiny than ever, joined Star on her box. Jane Price 
was already standing near, and Angela Goring was 
the last to arrive. . None^f the four glanced at Chris- 
tian, who remained alone, and looking thoroughly mis- 
erable, near the door. All of a sudden she felt that she 
had been subjected to a hoax, and that her bodyguard 
meant to desert her. 

'Meanwhile Susan Marsh took her place in the center 
of the room. She mounted a box, said something 
to Maud in a low tone, and then Maud took her place 
by her side. 

“All present? she cried. “Ah, yes! I see. Agnes 
Temple, stand , to one side; you are disgracefully late. 
Yes, we are all Lere — all except Louisa Twining, Mary 
Reid, and Philippa Dawson. Well, the Sixth Form 
must have its privileges. Now to begin. Who is giv- 
ing the address to-night? It’s your turn, Star, and 
you are always witty We want something to stir- 
us up; we’re a bit dull, I take it. Come along, now. 
What, you won’t?"” 

“ Not to-night,” said Star. 

“ Does that mean that the new girl, the victim, is your 
special friend?” 

Star , shook her head. ^ 

“ Or your special enemy?” 

Again the bright head was shaken. 

“She’s neuter,” said Star; “although I mean to see 
justice done.” 

“ Then it devolves upon me,” said Susan, “ to open 
the function. I must explain the rules of the society 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 


to the victim. Victim, kindly step forward. Seat your- 
self in this wriggly arm-chair, fix your eyes on my face, 
and listen to the words of deep, Solomon-like wisdom 
that drop from my lips.” 

Christian dropped into the chair, and the other girls 
looked at her with amazement and admiration. Many 
a girl before her had wriggled in agony in that small 
chair, had blushed and ^qijjvered and trembled, but 
Christian's face was quite calm. She looked full up 
at Susan and smiled. 

Nothing in all the world could have been more dis- 
comfiting to Susan Marsh than that smile. It was 
seen by every single girl in the room, and quite a burst 
of admiration came from Star Lestrange, Lucy Norris, 
Jane Price, and Angela. Star clapped her hands, and 
immediately the whole school took up the clap. This 
from every girl in the place showed that Christian had 
made a favorable impression. 

“ Come, come ! ” said Susan brusquelyf and looking 
more disagreeable than ever; “this noise is very much 
against the rules. Even those girls who have lived 
through the ordeal must not disturb the usual proceed- 
ings. Now then, Christian Mitford, your age, please?” 

“ Thirteen,” said Christian. 

“When will you have a birthday?” 

“ In three months' time.” 

“ Mary Hillary, pray note in the archives of this so- 
ciety that the new victim, Christian Mitford, is thirteen 
years and nine months of age.” 

Mary, who was standing by a sort of little desk, 
opened it, took out a paper volume of most disrepu- 
table appearance, opened it, made an entry, with a 
sort of giggle, and then stood silent. 

“ It is your penalty, Christian Mitford, to put into 
the wooden bowl that lies at your feet a large caramel. 


152 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


fondant, or chocolate for each month of your’ life. 
Who will solve the riddle of the months of Christian 
Mitford’s life?” 

Star immediately cried out: 

One hundred and sixty-five months.” 

“ To that great age have you attained, Christian Mit- 
ford, and your penalty is that, having lived so long in 
the world, you must place upon the altar of our friend- 
ship a lollypop or other sweet for each of your months. 
You do this for the good of the community. The pen- 
alty is slight, and not at all in accordance with the 
offense.” 

But I canY imagine what the offense is,” said Chris- 
tian suddenly. “ As to having lollypops, there is a 
large box in my bedroom, and you are all welcome to 
have them if you like.” 

At this minute Star rose, and turning to Lucy, Jane, 
and Angela,'motioned to them to follow her. The four 
girls came forward in single file, and each dropped on 
one knee before Christian and laid a box of chocolates 
at her feet. 

‘‘We ard proud to be your ministers on this occa- 
sion,” s^id Star, “ and" we have brought the penalty 
which you in your ignorance knew nothing about.” 

‘‘ I don’t call that at all fair,” cried Susan. “We 
ap^know that if a girl can’t offer the necessary confec- 
tionei’y she has to give another forfeit of a different 
nature, and that forfeit is often of greater value to the 
society. But there ! ” she added, seeing that Star 
frowned, “ if we must submit, I suppose we must. Be 
thankful to your ministers, therefore, Christian Mit- 
ford. Take up the sweets and deposit them in the bowl, 
but be sure you have the right number. Be sure you 
have one hundred and sixty-five sweetmeats— one for 
each month of your life.” 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 


IS3 

Christian took up the boxes and unfastened them. 
Several girls crowded round as she reckoned them 
out and placed them in the bowl. Susan stood by 
counting with her lips as Christian deposited the sweets 
in their receptacle. 

“ So far so good/' she said. “ The fact of your 
having paid this forfeit exonerates you from other un- 
pleasantnesses which certainly would have been your lot 
had those four girls, Star Lestrange, Lucy Norris, Jane” 
Price, and Angela Goring, not come to the rescue. 
But now we have other matters to attend to. You 
know — or, if you don't know, you must be told' — that 
any girl who comes to Penwerne Manor and doesn’t 
enter into our secret society is outside in every sense 
of the word. She may be loved by her teachers — such 
a thing is quite possible — but she certainly will not be 
loved by the girls. She will not be allowed to share in 
any of the real conviviality of the school — the secret 
banquets, for instance. Now, girls, can any of you 
give a description of what the secret banquets are really 
like?” 

Star jumped to her feet and began to speak eagerly. 

“ They’re very naughty,” she said. They are con- 
ducted without our teachers knowing anything about 
them. They occur once a month — ^here. We generally 
assemble about half-past ten at night,, and go back to 
our rooms about half-past eleven. We collect during 
the month for the expenses of the banquet. Our food 
is generally brought in by means of a basket and a rope 
through the attic window. The fun of the thing is to 
do it secretly. We try not to be too naughty, but we 
certainly have a gay time.” 

” It sounds interesting,” said Christian, who felt 
that she could enjoy it; ‘'but does Miss Peacock 
know? ” 


*54 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Does Miss Peacock know?” suddenly exclaimed 
Maud Thompson, raising her voice for the first time, 
and giving Christian an angry look. “ Pd like to see 
the girl who would tell Miss Peacock. Jessie knows; 
but then nobody minds Jessie. The other teachers 
don’t know, and I trust never will. Mademoiselle is an 
old horror. We have to keep it from Mademoiselle, 
whatever happens.” 

“ Now, you, Christian Mitford, continued Susan, 
“can, if you like, remain outside the society; but of 
course you will not.” 

“No, Christian,” said Star; “you must join.” 

“ And having joined, you must adhere to the rules,” 
said Susan. “ Now, to make the ceremony of mem- 
bership of value, we always tattoo a tiny mark on the 
arm of a new member. We do this with nitrate of 
silver, a small bottle of which is kept up here. It 
hardly hurts at all, and if the victim objects ” 

“ Certainly, if you object, Christian, it is not to be 
done,” said Star; “ but,” she added, with a laugh, “ you 
had much better submit.” 

“ I don’t mind a bit,” said Christian. “ I have gone 
through worse things than that,” she added. 

Susan’s eyes brightened and grew suddenly big. 
She fastened them on the young girl’s face. 

“ I haven’t the least doubt,” she said, “ that you will 
be an acquisition. You seeiji to have courage. Some 
girls get 'in sych a funk.” 

“ But I won’t join,” said Christian firmly, “ until I 
know what it means.” 

“ It means that we are to stick to each other through 
thick and thin; that you are never to tell; that when the 
members of the committee — I am one. Star Lestrange 
is another, Angela Goring is another, and Janet Bou- 
verie is another — that when we decide on a certain 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 


155 


mode of action all the members have to adhere to it. 
They have to follow in our lead and submit to our 
dictum. Fresh members are elected on the committee 
every half-year, and on that day, the ceremony is very 
important indeed. The girls greatly like the present 
set — don't you, girls?" 

There was a loud cheer, particularly in the neigh- 
borhood of Star Lestrange. Susan looked round her 
and slightly frowned. 

“ Each member has to subscribe something out of 
her own private pocket-money once a week to the funds 
of the society," said Susan; “and if possible she ought 
to begin with a handsome donation. What can you 
afford, Christian Mitford? You look as though you 
had plenty of money. I hope you will be able to put a 
good sum into the funds." 

“ A shilling is the usual thing," called out Star across 
the room. 

“ It would be better for you to give more," said 
Susan, gazing at Christian uneasily. 

“ I will give five shillings." 

“ Naughty, naughty little t’ing," said Star’s ventril- 
oquist voice over Christian’s head. 

“You really can’t be allowed to break the rules in 
this fashion, even if you are a member of the commit- 
tee, Star Lestrange," said Susan. “ We shall be glad 
of five shillings, Christian. You don’t seem to be such 
a formidable person nor so badly behaved as I ex- 
pected. We will now, if you please, perform the cere- 
mony of initiation." 

The girls crowded round. Susan came forward. 

“ On this occasion," she said, “ you, Maud Thomp- 
son, will perform the ceremony on Christian’s arm. 

Christian bared her arm, and Maud, with a tiny 
caustic pencil, wrote the word “ Penwernian " in very 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


156 

small letters just above her elbow. The caustic smarted 
slightly, but the pain was nothing to speak of. 

“ Now,’' continued Maud, “ you belong to us, Chris- 
tian Mitford — or at least you very nearly do. You 
have still to write your name in blood in this book. 
Don't be startled; just prick your finger. Here’s the 
needle we always use for the purpose. Shall I do it 
for you? ” 

Before Christian could reply Maud made a sharp 
prick on her first finger, and a large drop of blood 
appeared. The pen was then put into Christian’s hand, 
and she wrote her name in the members’ book. 

Now you belong to our secret society,” continued 
Maud. “You know what we know; you do what we 
do. Through thick and thin you will be faithful to 
us; through trouble and joy you belong to us. You 
would sooner have your heart cut into little bits than 
betray us. Very well, that is all right. Now begins the 
real pleasure of the evening. Girls,” continued Maud, 
turning and facing the other girls as they crowded 
round her, “ it is permitted, in honor of the new mem- 
ber, that the caramels, fondants, etc., put into that 
wooden bowl should now be divided. Long life to the 
new member. Christian, you as fresh member are per- 
mitted to eat one month of your life.” 

“ Really,“ said Christian, laughing, “ this sounds very 
formidable. I don’t know that I want to eat away any 
part of my life.” 

She thought the ceremony had come to an end, and 
was rather relieved than otherwise; but her happiness 
was short-lived, for Susan came over' and said calmly: 

“ Now then, be as quick as you can and give us an 
account of why you were unavoidably detained. Your 
unavoidable detention has been the talk Of the school 
for the last fortnight. Now, we want to learn all about 


THE ORDEAL AND THE VICTIM 157 

you; for understand, it is absolutely necessary that each 
member of our secret society should have the full con- 
fidence of all the other members. The sooner, 
therefore, you begin to tell us your life's history the 
better.” 


CHAPTER XVI 


SUSAN MARSH 

Susan now, with quick, deft movements, removed 
the candles' from their places by the wall, and placed 
them, round the wooden bowl, which no longer con- 
tained any fondants, for they had all been devoured by 
the greedy Penwernians. The candles were arranged 
in a circle, and the girls were invited to seat themselves 
in a wider circle just beyond. Christian alone was so 
placed that the light from the candles should fall on 
her face. 

‘'Now begin, please,’’ said Susan; “all about your 
unavoidable detention first. And don’t prevaricate; the 
soul of truth is the leading motive of our society. We 
scorn to conceal anything; we just speak the simple 
truth on all occasions.” 

There was a pause. For a minute it seemed to Chris- 
tian as though she heard the beating of her own heart. 
She was quite still, and it was not until a small sharp 
voice sounded at the back of her ear: “ It is the first 
step that costs ” — that she found her voice. 

Really Star was too trying, but she had the effect of 
stimulating the young girl into a terrible effort to con- 
trol herself. 

“ I am very much obliged to you all for being so 
anxious to know about me,” said Christian, “ and I will 
tell you about my past life from time to time if you 
really desire it; but I don’t intend to mention why I 
was kept from school. That is my own secret, and I 
intend to keep it.” 


*58 


SUSAN MARSH 


159 

Naughty new member; that will never do,” cried 
several gay voices. 

“Hush!” said Susan in an imperative tone. “We 
all know what happens when members of this society 
refuse to obey the committee. But we will speak of 
that later on. Tell us just what you wish to tell us 
now, Christian.” 

“ I will tell you a story,” said Christian suddenly, 
“and it’s all about myself.” 

“A story — ^that’s good!” cried Agnes Temple, a 
look of satisfaction crossing her commonplace little 
face. “ I love stories about people.” Then, fixing 
her eyes on her companion’s face, she said, “ I like 
Christian Mitford — don’t you?” 

“ Please don’t talk any more in that whisper,” stid- 
denly exclaimed Star. “ Now then, Christian, we will 
not compel your confidence to-night. It might have 
been,” she continued, glancing round at her fellows, 
“ anything. It might mean an accident to the head or 
to the heart, in which case it would be extremely dan- 
gerous to press for an explanation. You shall tell us 
just what you like, Christian,” she continued, “ only 
don’t draw on your imagination if you can help it.” 

“ What I tell you will be true,” answered Christian, 
“ only I don’t suppose any of you will believe me. I 
am an only child. All my days I should have been ter- 
ribly lonely but for my attic.” 

“Oh, dear!” cried Maud Thompson; “perhaps she 
has belonged to other secret societies. She would 
have been very lonely but for her attic. Please tell 
us all about your attic.” 

“ I will,” said Christian, “ if you won’t interrupt.’^ 

She then proceeded to give a vivid picture of her 
early days. She described her life so that the girls who 
listened no longer interrupted with silly words or sar- 


i6o THE MANOR SCHOOL 

castic remarks ; they were so interested that they forgot 
themselves. Christian spoke of her doll days, then of 
her fairy-story days, and last of her heroic days. When 
she got to the subject of Joan of Arc it seemed to the 
girls that no history had ever been so thrilling. 

“ It was one dreadful dark day,^' she continued, sud- 
denly rising to her feet and forgetting about every- 
thing but that picture of the past which was rising up 
in her mind. “ There was snow outside, and I thought 
and I thought, and it seemed to me that I was Joan 
and in prison. I thought I would put on the armor 
which was to be my undoing. I saw myself in it, and I 
was glad and not at all afraid. And then — and then — 
there came the trial. Oh! it lasted so long, and I 
seemed to live through it all. I was condemned to 
death. I saw myself; I was there. I was burnt, and I 
did go through it all.” 

“Oh, nonsense!” here cried Mary Hillary. “Your 
head must be affected.” 

“No, no; I did go through it all in imagination,” 
said Christian. “ I made it, too, as realistic as possible. 
There was an old, old bedstead, and one of the posts 
was broken. I bound myself to the post — yes, with 
real chains, too; they belonged to a dog we used to 
keep in a kennel. They were rusty, but that did not 
matter. And I piled up papers round me, all torn up in 
great pieces; and I had some red paper to imitate the 
color of the flames. T made the paper come higher 
and higher, and I fancied I saw a crowd, and I was 
burned.” 

“Oh, dear! you are an extraordinary girl,” said 
Angela Goring. “ Don't you think that sort of thing 
is very bad for you? ” _ 

The others were silent. Christian dropped down 
again on her seat. 


SUSAN MARSH 


i6i 


“ I have no more to tell you to-night,” she said. It 
takes it out of me to feel like that. I wouldn’t tell you, 
but if we are Penwernians that means that we are com- 
rades — and comrades must understand each other. If 
you all will be friends with me I will be your friend. 
Oh, I hope you will; I was a little afraid of you to-day, 
but I don’t really think I will be afraid any longer/’ 

“ I, as a member of the committee, declare our meet- 
ing is now dissolved,” said Star Lestrange suddenly. 
“ It is time for us to go to our bedrooms. Go softly, 
everyone. Jessie wouldn’t tell, but the other mistresses 
are no end of tell-tale-tits. Good-night, Christian.” 

“ Christian,” said Janet Bouverie suddenly, “ I’m 
glad you have come to the school, and I hope you will 
be friends with me.” 

A great many other girls came up and shook hands 
with Christian. She had scored a success. One by 
one, like little frightened shadows, the Penwernians 
stole to their separate rooms. Fortunately for Chris- 
tian, hers was not far off, as the White Corridor was 
the nearest to the celebrated front attic. 

She was glad to see a bright fire burning in the grate, 
but she started very violently when she saw standing 
by the fire no less a person than Miss Jessie her- 
self; 

“ Come in,, dear,” said Miss Jessj^. “ I know all 
about it, of course. If I were a teacher I should be 
obliged to tell; buCjI am not a teacher, and dear La- 
vinia gives me a good deal of liberty. I do not feel 
that I am obliged to make mischief. As long as you 
girls keep up your little mystery and don’t do anything 
wrong, I don’t feel called upon to make you unhappy. 
Don’t tell me, deaf, what has happeped; I’d much 
rather not know. But come to the fire; you look quite 
blue and cold.” 


i 62 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Oh, in some ways I have had a splendid time/’ said 
Christian. 

“ I am relieved to hear it, my love. To tell the 
truth, I have been a little anxious about you, 
Christian.” 

‘^Why?” asked Christian. 

Because your face has a strange expression — ^just 
as though you felt things too rnuch.” 

“ I am naughtier than most girls ; that is why,” said 
Giristian. 

My dear child, let me assure you that you are 
nothing of the kind. I know a lot about girls, living 
here as I do. Even dear Lavinia can’t see them as I 
do, for they are always on their best behavior with her, 
and they don’t mind little Jessie in the very least. But 
now, dear, I came to your room on purpose to tell you 
that your real life here begins to-morrow. You will, 
like everyone else, have your hardships; you will also 
have your period of discipline, and I earnestly beg of 
you, Christian, not for the sake of a purely quixotic 
motive to get yourself into hot water by telling some- 
thing which never happened in the school. In regard 
to this remember, my dear, it is your duty to be guided 
by the superior judgment of dear Lavinia Peacock.” 

Christian made no answer. Miss Jessie looked into 
her eyes. 

“ You are over-anxious, dear. I trust you will sleep. 
Is your fire all right? Ah! I see it is. I wish I could 
give you this little luxury every night, but it is against 
our rules. We have a fire once a week in each bed- 
room, just to keep it warm and aired, but that is all. 
Now I will put on two additional lumps of coal. You 
will be quite happy, dear. The great gong will wake 
you at seven o’clock to-morrow morning; you are ex- 
pected to be down at half-past seven. At eight we 


SUSAN MARSH 163 

have breakfast, and then prayers. You will soon know 
all the routine. And now, love, good-night.’' 

Christian stood for a few minutes by the fire. It 
certainly was cheerful, and the little room snug. She 
felt that she might soon be happy at school. As to 
being interested, she had never felt so intensely inter- 
ested before. The girls were so naive, so fresh. Even 
those who terrified her aroused her interest. She did 
not like Susan Marsh, but even Susan had something 
fascinating about her. Then, as to Star, was anybody 
ever before so gay, so bright, so willful? 

'‘And she was good to me,” thought the child — 
“ really good. She helped me when I was frightened. 
She showed me how I might take a proper place in the 
school. I love her already. I shall love her well. How 
strange it is that I should be supplied with a sort of 
bodyguard! Star and Lucy and Jane and Angela. I 
can’t say that they did much for me while I was going 
through the initiation, but still they were there. I sup- 
pose they acted rightly in not making their presence 
too much felt. Star said they were to be a sort of in- 
visible bodyguard, ready to help me in times of real 
difficulty and danger, but as a rule allowing me to get 
out of my own scrapes, when I don’t absolutely require 
their assistance.” 

Christian removed her dress and looked at her arm. 
It still smarted a little from the initial ceremony. 

“How ridiculous all this is!” she said to herself. 
“ Father and mother would smile over it; and yet it 
didn’t seem ridiculous up there.” 

She wondered what her father would say if he ever 
heard of that evening’s event. Then, having knelt for 
a minute or two in prayer, she got into bed. 

But Christian’s adventures for that night were by no 
means over; for, just as she was getting drowsy and 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


164 

was dropping off to sleep, the door of her room glided 
open noiselessly, and Susan Marsh stood before 
her. 

“ I have come,’’ said Susan, to say something. I 
shan’t take up much of your time, but I think it only 
right that you should know. You are sleepy, but you 
must not go to sleep until I have had my talk out. By 
the way, what a snug room! And a fire, too. Dear 
me! do you think you deserve all these luxuries?” 

“ Certainly, if my parents choose to pay for them,” 
replied Christian. 

She found herself speaking in a pert voice, but her 
heart was beating and the old terrors were returning. 

“How grand we are!” said Susan mockingly. “I 
wonder if the parents know what the dear young only 
girl is up to. Now, Christian, please note that I am in 
the position to assure you calmly, simply, but at the 
same time firmly, that you are in my power.” 

“I in your power?” said Christian. “What do you 
mean? ” 

“ This : I happen to know all about that unavoidable 
detention. I know what it consisted of. I know the 
full particulars. I know all about that wicked, wicked 
running away from home, and the name of the little 
girl who went with you, and the slum where you 'vent, 
and the room that you slept in, and the reason why you 
were not allowed to return to the school for ten days. 
I can tell that story to the whole school ; and I will, too, 
if you don’t make it worth my while to be silent.” 

“ I will never make it worth your while to be silent,” 
said Christian. “ I can’t imagine how you learnt it, 
but you have learnt it by dishonorable means. 
Anyhow, I am not going to be afraid of you.” 

“Aren’t you?” said Susan. “There is plenty of 
firelight; that is a good thing. A fire is nice, and 


SUSAN MARSH 165 

we are quite alone — absolutely safe and comfortable— 
so we will just argue this matter/’ 

“ You may say anything you like,” replied Christian 
very stoutly, “ but I am not going to be afraid of 
you.” 

Her attitude and manner, and even the look on her 
face, impressed Susan. She was evidently astonished. 

‘^Why does Miss Peacock say that you were un- 
avoidably detained? ” was her next remark. 

“ You must ask Miss Peacock that yourself,” replied 
Christian. 

“Very well; I must now tell you the simple truth, 
Christian Mitford. You can take whatever attitude 
you please on this occasion. You may pretend to be 
indifferent, but you don’t know what it means. It lies 
in your power to tell the school or not.” 

“ That is what I intend to do,” said Christian. 

“ Is it? Well, we’ll see. If you do it you will imagine 
yourself a sort of heroine, no doubt; you will think 
yourself extremely brave. But wait for the result. 
How do you think your schoolfellows will take it? 
You spent the night, for instance, in the slums. We 
don’t any of us — we lady girls who live in this school — 
know what the slums mean, but you do. Then you 
were fearfully wicked and disobedient. The girls who 
are not wicked and who are not disobedient will be 
afraid of you. In short, I may as well assure you, 
Christian, if you tell this thing, if it is known in the 
school, you will be sent to Coventry. Do you know 
what Coventry means?” 

^ “ I have heard of it, but I should like to have your 
version,” said Christian. 

“ You are very smart and courageous in your con- 
versation now, but you won’t be when you feel the full 
pinch of Coventry life. Just picture to yourself what 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


1 66 

it will feel like never to be spoken to by your com- 
panions, to be without friends in the midst of a lot of 
girls, to be publicly expelled from the Penwernians.” 

“ Oh, I don’t mind that,” said Christian. 

“ You haven’t the remotest idea what it means or 
you wouldn’t say so. Your mistresses may continue 
to like you, but there isn’t a good, nice girl in the 
school who will dare to be seen speaking to you. You 
will live on here year after year, and not until all the 
present girls leave the school will you have any chance 
of becoming popular. Now, naturally you would be 
popular; you are just the sort of girl. That power of 
yours of telling stories is an immense attraction. It 
might win the heart of nearly every girl in the place. 
But after your sin is known no one will listen to you. 
And why, do you think? Because the committee of the 
Penwernians will forbid it. Now, of course, the mis- 
tresses have great power in the school; but, although 
they would not like to own it, their power is nothing 
at all compared to the power of our secret society. If 
you, who have just been made a member of it, were 
at once expelled because of conduct which makes it 
impossible for us to have anything to do with you, you 
would be in a sorry position. You can think the thing 
over. I don’t want to press you, but my advice to you 
is to take advantage of Miss Lavinia Peacock’s kind- 
ness and not to tell what you have done.” 

Susan’s words came out slowly. She made a pause 
now and then, and these pauses were very effective. 
Her ugly face was full of deep shadows in the firelight. 
Her eyes were scarcely visible at all. It was only her 
white teeth that gleamed now and then. As she stood 
she herself made a great shadow, and it seemed to 
Christian that Susan was a bad girl, and that she hated 
and, alas! feared her. 


SUSAN MARSH 


167 

“If I could only speak to Star/' she thought. 
“ What am I to do? ” 

“ What I say to you is in absolute confidence/' con- 
tinued Susan, who knew that she was at last making an 
impression. ‘‘ For your own sake you ought really not 
to tell. It doesn’t matter to me. If you do tell you 
will find it distinctly — yes, dreadfully — unpleasant. 
Miss Peacock must have known that fact when she so 
wisely resolved not to acquaint the girls with the truth." 

“’But I don’t care to live under a lie or to sail under 
false colors,” said Christian slowly. 

“You are a little goose," replied Susan; and now 
she changed both her attitude and manner, and coming 
close, she laid her hand upon the bed. Christian’s hand 
was lying outside the counterpane, and Susan caught 
it and held it firmly. 

“ You are one of us," she said, “ and of course we all 
want to like you. I for one feel that I could adore 
you. It is because I pity you that I speak." 

“ But how did you know? It is a secret from the 
whole school. How did you manage to get posses- 
sion of it?" said Christian. 

“ Ah ! that is my affair. I can only say now that I 
am in possession of it, and can give you full particu- 
lars of your great adventure. The name of your little 
runaway friend is Rose Latimer; and another horrid 
girl called Judith Ford was implicated in the affair. 
Now, are you satisfied?" 

“ I see that you know, but I can’t make out how 
you know." 

“ Be satisfied with that knowledge, for more you will 
not be told. Now, you have almost made up your 
mind, have you not, that you will not tell? ” 

“You have frightened me very much. I will think 
it ov6r/' 


1 68 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

Do, and to-morrow we will meet again. I won’t 
stay with you now, for I know you are sleepy. Of 
course you will pay me.” 

‘^For what?” 

For my silence, dear — my silence. What you give 
me I shall spend on fondants for the next meeting of 
the Penwernians. Have you got any money handy?” 

Poor Christian! A bright new sovereign lay on the 
dressing-table. At that very moment Susan’s eyes 
fell upon it. 

Why, here’s the^ very thing,” she said. It will 
keep me silent for a while. You will be happy and 
have a right good time, for I can see to that. Thank 
you so much! Good-night.” 

She snatched up the money and put it into her 
pocket. 

‘^No, no; come back, please — come back!” called 
Christian, 

But Susan gave a low laugh and a gesture of warn- 
ing, and disappeared from the room. 

It was long before Christian could sleep. After the 
relief that the meeting had given her, to come face to 
face with such a terrible obstacle as Susan Marsh made 
her feel almost wild with apprehension. She had no 
one to turn to, for she did not dare to betray Susan. 
What was to be done? 

‘^If I do the right thing,” thought the poor girl, 
Susan Marsh will be my enemy, and I dare not tell 
the mistresses. Oh, I wish — I wish father and mother 
had never sent me to this terrible school I ” 


CHAPTER XVII 


THE BOUDOIRS 

Two or three days after the events related in the last 
chapter, Susan Marsh might have been seen pacing up 
and down with her chosen friend Maud Thompson. 
Maud, compared to Susan, was rather a pretty girl; 
and under other influences she might have been a good 
girl. She had taken a fancy to Christian, and was tell- 
ing Susan of this fact. 

“ Like her as much as ever you please,” said Susan, 
“ but remember she is my prey.” 

‘‘ Your prey, Susan! Whatever do you mean? 
Sometimes you don’t talk at all nicely.” 

“ Lower your voice a little, my love,” said Susan ; 
“ we don’t want the others to hear us. We have a 
whole quarter of an hour, and I have a plan in my 
head.” 

‘‘ You always are planning things. But I do want to 
talk about Christian now. I can’t think why you call 
her your prey.” 

“ Of course, I have no secrets from you, Maud; you 
are my chosen friend, and would not dare to betray 
me, even if you wished to do so. But the fact is, I 
have got hold of the poor dear’s secret.” 

“Christian Mitford’s secret?” 

“ Y’es; the true story of her unavoidable .detention.” 

“ I wonder she won’t tell us about that. She never 
will. It rather surprises me,” said Maud. 

“ Rest assured, dear Maud, that she is never likely 

169 


170 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

to tell you. She would be a mighty great fool if 
she did.” 

‘'And you know all about it?” 

“ I know all about it, sweet? Oh, yes.” 

“ You look very queer, Susan. I wish you would not 
have that ” 

“That what, Maudie?” 

“ That sort of pleasure in seeing people unhappy. 
It isn’t nice.” 

“ Oh, isn’t it, Maud? What about the kind friend 
who gets others out of their troubles. You know ” 

“ You needn’t go into that,” said Maud, coloring and 
then turning white. 

“Ah! but I thought I’d just remind you, dear. But 
to return to our beloved Christian. She really is a very 
noble specimen of her name — ^very conscientious and 
all that — ^but, notwithstanding, I think we shall get her 
to do pretty much what we like; and all and entirely by 
means of that little secret of hers, which she must never 
tell except, to your humble servant.” 

“ But why — why — ^why? ” 

“Oh, inquisitive one. Your desires^ are not to be 
gratified. But now to turn to other matters. I pro- 
pose ^hat we shall have a very great feast in the front 
attic, to which all mernbers of the Penwernian Society 
are to be invited, on five second Saturday in February. 
That is exactly one fortnight from now. We must 
have a real supper, and everything in first-rate style; 
and Florence Dixie and her two friends, Ethel and 
Emma Manners, are all to be invited.” 

“What nonsense! You know quite_well we can’t in- 
vite strangers to the front attic. It is bad enough to 
have these feasts at all, as it were, in the dark, and 
with Jessie knowing all the time.” 

“ Jessie will never tell. And don’t you know by this 


THE BOUDOIRS 


171 

time, Maud, that Miss Peacock — the dear, blessed, 
saintly Lavinia — winks at our little peccadillos? She 
could find out if she chose to, but she is too wise, bless 
her, the darling! Well, of course, neither Jessie no/ 
Miss Peacock is to know of this. I have spoken al- 
ready to Florence Dixie and to the two Manners girls, 
and they are wild to come. They want to join the so- 
ciety, but of course that can’t be entertained; I do 
draw the line at that. W e shall get them in by means of 
a ladder put up to the window. Won’t it be splendid? ’* 

“ It certainly will,” said Maud. “ How daring you 
are, Susan! Do you think Star and Lucy and Angela 
will join us?” 

Do I think ducks will swim?” was Susan’s re- 
mark. But now, my dear love, in order to have these 
girls we must have funds. What do you think of 
this?” 

As Susan spoke she thrust her hand into her pocket 
and drew out a whole beautiful golden sovereign. 

Why, Susan,” said Maud, in astonishment, “ how- 
ever did you get it?” 

“ From the dear, the precious young Christian. The 
price of her detention, you understand.” 

“Oh, you are not blackmailing the poor child? 
How wrong of you! How cruel!” 

“You use very ugly words, Maud; you forget your- 
self. Now, the fewer questions you ask the better. 
This sovereign will buy a grand supper, and we shall 
have a jolly time.” 

“ But if we are found out. You know how furious 
Miss Peacock would be at our introducing outsiders 
into the school.” 

“We won’t be found out; we shall be far too careful 
for that. But please understand, Maud, that what I 
have told you is in strictest confidence; you must not 


172 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


breathe it to another soul. Meanwhile you may be as 
nice as you like to Christian. Go and talk to her now, 
poor child! She is standing over there by herself, 
looking desolate and gazing out to sea.” 

“ I won’t go to her,” said Maud. “ Some of the 
things you do, Susan, make me wretched. I do wish 
you’d be straight and nice and honorable like Star. 
I’ am sure she has no end of fun in her, and is most 
daring, but she would never stoop to your sort of 
things.” 

“ Really, Maud, I don’t know what to make of you. 
If you go on like this I shall have to get some other 
girl to be my special friend; and then, dear little love, 
look out for squalls, for don’t you remember ” 

Susan bent and whispered into Maud’s tiny, shell- 
like ear. ' Maud colored. 

“ Go and look up your lessons,” continued Susan, 
pushing her away with a contemptuous motion ; “ your 
French ‘’was not specially creditable to-day. I will ap- 
proach Christian and have a chat with her.” 

Maud ran off at once. Susan looked after her. 
Susan’s overhanging brows gave a decided scowl to 
her face. 

She approached Christian Mitford softly, and when 
she came within a short distance, said in a mincing 
voice, and in the tone of a person drawling out a 
hymn : 

“ Come hither, little Christian, 

And hearken unto me; 

I’ll tell you what the daily life 
Of a Christian child should b.e.” 

Christian turned at once angrily. “ I don^t want to 
speak to you,” she said. 

“ But you must, love; you really must. We are 


THE BOUDOIRS 


173 


going to have such a lovely time in the attic on Sat- 
urday fortnight — the best we ever had — and you are 
to be present, and we are all to wear our white dresses. 
We will look like so many cherubs, won’t we? And 
there’s to be such a supper — got out of your sovereign, 
darling.” 

Susan, I can’t give you any more money. I only 
had two sovereigns when Miss Neil left me; she said 
they were to last until ” 

“How long, dearest? Until you ran away again?” 

“Oh, don’t!” said Christian. “How cruel you are! 
I have almost made up my mind ” 

“ What, Christian? To what have you made up your 
mind? ” 

“ That I won’t stand this. It would be much — much 
braver to me to tell. I’ll consult Star; she will know 
how to advise me.” 

Now, this was the very last thing that Susan wished. 
Although she was quite certain that she herself could 
so manage matters as to send Christian to Coventry if 
she did tell, she also knew that if Star discovered the 
truth, she (Susan) would be the person reduced to that 
uncomfortable position. 

“ It would be madness for you to tell Star,” she said, 
changing her tone to one of great sympathy. “ She’s a 
very upright, honorable sort of girl; she would be 
shocked — absolutely shocked.” 

“Are you sure? She always seems so kind; al- 
though of late somehow she has not taken much notice 
of me.” 

Susan laughed. “ Take my advice,” she said, “ and 
keep your own counsel. Tell no one except your own 
Susy, who, of course, won’t repeat anything. I have 
nearly done getting what money I want from you; 
and isn’t it better to be a little short of funds than to be 


174 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


hated by everybody? Come, now; let’s take a walk 
and have a cozy-pozy time together.” 

Susan’s ‘‘ cozy-pozy time ” was scarcely enjoyed by 
Christian, who was learning to dislike her companion 
more and more day by day. The young girl often 
wondered at the intense feeling of hatred that was 
growing up in her heart for this disagreeable and 
wicked girl. 

“ How little I knew when I ran away what it would 
all mean! ” thought the poor child. “ Oh, dear! if only 
father and mother were in England I might consult 
them. But there is no one — no one to go to for help.” 

Susan did not find her companion very agreeable, 
and after informing her of this fact in no flattering 
terms, ran off to seek more congenial friends. 

The girls always had an hour to themselves in the 
early part of the afternoon, when they might do ex- 
actly as they liked. They need not walk, they need 
not study; they might wander in the grounds, or they 
might sit by the comfortable schoolroom fires, or they 
might visit the boudoirs. 

Amongst the special attractions to be found at Pen- 
werne Manor were the boudoirs. These consisted of 
a number of small rooms, beautifully furnished, very 
brigh^^very cheerful, and specially devoted to the girls 
of the^school. Each class had a room to itself, but a 
girl belonging to one class could invite a friend to have 
tea with her in another boudoir or classroom, pro- 
vided the invitation was given for this special hour. 
At other times each class was expected to keep strictly 
to its own boudoir. 

Christian had long rejoiced in the fact that she was 
in the same class as Star Lestrange, and equally was 
she delighted to know that Susan, a much bigger and 
older girl, was two classes lower down in the school. 


THE BOUDOIRS 


175 

Susan would never have dreamt of bullying so clever a 
girl as Christian but for the rare chance of having dis- 
covered her secret. 

Feeling cold and chilly now, the young girl crossed 
the wide hall, went down the corridor where the bou- 
doirs were situated, and opened the door of the fourth 
class boudoir and entered. This room went by the 
name of the Hall of Good Nature. It was one of Miss 
Peacock^s curious fancies to call the boudoirs after 
virtues; Charity Hall, Hope Hall, Kindness Hall, were 
to be found in the little group. The name of each 
room was carved in white over the lintel of the door, 
and now as Christian entered she raised her eyes to 
look at the words. 

“ The Hall of Good Nature,” she said to herself. 

She uttered a deep sigh. She wondered if there was 
any real kindness left in the world. She felt trrribly 
lonely and depressed. But for Susan, and but for her 
own wrong-doing, how happy she would be here! For 
she could not help confessing to herself that the life 
was beautiful; all its days were planned out with such 
true common-sense and such broad ideas with regard 
to all that was necessary for the growth of young and 
sensitive girls, that happiness could not but be the 
result. There were strong interests, too, in the school, 
and Miss Lavinia herself was so delightful thalfeo ob- 
tain a kind word from her or a smile from her 
face was sufficient incentive for any amount of hard 
work. 

But Christian was not happy. She was doing well; 
her lessons were a mere nothing to her. But for the 
sake of Star she would have made violent efforts to 
get into the fifth class, but she liked Star and did not 
wish to leave her. Nevertheless, strange as it may seem. 
Star took very little notice of her of late; she rather 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


176 

avoided her than otherwise, and this seemed the last 
drop in Christian’s cup of bitterness. 

She was thinking now of all these things, puzzling 
over them, and wiping away a tear which would now 
and then start to her eyes, when the door was opened 
somewhat noisily, and Star Lestrange, accompanied 
by Angela Goring, dashed into the room. 

“Oh, bother!” she said aloud when she saw Chris- 
tian, and then she stopped short and was about to go 
away. 

But Christian rose quickly. 

“ Don’t go, please. Star,” she said. “ I was resting 
just for a minute or two; I am all right now. I will go 
and have a walk round the grounds before lesson- 
hour.” 

“But you mustn’t; it is so cold,” said Angela. 
“Why, what is the matter, Christian?” 

For Angela had caught sight of Christian’s face, 
and had noticed the large tear-drop on her cheek which 
rolled down and disappeared even as she spoke. 

“ I’m all right, really. Please don’t go away,” said 
Christian. “ Why shouldn’t you stay? ” 

Star suddenly changed her mind. 

“You belong to us, Chris, don’t you?” 

“ I thought so — I hoped so,” was Christian’s 
answer. 

There was a note of hope in her voice. 

“We have been rather puzzled about you, all the 
same,” said Star, sinking into a chair and spreading 
out her hands to the blaze. “ Angel, sit down by my 
side and warm yourself, pet. We have been rather 
amazed that you have taken up with Susan Marsh. 

Don’t you know Oh, of course, I mustn’t say a 

word; it wouldn’t be gentlemanly; and whatever hap- 
pens, I will be a gentleman. I’d hate to be a lady. A 


THE BOUDOIRS 


177 


gentlemanly girl is my ideal of the perfect girl, and I 
hope I am that, so I won’t speak against a schoolfellow. 
But, all the same, she’s not your sort — not really.” 

I know. Do you think I like her? ” 

^‘Actions speak louder than words, my dear. You 
are with her always, sniggering in corners, and look- 
ing so mysterious; her hand in yours, and her arm 
round your waist. Faugh! it makes me sick. Doesn’t 
it you, Angel?” 

“ Perhaps Christian can explain,” said Angela, who 
had a very kind face and read trouble in Christian’s 
eyes. 

Do explain, Chris; there’s a darling,” said Star. 
“ We want to be nice to you, both Angel and I, but 
we can’t cotton to your friend, and that’s a fact. Now 
tell us, why do you go with her? Why are you always 
following her about, or she following you about? You 
are so absolutely unlike the sort of girl who ought to 
be with her that it is more or less, the talk of the 
school. You’ll tell us, won’t you?” 

“ I’m afraid, I can’t. I wish I could.” 

“ Oh, then ” Star’s sweetness suddenly left her. 

She became her old, somewhat severe, satirical little 
self once more. 

She won’t be bold and tell us, the charming young 
thing! ” she sang out, letting her voice drop from 
the ceiling almost into Christian’s ears. 

“ Oh, Star, can’t you understand? I am unhappy. 
Oh! I daren’t say another word; only the fact of 
your not liking me makes me miserable. I was never 
away from home before. Do be kind to me. Star.” 

“ I will if you tell me the truth ; but I won’t if you 
keep up the mystery. So now you can choose. Give 
me your confidence and I’ll get you out of your wor- 
ries, whatever they are.” 


178 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


Just at that minute a head was poked round the cur- 
tain and the face of Susan Marsh appeared. 

“ Wherever have you hid yourself, Qiristian? You 
are wanted immediately. Maudie and I and Mary Hil- 
lary are all waiting for your Royal Highness.’’ 

“ Come in, Susan,” said Star suddenly. 

Susan advanced into the room. Notwithstanding all 
her would-be indifference, there was a slightly alarmed 
expression in her eyes. 

“ You have done something to this poor girl,” said 
Star- You have frightened her, and we want her to 
tell us. It is most unaccountable your being friends 
with the sort of girl Christian Mitford is.” 

“What?” said Susan; “is she too good for me?” 

“ She is different from you,” said Star boldly. “ She 
isn’t a bit your sort, and you know it. Why are you 
so chummy with her? Will you tell us the reason?” 

“ She had best tell you herself ; I give her leave,” 
said Susan. 

She stood and faced Christian with a daring, impish 
expression on her face. Her eyes beneath their thick 
brows seemed to dart as though they would pierce 
through the young girl’s soul; their expression was al- 
together too much for Christian. 

“ I can’t tell,” she said. “ I suppose it is all right. 
I’ll go with you, Susan, if you want me.” 

“ Yes, you had better,” said Star rudely, “ for we 
don’t dare for the Susan Marsh sort of girls here.” 


CHAPTER XVIII 


“l AM afraid ” < 

Jessie/^ said Miss Lavinia Peacock, turning to her 
little friend, “ I want you to sit here, to make yourself 
thoroughly comfortable, and allow me to question you 
freely.” 

“ But, please, dear Miss Peacock ” 

I gave you leave to call me Lavinia.’^ 

“ Please, dear Lavinia ” 

‘‘You would rather not be questioned?” 

“ I would much, much rather not. You understand 
that in my position. Oh, yes, you gave me permis- 
sion, as you expressed it, to be eyes behind your back, 
to do what I could to make comfort and happiness in 
the school, and yet to allow a certain amount of liberty. 
You gave me to understand — you really did, Lavinia 
— that I might shut my eyes when there was no real 
mischief ahead.” 

“ I certainly did do so,” replied Miss Lavinia gravely; 
“ and I have no intention of going back on my word. 
Amongst so many girls one must expect differences of 
disposition. There will always be the girl of varieties; 
there will always be the thoughtless, heedless, mis- 
chievous gjrl. Now, I have sympathy with th-e variety 
girl, and with the daring, the ambitious, the frolic- 
some, the mischievous girl; but I have no sympathy — 
none whatever — ^with the wicked girl. And if such a 
girl is in this school, and is exercising her malign in- 
fluence upon my pupils, out she goes. You must 


179 


i8o THE MANOR SCHOOL 

clearly understand that you allow no liberty when the 
wicked girl appears on the scene.’’ 

“ But I am certain — I am quite positive — ^that there is 
no such girl in the school,” said poor Miss Jessie, who, 
although she did not like Susan Marsh, could not be 
brought to think her anything but just a thoughtless, 
rather daring specimen of humanity; not exactly a 
nice girl, but as to being wicked! — oh no, poor little 
Miss Jessie could not even entertain the idea. 

“ I promise you,” she said after a pause, “ that if 
thre is anything wrong I will let you know. For the 
rest you must trust me.” 

‘'What about the front attic?” said Miss Peacock 
suddenly. 

“ You allowed me liberty with regard to that. Noth- 
ing goes on that I don’t know of. If there is anything 
distinctly disobedient, any act of open rebellion, I 
promise that you shall be told at once.” 

“ All right, Jessie,” said Miss Peacock with a sigh. 

She rose as she spoke, and going up to the glowing 
fire, put a pretty pointed foot on the brass fender and 
warmed it luxuriously. 

“ I cannot exactly tell you why,” she said at last 
slowly, “ but since that young girl, Christian Mitford, 
came to the school — it is nearly a month now since she 
arrived — I have not felt quite at my ease. There is 
something about the child that haunts me quite uncom- 
fortably. Are you sure she is happy? ” 

“ I am not,” said Miss Jessie. 

“ But why should she be unhappy?” 

“ I can’t exactly tell you, except ” Miss Jessie 

sat very still for a minute. “ I do hope one thing, and 
that is that you will strongly dissuade Christian from 
telling the school at large about her adventure before 
she came here.” 


I AM AFRAID 


Miss Peacock was silent. 

“ I am absolutely sure,” continued Miss Jessie, ‘‘ that 
you would be doing the child irretrievable mischief and 
injury by allowing the story to get abroad in the school. 
Schoolgirls are only schoolgirls; they x:annot read mo- 
tives, and they cannot judge of the depth of repentance. 
To these carefully nurtured, carefully brought-up chil- 
dren the story of Christian's running away and of los- 
ing herself, if only for a few hours, in the slums of Lon- 
don would seem altogether horrible. Her repentance 
would quite fade from their view in comparison with the 
enormity of her sin. The fact is this, dear Miss Pea- 
cock, and I know I am right ” — here Miss Jessie’s eyes 
filled with tears — the good girls of the school would 
turn away from Christian, and the naughty and trouble- 
some ones would render her life a burden to her. She 
would never hear the last of her sin. You oughtn’t to 
do it. I am sure — I am certain I am right.” 

“ You go a little too far. Miss Jones,” said Miss Pea- 
cock. Over her face there swept a wave of resolution, 
mixed with pain. 

Jessie looked as though someone had struck her. To 
be called Miss Jones,” and by that beloved voice! 

“ You make a mistake in counseling me. I yield to 
you in a great deal, but in matters of conduct I am 
paramount. It is my intention to counsel Christian 
Mitford to telly and for that reason I am going to see her 
to-night.” 

“ Oh, it will be cruel! 1 cannot help saying it,” con- 
tinued Miss Jessie, and she burst into tears. 

Miss Peacock laid her hand on the other’s shoul- 
der. 

“ Dear,” she said, I don’t wish to be unkind, but is 
this your school or mine?” 

“ Oh, yours, of course. Oh, I mustn’t say a word, but 


i 82 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


I think every teacher in the place would agree with 
me. 

“ Have you talked this matter over with the 
teachers? ” 

“ No, indeed; not a soul knows at present except my- 
self. Poor Christian! she often looks so pale and dis- 
tressed. She is practically an orphan; her parents are 
so far off.’’ 

“ I will deal with her, Jessie; but when a girl has com- 
mon sense and also a brave and noble thought, I will 
not have it crushed because of any possible tyranny on 
the part of the schoolgirls. Send Christian to me now, 
and believe that I will act for the best.” 

Miss Jessie went out of the room. She walked very 
slowly; she felt thoroughly unhappy. She certainly did 
not agree with Miss Peacock. Christian’s manner, the 
expression on her f?xe, her want of appetite, and her 
lack of interest in her daily life had been remarked on 
with great fear and distress by Miss Jessie. She could 
not guess at the truth, however, for she little suspected 
that Susan Marsh knew poor Christian’s story. 

Christian was sitting by herself in the boudoir belong- 
ing to the fourth class. She was sitting by a table, a 
book open before her. Whether she was reading it or 
not Miss Jessie could not guess. But when she said, 
‘‘ Christian, you are wanted,” the young girl jumped up, 
and then Miss Jessie saw, with a start, that the story- 
book was upside down. 

Christian must indeed be in trouble. 

“ Oh, my darling! ” said Miss Jessie. 

Before the girl could prevent her, she ran up to 
Christian, flung her arms round her neck, and kissed 
her impulsively several times. 

“ Christian, I am with you in everything. Be brave, 
dear; keep up your courage.” 


I AM AFRAID 


What does this mean? ” said Christian. “ Has any- 
thing happened? Oh, Miss Jessie, you are good to 
me. 

“ I try to be, darling, for I love you. The fact is — 
don’t be frightened, but Miss Peacock wants you. 
You are to go to her at once. I hope and trust this 
may I mustn’t — I daren’t say any more.” 

“ I am very glad that I can see Miss Peacock,” said 
Christian. 

Her tone was bright. She did not wait to say an- 
other word to Miss Jessie, but left the room. 

Christian’s tap at Miss Peacock’s door was answered 
immediately by that good lady. 

“Come in,” she said; and when she saw the young 
girl, and noticed her pale face, she said in a particularly 
kind tone: 

“ Come here, Christian dear. You and I must have 
a cozy chat. I like to know all I possibly can of my 
pupils. Sit in that easy-chair. Is it too near the fire? 
Well, here is a screen. Now I will take this chair, and 
we shall enjoy ourselves.” 

Christian smiled. “ Your room reminds me of 
mother’s boudoir at home.” 

“ Ah ! I should like to know about your mother. 
You love her very, very much?” 

“ I feel being parted from her,” said Christian some- 
what evasively. 

“And your father? What sort of man is he?” 

“I think he is very noble,” answered Christian; and 
now her eyes brightened and the color came into her 
cheeks. 

I rather guessed he must be, Christian. I felt cer- 
tain that your people must be of the very best. Your 
father ought to have the highest morals, for he has in- 
herited them. You have a wonderful likeness to your 


184 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


grandmother. Whenever I see you I seem to be back 
in the old days when I loved her so truly.” 

Christian gave a restless sigh. 

“ I shall never be like my grandmother,” she said after 
a pause. 

“ But why so, dear? Why shouldn’t you be just as 
great and noble? Believe me, Christian,” continued 
Miss Peacock, “ these days are the grandest days women 
ever lived in. The woman of to-day can be anything; 
she can dare anything. She has splendid opportunities; 
all doors to the highest and best work are flung open 
to her. Riches need not retard her, nor poverty. Tlie 
girl of the present day ought to be educated right nobly 
in order to meet that grand future.” 

I do not care for the girls of the present day,” said 
Christian. 

“ But do you know many of them? ” 

“ I know some of the girls here.” 

Miss Peacock looked very attentively at her young 
pupil; then she stretched out her hand and rang the 
bell. A servant appeared. 

“ Bring tea, Agnes — tea for two — and those special 
cakes that I like.” 

The maid withdrew, and returned in a few minutes 
to lay on the little table a lovely silver tea-equipage 
and the most charming, dainty china Christian had 
ever seen. By and by the tea itself appeared. Miss 
Peacock poured out a cup for her pupil and another for 
herself. Christian ate the cakes and drank the hot, 
fragrant tea, and, it must be owned, felt comforted. 

“ You like coming to tea with me, do you not dear?” 

‘‘ Oh, very, very much ! ” 

“ I think you and I could be good friends, Christian.” 

If I knew I was worthy we could be good friends 
— at least I could love you,” said Christian. 


AM AFRAID’^ 185 

Her eyes brightened perceptibly and the color deep- 
ened in her cheeks. 

“ Well, now, my dear,” said Miss Peacock, I want 
you and I to be friends. There are some girls here 
who seem to be specially in touch with me. There are 
others, again, most excellent girls — splendid, brave, de- 
voted to their work and their duties — with whom I 
have nothing in common. That is always the way in 
life: certain characters appeal to us; others, again, 
fail to do so. You and I are beyond doubt in 
touch.” 

“Oh, thank you!” said Christian in a fervent voice. 

“ I take an immense interest in your career, Chris- 
tian. You seem to me, after a fashion, to be left to me 
as a sort of legacy. I should like you to confide in me; 
I see plainly that you are unhappy.” 

Christian bent her head. 

“ Will you tell me all about it? ” 

The bent head was slightly shaken. 

“You cannot?” 

“ I cannot.” 

** Noblesse oblige forbids?” 

“Yes, yes; perhaps so. Anyhow, I cannot tell you. 
Don’t notice me, please. Miss Peacock. Let me be 
happy during my short time with you.” 

“ I want you to be happy, and in the best possible 
way, by removing the cause of your trouble; for I can 
see, and so can Jessie — and so, I fancy, can many of 
your companions — that you are not happy, Christian. 
I am about to write to your father, and I should like 
to be able to tell him with truth that his dear daughter 
feels at home with me, and is preparing for that noble 
womanhood which he has set his heart on her posses- 
sing.” 

The expression of Christian’s face changed; the soft- 


i86 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


ness went out of it. She kept staring straight before 
her. 

We agreed, did we not, Christian,” said Miss Pea- 
cock, *‘not to say anything with regard to the special 
trouble which took place before you came to Penweme 
Manor?” 

‘‘Oh,yesl” 

“ Before you came, I must own that I was as much 
distressed at the thought of the other girls knowing 
as at the grave misdemeanor itself. I resolved not to 
tell the girls. To my astonishment, you, Christian, 
begged of me to allow you to tell all the school exactly 
what had happened. Neither Jessie nor I approved of 
the plan, knowing, as we do, what schoolgirls are — ^how 
they love to tease, to torment and worry, sometimes 
even to bully. I can scarcely think that any girl in my 
school would willfully bully another, but of course I am 
not sure.” 

Miss Peacock looked hard at Christian as she spoke; 
but Christian’s face, now absolutely pale, revealed noth- 
ing. 

** The final arrangement was that you were to tell, if 
you still wished it, at the end of a month. The month 
has expired; you are now at liberty to stand with me 
before the entire school and tell your story. And when 
your story is finished, I am at liberty to tell the school 
why I counseled you to keep it a secret, and how much 
I admire your bravery in revealing it. Thus I stand 
between you and the school as a shield. I put the 
school on its honor not to worry you, not to reproach 
you, not to bring up the past. That is the present posi- 
tion. Are you still of the same mind, Christian? Do 
you wish to take the bull by the horns — ^to once and for 
all explain to the school what you have done? Would 
Hot this, after all, be the best way out of your troubles? 


I AM AFRAID 


To each noble heart in the school your conduct must 
appeal, and each girl worth anything must love you all 
the better for your courage/' 

When Miss Peacock had finished speaking, Christian 
rose and stood before her mistress, and said in a low 
voice : 

“ And you now counsel me to tell? ” 

Miss Peacock looked at her thoughtfully. 

“ I do,” she said. “ Yes, on the whole, I .mphatically 
do.” 

Christian did not speak at all for a minute; then she 
said : 

“When do you wish me to tell?” 

“ Ah, my dear, you do not take a right tone,” said 
her governess. “ This is not a question of when; it is 
a question of your own desire. Is it your own desire? ” 

“ I will be — guided by you.” 

“But is it your desire?” 

“ It is not my desire any longer.” 

“Then, Christian, something has happened.” 

Christian was silent. 

“You would rather keep this thing to yourself?” 

“ Yes.” 

“ But why this change in your views?” 

“ I was brave — yes, I think I was ; now I am afraid.” 

“Afraid! You have not the face of a coward.” 

“ I am afraid,” continued Christian. 

“ You would rather the thing was unknown, buried, 
forgotten? ” 

“ You told the school that I was unavoidably de- 
tained: let them continue to believe this.” 

“ But you are not happy.” 

“Cowards are never happy. May I say good-night 
now. Miss Peacock?” 

Miss Peacock drew the young girl towards her. 


i88 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ What am I to do with you, Christian? You make 
me unhappy by your present attitude. Is it possible 
that you will not confide in me? What can I do to 
make you give me your confidence?” 

“ I can never give you my confidence. The only 
thing you can do — the only really kind thing — is to let 
me alone. I am not a good girl any longer, and I am a 
coward; and I will not tell, for it isn’t in me to do any- 
thing brave or noble.” 

“ Then you are very unlike your grandmother.” 

I am sorry for poor — father. Miss Peacock, I 
daren’t stay another minute.” 

Christian struggled to get away, but Miss Peacock 
drew her still closer. 

“ Some day,” she said, “ you may feel like telling me. 
When that day comes I will give you my careful atten- 
tion — my undivided attention — and my most lenient 
judgment. Do you understand? ” 

‘‘Yes; you are good.” 

“ If your trouble becomes unbearable you will know, 
therefore, whom to appeal to.” 

“ Oh, you are very good! ” 

“ I see you will say no more now. Well, good-night, 
dear; I can at least pray for you.” 

Christian left the room. 


CHAPTER XIX 


Dawson’s bill 

Star was pacing up and down in one of the corridors 
when Christian went past. Star called out when she 
saw her: 

Christian, are you using your Greek history to- 
night?” 

No.” 

‘‘ Will you lend it to me? I can’t find my own copy.” 

“ Oh, yes, with pleasure. Star. Shall I fetch it for 
you?” 

“No; just tell me where it is and I’ll get it.” 

“ In the bookcase in front of my desk. 1 put it there 
this afternoon. It is on the third shelf.” 

“ Thanks awfully,” said Star. “ What are you doing 
with yourself?” 

“I am going to Susan; she asked me to have cocoa 
with her to-night.” 

It was one of the privileges of Penwerne Manor that 
the girls who slept in the White Corridor could enter- 
tain their friends no\v and then to cocoa. This was 
really anticipating their Girton or Newnham days; but 
for girls who were in their teens Miss Peacock was of 
the opinion that such privileges were good instead of 
harmful. 

Christian ran on, therefore, in the direction of Susan’s 
room. Star turned to Angela Goring, who happened 
to be walking with her when they met Christian. 

“ How queer she looked ! ” said Star. 


190 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Do you know,” replied Angela, “ I am quite certain 
that something extraordinary is going to happen at the 
next meeting of the Penwernians. I can’t quite make 
out what it is. I suspected it for some time, but when 
I found Susan slipping in at the back-door with a great 
brown-paper parcel in her hand I thought it was time 
to interfere. 

“ ‘ Have you been shopping? ’ I said. ‘ You know 
we are not allowed to shop by ourselves.’ 

“ ‘ Old Betty, the cake-woman, gave me this,’ said 
Susan. 

“ I dare say she did. It was a very big parcel. Of 
course it found its way to the front attic. 'I often 
wonder if we do ourselves any good by belong- 
ing to the Penwernians.” 

“ Yes, we do. Don’t be so goody-^oody, Angela,” 
cried Star. I wouldn’t do anything dishonorable, or what 
our darling Miss Peacock didn’t approve of, for the 
whole world ; but there’s no harm in having a bit of a lark 
once a fortnight or so. Of course, I wouldn’t regularly 
break the rules; but where Miss Jessie doesn’t interfere, 
I must confess I feel my own conscience quite light. 
Now come along; I want to work up a little piece of 
Greek history. I don’t half know the particulars of that 
famous trial of Socrates, and Professor French does so 
pounce on you when you happen to make a mis- 
take.” 

The g’^'ls entered the classroom where the fourth 
class had their lessons. Star approached Christian’s 
bookshelf, took down Grote’s History of Greece, and 
getting into a comfortable corner, opened it lazily. 
Angela approached her own desk, turned on the electric 
light and prepared to get her French exercise into as 
perfect order as she could. 

Presently a cry from Star smote on her ears. 


DAWSON’S BILL 


191 

“Why, do look!” she said. 

“What?” asked Angela. 

“ Oh! come here, Angela; this is too funny. See what 
I found in Christian's book.” 

As Star spoke she held up a sheet of paper. *On it 
was written a whole list of eatables, which Star pro- 
ceeded to read aloud: 

“ Twelve plum-tarts, twelve apricot-tarts, twelve 
cheese-cakes, two dozen sponge-cakes, four dozen 
sponge-fingers, one plum-cake, twenty-four bottles of 
ginger-beer, two pounds of mixed sweets.” 

These different items, jotted down one below the 
other, had their prices put against them, and the grand 
total amounted to nine and sixpence. There was a 
scrawled “ Paid ” put below the little account, and Star, 
peering down at it with her bright eyes, saw the stamp 
belonging to a well-known grocer in the town. 

“ How strange,” she said. Christian buying a 
whole lot of things for herself at Dawson’s? Certainly 
neither Miss Peacock nor Jessie knows anything of 
this. What can it mean?” 

“ Oh, I know very well what it means,” said Angela. 
“ You rather crushed me just now when I spoke, but 
I am certain there are going to be high-jinks at the 
next meeting of the Penwernians. I am also sure 
there will be an open act of disobedience. This seems 
to confirm it.” 

“ But think of Christian being mixed up wjth it,” said 
Star. “ Why, it’s scandalous. Christian, of all people, 
buying a lot of food and smuggling it in. We always 
have been allowed to get a few sweets or chocolates 
when we pleased, but it was also an understood matter 
that we were never to have regular feasts in the house. 
And one of our best-understood rules is this: we are not 
to buy things from the tradespeople. Nine-and-six- 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


192 

pence worth. Dear me! Christian must be running 
through her money very fast.” 

She had two pounds when she first came,” said 
Angela. “I know it, for she mentioned it; but when 
I asked her on Saturday last if she would lend me six- 
pence until my pocket-money was paid, she got that 
dreadful bright crimson all over her face, and then said, 
I am ever so sorry, but I haven’t got it.’ ” 

“What nonsense!” said Star. “It strikes me it is 
our duty is to look into this. Of course, Susan is at the 
bottom of it. But what a weak girl Christian must be! 
I am terribly disappointed in her.” 

“What are you going to do with that account?” 
asked Angela. 

“ Put it into my pocket and confront her with it,” said 
Star. “ She won’t escape me. I shall know the truth 
before I am twenty-four hours older.” 

Angela said nothing further. She went back to her 
interrupted work; and Star, folding the little account 
into small compass, slipped it into her purse, and then 
resumed her study of the trial of Socrates. 

The girls said nothing more with regard to this dis- 
covery; but the next day, as they were busy over their 
customary studies. Star from time to time watched 
Christian. Whatever Chrisian’s faults might be, she 
was certainly a splendid student. She always mastered 
her lessons in that intelligent way which so delights all 
teachers. Her object was progress — progress at any 
cost. When such is the case a girl becomes delightful 
to teach, and those who have charge of her education 
give her every advantage. 

Christian was already, in the opinion of some of the 
girls, made too much of by her teachers and by the 
professors. 

She worked hard now, and when the time came for 


DAWSON’S BILL 


*93 


the history and literature lessons sKe acquitted herself 
with her customary brilliance. The literature lesson 
that day was particularly interesting. It related to 
the trial of Socrates. It was the custom of the profes- 
sor to get one girl to give a description of the 
lesson. To-day it was Christan’s turn. Wildly en- 
thusiastic over the greatness of the theme, she 
acquitted herself so magnificently that she even won the 
unwilling praise of Star herself. Star could never feel 
enthusiastic about those who were dead and gone; but 
Christian, as she spoke, was living back again in the 
ancient times. She was with the marvelous old philos- 
opher in the market-place at Athens: she was one of 
those Athenian youths who crowded around him to listen 
to his teaching. It seemed to her that she saw the great 
Socrates as she spoke. There he was, harsh, ugly, for- 
bidding, as far as exterior went; but, oh! the magical 
power of his voice, the thrilling sympathy in his words, 
the tenderness with which he addressed those who 
listened to him. It seemed to Christian Mitford that 
morning that she lived in that far-gone time. Her voice 
broke as she related the end of the famous trial — ^the 
reply of Socrates when he was asked what change he 
would wish in the sentence of death — the scorn of his 
words, the indignation of his judges. Finally she told 
of the moment when he drank the cup of hemlock and 
sank away into the arms of death, one of the greatest 
men that ever lived. 

Thank you,” said Professor French. His eyes 
were shining as he listened to Christian’s words. 

Now she returned to her seat. Fler eyes shone. Star, 
as she watched her, could not but admire; but she also 
pitied. 

Christian was just about to put her Greek history-book 
in its place on the shelf when something arrested her 


194 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


attention. She opened the book quickly, turned page 
after page, and finally shook it, as though by that means 
she might find what she sought. Star drew close to 
her. 

“ Have you lost anything? ’’ she asked. 

“ Yes, but it doesn’t matter.” 

Professor Munro, young ladies,” called the voice of 
an English teacher, and another professor entered the 
room. 

A new lesson proceeded, and again Christian scored. 

Between eleven and twelve came the welcome hour of 
recess, and it was then that Star went up to her class- 
mate. 

‘‘ Aren’t you very proud of yourself? ” she asked. 

‘‘I?” answered Christian. “Certainly not.” 

“ Then you ought to be. I never cared for poor old 
Socrates before. I thought it so tiresome that a man 
who lived so far back should still be able to worry the 
girls of the twentieth century. I didn’t think it at all 
necessary to learn about him.” 

Christian made no reply. 

“ But you have made him live. Oh, how you spoke, 
and how your eyes shone!” 

“ I was interested,” said Christian briefly. 

Her tone annoyed Star, who began to speak less 
kindly. 

“ I wonder,” she said, “ if what you couldn’t find when 
the Greek history lesson was over has got, in some 
strange manner, into my possession. You looked for 
something? ” 

“Yes; I put a mark in the place, and the mark was 
gone.” 

“ A piece of paper? ” 

“Yes.” 

“ Had it any writing on it? ” 


DAWSON’S BILL 


195 


"Some items. Do you think it could be found?” 

Star took out her purse, opened it, and held up the 
paper a few feet from Christian. 

"Twelve plum-tarts,” she began, "twelve apricot- 
tarts, twelve cheese-cakes ” 

" Oh, don’t go on ! That paper is rnine,” said Chris- 
tian. She turned very red. " Give it to me,” she con- 
tinued; " I want it.” 

"Of course you want it,” replied Star; "but if you 
have no objection, I think I will just keep it.” 

"But why should you. Star? It’s mine; please, give 
it to me.” Christian’s voice became full of dis- 
tress. 

" I am ever so sorry, dear, but really I don’t think I can, 
I want it. I won’t show it to anyone, of course, but I 
want to keep it, just as a little piece of evidence. Chris- 
tian, do you know what you are doing? ” 

" I know quite well.” 

" Don’t you realize that you are disobeying one of the 
most severe rules of the school?” 

" Yes, I know.’^ 

" Did you buy those things at Dawson’s?” 

" You have no right to question me.” 

"But did you?” 

" Yes.” 

"Out of your own money?” 

" Certainly.” 

" You knew you were disobeying? ” 

" I did.” 

"What does this mean, Christian?” 

" I can’t tell you. Think of me as you please. If 
you show what you found when I kindly lent you my 
history book, you will be the meanest girl on earth.” 

" I am certainly not that ; but you had better beware, 
for if you suppose that Susan’s ways, and Mary Hillary’s 


196 THE MANOR SCHOOL 

ways, and Maud Thompson’s ways, and — oh, that I 
should have to say it ! — your ways are going to be toler- 
ated by the better class of girls in this school, you are 
mistaken. It is within your power to give a very serious 
warning to Susan; for we girls who like our fun, and yet 
are not really disobeying the mistresses, are in the pre- 
ponderance, whatever you may think.” 


CHAPTER XX 


NOBLESSE OBLIGE 

The elder girls of the school retired to their rooms at 
half-past nine. They were all expected to be in bed by 
ten, when Jessie went round, just opening the door of 
each room, peeping in, saying, “ Good-night, dear,” and 
shutting it again. 

On the night that Star had shown Christian Dawson’s 
bill, Christian went to her room as usual. The luxuries 
of the first days of her residence at Penwerne Manor 
were quite at an end. The girl stood for a minute by a 
window that was partly open. From there she caught 
a glimpse of the rolling waves of the great Atlantic as 
they burst in magnificent spray upon the shore. She 
saw the outlines of the great rocks, and farther out the 
solitary spark of the bell-light at sea attracted her atten- 
tion. The moon was coming up in the heavens; the sky 
was cloudless. Christian was very susceptible to the 
power of Nature. Nature had ever a keen and telling 
voice for her. Now no smile passed over her face, no 
look of pleasure. She dropped the curtain and turned 
aside. 

I am glad the sky is clear; it makes it a little less 
terrible,” she said to herself; and then, without undress- 
ing, she lay down between the sheets and covered herself 
well up. 

By and by Jessie’s feet coming along the corridor 
were distinctly heard. She opened door after door, 
and her cheerful “ Good-night, dear,” or Sleep well, 
my love,” sounded like the note of a watchman, Chris- 


X97 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


198 

tian’s door was open wide; Jessie advanced a foot or 
two into the room. 

“Are you in bed, Christian?’’ 

“ Yes.” 

“ Are you comfortable, darling? ” 

“ Yes, thank you, Jessie.” 

“Then good-night, dear; sleep well.” 

“Thank you, Jessie; good-night.” 

The door was shut, and Miss Jessie trotted down- 
stairs. She called the girls of the White Corridor her 
own special babies, and of them all she loved Christian 
the best. She could not tell exactly why, but the young 
girl had found a place in her heart from the very first. 

Christian lay quiet for the best part of half an hour; 
then she rose very softly, and taking up a somewhat 
heavy basket which she had placed under the bed, crept 
step by step towards the door. She had man- 
aged in the daytime to oil the lock, and it 
now opened without the least sound. When she 
got into the corridor the moonlight filled the 
place with a white radiance; and standing there, as 
though waiting for her, were Susan Marsh, Maud 
Thompson, and Janet Bouverie. Susan gave her a nod 
of approval, and going on in front, approached the stairs 
which led to the front attic. They all went up in single 
file, sometimes, notwithstanding every effort, stepping 
on a creaking board. They reached the door of the 
attic. Susan took a key out of her pocket, unlocked it, 
and they entered. 

Susan then made certain preparations. She lit three 
or four candles, not by any means making the illumina- 
tion which had taken place on the night of Christian’s 
initiation. She drew forward a chair for herself, and an* 
old wooden box turned upside down and one or two 
stools for her companions. 


NOBLESSE OBLIGE 


199 

“ Now, Christian,'' she said briskly, the contents of 
the basket, please." 

Christian held out the basket without a word. 

‘‘ Oh, my dear child," said Susan, “ how glum you 
are ! — not at all the cheerful sort of companion we want. 
You have invited us here to a feast " 

“ No, I haven't," said Christian, finding her voice. 

‘‘You haven't! What an absolutely extraordinary 
girl, when you bought all those nice things in the basket 
with your own money! Here we are, prepared to be 
ever so sweet to you, and ever so grateful, and to demol- 
ish at least part of them. Maud, what do you say to a 
girl who brings up a basketful of tuck and then says she 
hasn't brought it up? It's a contradiction in terms, isn't 
it, Maud?" 

“ Very much so; but why should we quarrel with mere 
words? " said Maud. “ The thing is that Christian has 
arrived on the scene with a very delicious feast, and we 
are all dying to set our teeth in some of those cakes. 
Oh, don't they smell good! " 

“ You can open the basket," said Christian, “ and eat 
as many as ever you like, Maud; and so can you, Susan; 
and so can you, Janet." 

“ Come," said Susan, “ do get out of your sulks, 
Christian. Well, if you won't, we shall enjoy our feast, 
however unwillingly it is given to us. Now then, for 
goodness' sake, new Penwernian, arrange the goodies 
on this table and let us fall to." 

Christian immediately went on her knees and took 
the paper packets from the basket. Opening these, 
she displayed some cheese-cakes, tarts, and other good 
things. A number of ginger-beer bottles were next 
brought forward, and Susan, who complained of a furious 
thirst, suggested that they should regale themselves with 
one apiece. A small tin can was therefore filled, and 


200 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


the girls drank in turns. They declared that they were 
famished, and thought Christian's feast nectar and am- 
brosia. 

'‘Isn't it wonderful how nice it is to be naughty?" 
said Susan. "Don't you think so?" 

" Scrumptious! " cried Maud. 

" For instance," continued Susan, " don't we all go 
nearly mad with delight over this stolen supper, and yet 
our bread and cheese and cocoa were scarcely touched 
an hour and a half ago downstairs? " 

" I wasn't hungry then," said Christian, " and I'm 
not hungry now." 

" Oh, you are a kill-joy! " exclaimed Susan. “ I only 
wish it had fallen to the lot of some other girl to be 
blessed with a little money, and we would have sent you 
to Coventry long ago." 

" If you'd only let me alone you might have all my 
money," said Christian suddenly. 

"Hush, hush!" exclaimed Maud. "You do talk 
nonsense, Christian. And, Susan, I must say you worry 
the poor child a good bit. Now then, let us put away 
the rest of the delicious food. We shall have enough 
here for to-morrow night, and many nights after. 
That’s a good thing, for we shall have to come up to 
the attic pretty often to arrange about our great feast." 

" Which takes place exactly this day week,” said 
Susan. " Well, Christian, we are very much obliged to 
you, and you have a vote of thanks from the entire party. 
We shall expect a little further money just before the 
great feast, but we are collecting for it, and our funds 
are pretty considerable. When I think of it,” continued 
Susan, " I feel so excited that I can scarcely sit quiet.” 

" There is something I want to say,” exclaimed Chris- 
tian at this juncture. " You know the things you made 
me buy——" 


NOBLESSE OBLIGE 


201 


“Made you buy!’^ cried Susan. 

“ That you made me buy — that you insisted on my buy- 
ing,” continued Christian firmly. “ Well, I went to Daw- 
son's in the High Street and got the things, and brought 
them home myself in a big basket. I won't say any- 
thing about what I felt when I slipped out in the dark. 
I paid for them, of course, and Dawson gave me the 
bill. I didn't think very much about it, and when I was 
studying my Greek history yesterday I slipped it into 
the book as a mark.” 

“You did what?” cried Susan. 

“ I put the bill into the book without thinking. 
Well, last night Star asked -for the loan of my His- 
tory of Greece. I told her she could take it, and she 
found the bill, and she showed it to me to-day. She 
said, too, that we had better not do what we intended 
to do, for if we did she would tell. She said that I had 
done a most dishonorable thing when I bought those 
things in a shop in the town. She is very angry, and she 
thinks that you had better know that she is angry. That 
is really why I am here to-night; otherwise you might 
have got your basket up the attic stairs without any 
help from me.” 

Christian dropped down on an upturned box as she 
uttered the last words. She folded her hands in her lap 
and gazed straight before her. The other three girls 
were silent for nearly a minute; then Janet Bouverie took 
one of Christian's hands and said: 

“ What a miserable-looking little thing you are! ** 

“ I am very unhappy,” said Christian. 

“ Oh, don't listen to her now,” said Susan. “ Really 
her folly passes belief. The idea of putting that tell-tale 
bill into a common school-book! I never heard of any- 
thing so idiotic in the whole course of my life. Where 
is it now, Christian? Give it to me this minute.” 


202 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


I haven’t got it,” said Christian. “ Star wouldn’t 
give it to me.” 

“You mean to tell me that Star has it — Star 
Lestrange? ” 

“Yes, I do.” 

“And she means to keep it, darling,” suddenly cried 
a high, clear, voice, which as usual seemed to fall from 
the skies. 

The next instant the gay, bright face of Star herself 
shone on the assembled and frightened girls. 

“ I have come to stay during the remainder of this 
meeting,” said Star in a particularly bright and confident 
voice. “I am on the committee; you remember that 
fact, don’t you, Susan? Will no one offer me a 
chair? ” 

Christian sprang forward and brought another box 
forward. 

“ How convenient ! ” said Star. 

She dropped on it, crossed her pretty feet, folded 
her arms, and looked around her. 

“ Would you like a cheese-cake, dear? ” said Susan, 
speaking in her usually insolent and bold voice. 

She had got over her momentary terror at the sight 
of Star, and was now rather glad than otherwise at her 
appearing on the scene. 

Now, Star was hungry, and she had naturally a pas- 
sion for such things as cheese-cakes, queen-cakes, and 
sweetmeats generally, but she replied in a cold and yet 
apparently amiable voice: 

“ Not at present, thank you, Susan, dear. We had 
better finish our business, had we not? It must be a 
somewhat important affair to cause you all to meet here 
between ten and eleven o’clock on a night which is not 
a general meeting night of the Penwernians.” 

“We had a good deal to decide,” said Susan. “ We 


NOBLESSE OBLIGE 


203 


have to prepare for bur next big party; it takes place 
next week. Have you forgotten, Star?” 

‘‘ Oh, no,” replied Star; “ on the contrary, I remember 
very accurately. When one can only indulge in a good 
feed of the most unwholesome things in Christendom 
once a month, is one likely to forget? Nevertheless, 
Susan, it is strange of you not to have told me; I am a 
member of the committee.” 

“ I am very sorry,” replied Susan. “ But really. Star, 
you are so changeable: at one time the most delightful, 
pleasant, satisfactory creature on earth, and at other 
times quite the reverse. We only too eagerly wanted 
you, dear; of course we did.” 

Susan held out a fat ungainly hand and tried to 
take the soft little white palm of Star between her own; 
but Star resolutely put her hands behind her back. 

“ I am only here on sufferance,” she said; “ therefore, 
I presume I can approve or disapprove. Continue 
your meeting, ladies; don’t, pray, think anything about 
me. I have forced myself on your society.” 

‘‘And we are very glad to have you,” said Maud. 
“ Aren’t we, Christian? ” 

But Christian said nothing. Star looked at her, and 
her very bright eyes suddenly softened. 

“ Come here, Christian,” she said, “ and stand next 
to me. Perhaps, after all, though I scarcely thought so 
this afternoon, you and I are nearer akin than I had any 
idea of.” 

“ By the way,” said Susan, “ I don’t quite understand 
you. Star. You are on the committee; you are a Pen- 
wernian, and you must clearly understand that if three 
of the committee assemble at any time, it is what is 
called a quorum, and we are permitted to act for the 
good of the rest. We are here now arranging for our 
next delightful reunion in this attic. We propose that 


204 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


there should be an extra scene of magnificence on that 
occasion. For instance, we shall wear our fancy 
dresses.’’ 

Star’s eyes now became brighter than ever, and her 
little feet ceased to cross themselves, but were put down 
firmly on the old deal floor of the attic. 

“We shall wear our fancy dresses and disport our- 
selves in the most delightful fashion in the world,” said 
Susan. “ Christian’s dress is not yet made, but that 
can be arranged. Now, however, to the case in point. 
You know that although our kind teacher. Miss Pea- 
cock, does not say she approves of our meetings, yet she 
practically gives her consent to our having them; other- 
wise she surely would not allow Jessie to blink at the fact 
and let us all assemble here without taking any notice. 
But there is always the danger of being too confident, and 
it certainly was a very mad thing of Christian Mitford 
to do to leave a bill from a shop in town in her history- 
book. We should get into terrible trouble if that were 
discovered. I hear. Star, that you possess the bill. 
Perhaps you have it now on your person. If so, will 
you kindly tear it up in our presence? ” 

“ Yes, I have it on my person,” said Star. She sprang 
to her feet as she spoke. “ And, girls,” she continued, 
“ I do not mean to tear it up ; I mean to keep it. What 
I shall do with it eventually I am not prepared to dis- 
close to-night; but I shall keep it, Susan and Maud and 
Janet, as a reminder to you that I have you in my power, 
and that if you do anything again really to break the ac- 
knowledged rules of the school, I shall disclose the story 
of this bill to Miss Peacock. I don’t want to make serious 
mischief, but noblesse oblige does form part of my internal 
arrangements. I may do a wild thing and a silly thing, 
but I will not do a mean thing. You know the fixed 
rules of the school with regard to buying things in the 


NOBLESSE OBLIGE 


205 


shops. Why did you send Christian to Dawson’s? 
Why did you force her to spend her money? You did 
it, Susan; I want to know the reason.” 

“ And I,” said Susan, “ will not tell you.” 

“ All right. I give you twenty-four hours from now. 
If you do not tell me all about the hold you have on 
Christian Mitford within twenty-four hours, I shall go 
to Miss Peacock and show her this bill.” 

“ And get Christian and the rest of us into the most 
dreadful trouble,” said Maud. “ You can’t possibly 
mean it, Star.” 

“ Yes, but I do mean it; and I think you all know me. 
When I have made up my mind, it is made up.” 

‘‘You will be a tell-tale and a turn-coat. You will 
be hated in the school,” said Susan. 

“ Perhaps so,” replied Star; “ but I shall do it all the 
same. Christian, come downstairs and go to bed this 
minute. Oh! I am tired of underhand ways. I believe 
I shall cease to be a Penwernian. As to the rest of you, 
you can please yourselves, but Christian comes down 
with me. And, Susan, remember — I mean everything that 
I say. At seven o’clock to-morrow evening I shall be 
in the bowling-alley. You can come and walk with me 
there or not, just as you please. If you come, well and 
good. You can tell your story, and I will decide after 
hearing it how to act. If you don’t come I shall show 
the bill to Miss Peacock. Au revoir, ladies. Come, 
Christian.” 


CHAPTER XXI 
star’s purse 

When Star ceased speaking she took out her purse, 
opened it, and produced the bill. It was folded into very 
minute compass, but it was there, thin and aggravating, 
with its items quite perceptible even in the somewhat 
dim light of the attic. 

As she turned to go she put the bill back into her 
purse, and slipped the purse into her pocket; then she 
left the room. Christian followed her, feeling very 
much as though she were beaten all over. When they ar- 
rived in the corridor which led to the white rooms. Star 
turned and spoke. 

I believe,” she said — and there was a kind tone in 
her voice — “ that I have misunderstood you. I shall 
know better to-morrow night. You made a vast mistake 
in confiding your secret, whatever it may happen to be, 
to those girls. You should have told me. I am not im- 
maculate, and I can understand even if a girl has got into 
a little scrape. Don’t cry, Christian; I won’t be hard on 
you — I promise that — only don’t take up with that lot; 
they are, I assure you, beneath you. If I were a girl 
like you, and had a father such as I hear yours is, to say 
nothing of your pretty mother — for I have heard of her 
too — I wouldn’t touch that sort of girl; I’d let her go 
by; I’d say to myself, ‘She’s notior me; she’s not the 
sort I want to know.’ Now go to bed and to sleep. 
Good-night.” 

Christian said nothing; she felt absolutely tongue- 

206 


STARTS PURSE 


207 


tied. She entered her little room. It was late — very 
late; the whole school was supposed to be sunk in 
slumber. She did not even dare to light her candle. 
She slipped off her clothes and got into bed. A chink 
of light from the moon came through the curtain of 
the window. The light lay in two very bright bars 
on the bed, and as the solitary moon went on her ma- 
jestic way the bars of light moved, until presently they 
reached the young girl’s shoulder, and then her ear, and 
then fell across her face. She gave a smothered cry, 
for once in her home she had read about a woman who 
was supposed to go mad when the moonlight covered 
her. Christian felt almost mad that night. She could 
not sleep; she lay and tossed from side to side until 
the morning. 

The next day happened to be very wet; the sky was 
covered with a heavy curtain of cloud. There was a 
sea-fog, too, so that even the beautiful, fresh, sparkling 
Atlantic could not be seen. But the muffled roar of the 
waves broke on the stillness; otherwise there was no 
sound. 

As Christian dressed she noticed people, looking 
large and indistinct in the fog, coming to the house 
and leaving it. Life at Penwerne Manor would go 
on just the same whether the outside world was foggy 
or full of sunshine, and whether young girls were happy 
or miserable. The school was a strict one, and the 
hours were rigorously employed; the rules were insisted 
on no matter whether Christian had a headache or not. 
Nothing short of absolute illness could excuse lessons 
not being performed. 

She rose and went downstairs, feeling as though the 
weight of centuries were resting on her shoulders. She 
entered the long preparation-hall where the girls usually 
assembled when they first went downstairs. There she 


2o8 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


stood disconsolately near the door. Presently Star, 
looking bright and breezy and independent, passed her. 
She went up to Angela Goring, and standing near her, 
took her hand with an affectionate squeeze. Susan 
Marsh had not put in appearance. 

Presently a teacher entered, looking sleepy and some- 
what depressed. She went through the roll-call. Susan 
Marsh came in at the last moment, just in time to save 
herself from a bad mark. 

The girls then went into the wide, pleasant-looking 
refectory, where a wholesome breakfast was provided 
for them. After breakfast came prayers, and then the 
usual lessons of the day. 

Christian felt all the time as though she were living 
in a dream. So occupied was her mind, and so abso- 
lutely miserable and bewildered did she feel, that for 
the first time since her appearance in the school she 
disappointed her teachers. There was a special profes- 
sor who always came on Wednesdays to give the girls 
recitation and reading lessons. He was a very irascible 
person, and could not stand any inattention on the part 
of his pupils. To find a girl like Christian, so intelli- 
gent, so full of soul and true appreciation, was like 
honey and ambrosia to the poor professor. To hear 
her read, with her pure Saxon accent and her perfect 
pronunciation, soothed him, he was fond of saying, as 
though it were the sweetest music. 

He desired her to stand up now and read one of the 
most celebrated and magnificent passages from Milton’s 
Paradise Lost. She had left off at a certain stanza at 
the previous lesson, and he desired her to proceed from 
the line she had last read. Christian took her accus- 
tomed place. 

Now, it so happened that Miss Peacock herself came 
into the classroom on this occasion. Mr. Penrose had 


STAR’S PURSE 


209 


described to Miss Peacock how splendidly Christian 
Mitford read, how in all respects she was unlike the or- 
dinary schoolgirl of her age. He was so enthusiastic 
about her that Miss Peacock decided to hear the young 
girl herself. 

You must not spoil her by too much praise,’’ she 
had said to the professor. “ I am much interested in 
Christian Mitford, and will do all in my power for her, 
but I have to think of more than just the making of a 
brilliant elocutionist.” 

“ But she will be far better than that,” said the pro- 
fessor. ‘‘ I am convinced she has a beautiful soul. The 
girl is a sort of genius, although all is more or less in 
embryo at present.” 

Now, just as Christian stood up with the open book 
in her hand and most eyes were fixed on her, the door 
opened at the farther end of the room and Miss Peacock 
came slowly forward. Star, who was in the same class, 
raised her bright eyes and fixed them first on Miss Pea- 
cock and then on Christian. 

Christian had been looking pale — pale as death — ^^but 
now a warm wave of color passed over her young 
cheeks and mounted to her smooth brow. She looked 
up at Miss Peacock, and even that lady, accustomed as 
she was to all phases of girl character, was startled at the 
anguish in Christian’s gaze. 

Begin, Miss Mitford,” said the professor — begin.’ 
He stamped his foot with some impatience. He mur- 
mured a word or two of the opening lines, and Christian 
read. 

But where was the enthusiasm, where the go, the 
fire, the pathos, of her delivery a week ago? Her voice 
shook with emotion then; she forgot herself in the 
grandeur of the scene. Now she thought only of herself 
— or rather she thought only of that awful hour to-night 


210 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


when all would be known, and she would be disgraced 
and made miserable forever. 

The book suddenly dropped from her hand; she burst 
into tears. 

“ I’m not well; I can’t do it,” she said. 

By this frank admission she saved herself from cen- 
sure. The professor muttered an apology, looked at 
Miss Peacock as much as to say, “ Don’t judge her by 
this ignominious failure,” and went on with the lesson. 

Star Lestrange was then asked to read the page 
aloud, and she did so with as much fire and interest as 
she was capable of. 

Qiristian resumed her seat in the class, and buried her 
head in her hands. When the professor’s hour wa^ over 
Miss Peacock went up to her and asked if she would like 
to rest in the library. 

You are not fit for lessons,” she said; “ you have a 
bad headache. What can be the matter? ” 

“ My head does ache, but I am quite well. I did not 
sleep last night; that is the reason. There is really 
nothing the matter. I would rather go on with my 
lessons please.” 

You are not fit for them, dear. Obey me. There 
is perfect quiet in the library at present; go there and 
sleep. If you go, I promise that you shall not be dis- 
turbed until dinner-time.” 

Christian went away at once. The library was a very 
pleasant apartment, given over partly to the use of the 
elder girls and partly to the teachers. Christian entered 
it, sought a chair by the fire, and lay back in it, soothed 
for the time being by the stillness and the sleepy crackle 
of the flames. She was just dozing off into real sleep 
when a girl entered and said : 

Do you know where Star Lestrange is? ” 

‘‘ No,” said Christian, “ I don’t. What is it, Alice? ” 


STARTS PURSE 


2II 


“ How bad you look, Christian ! What is the matter? 

‘‘ What do you want Star for? ” repeated Christian. 

“ I wanted to give her her purse. She sent me up- 
stairs to fetch it. She wanted it in a great hurry for 
some reason or other. Oh, dear! I have to go into 
Tregellick at once with my music-mistress. What is 
to be done?” 

“ Give it to me,” said Christian ; I’ll see that she 
gets it.” 

Thank you so much ! ” said Alice. Give it to her 
as soon as you see her, please; she wanted it at once.” 

Yes,” replied Christian. 

Alice dropped the purse into Christian’s lap and ran 
out of the library. She was a merry, lively girl, and did 
not give another thought to the purse. Christian let it 
lie In her lap and also forgot it; all her thoughts were 
centered round the evening, and round what would hap- 
pen then. What was to be done? How could she live 
through her life in the school when all was known? 

I could run away again,” she thought.. • Oh, what 
a mistake I made to run away the last time! What an 
awful, awful thing it is for any girl to do the sort of 
wrong I did then ! I should be so happy but for that. I 
should never take the slightest notice of a girl like Susan 
Marsh; and I should be very fond of Star, and Angela, 
and Lucy, and Louisa, and even of Jane. Jane is quite 
a good sort of girl. They are all of them nice — all ex- 
cept Susan, and perhaps Maud Thompson. Oh, what 
is to be done? ” 

She writhed in her misery, but once again the abso- 
lute stillness soothed her, and she was dozing off to 
sleep when she heard a door open at the far end of the 
room. A girl’s voice said “ Hush ! ” and then there was 
silence. Christian turned her head. 

‘‘Is there anybody there?” she called out; but there 


213 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


was no answer, only she fancied that she heard a 
rustle. 

She was half-disposed to rise and go down the long 
room to find out who was hiding; but after all, she 
thought, it did not matter. She was yielding more and 
more each moment to the influence of her comfortable 
seat, the pleasant fire, and the feeling of warmth and 
rest. Her troubles did not press her so close; they 
seemed to go away from her, to recede in the distance. 
It seemed to her that she did not greatly care what hap- 
pened. She could not help herself. How sleepy she 
was! How pleasant the flames looked! When she shut 
her eyes she saw pictures. They were pictures of her 
old life — her mother’s boudoir, and the nest of all nests 
behind the curtains — ^the softness of those pillows on 
which her head had once rested. Then she was in the 
attic with her dreams of past and future glory, her ro- 
mances, her spells of idealism. Or she was with her 
father, and he was telling her about her grandmother, 
and what he hoped she herself would be. Then, again, 
she was in those awful slums near Paddington, and Mrs. 
Carter was looking in at the window. Christian cried 
out in her sleep: 

“ Go away! Don’t touch me.” 

She started up as she spoke, and was wide awake 
again. A girl was walking down the room. Star’s 
purse still lay in Christian’s lap. 

“What is it? What are you doing? You frightened 
me,” said Christian. 

“ Sorry,” replied Susan in a nonchalant voice. “ I 
came to look for a book — the ‘ Heir of Redclyffe.’ 
Don’t you like it? Don’t you think it a beautiful 
story? ” 

“I read it a couple of years ago; I forgot it now,” 
replied Christian. 


STARTS PURSE 


213 


••'Are you Setter for your sleep?’’ 

Yes, thank you.” 

Susan opened the door. Christian suddenly seemed 
to remember something. She started up, clasped Star’s 
purse in her hand, and ran towards the open door. 

“ What are you going to do about — about to-night? ” 
she said. 

Susan laughed. Nothing at all,” she said. 

Just at that moment Star came in. 

“ Oh, Christian,” she said, “you have got my purse! 
What a search I have had for it! I sent Alice up to 
my room for it.” 

“ She gave it to me,” said Christian quite calmly. 
“She had to hurry out to her music lesson at Tregel- 
lick. She could not find you.” 

“ I was in the bowling-alley. I want it.” 

Star snatched up her purse and slipped it into her 
pocket. She then left the room, and Christian returned 
to her place by .the fire. Her sleep had wonderfully 
soothed her. 

After all, nothing mattered — that is, nothing mat- 
tered much. Seven o’clock in the bowling-alley seemed 
a long way off. Hef headache was better — nearly gone; 
she could endure life once more. 


CHAPTER XXII 


THE BOWLING-ALLEY . 

At ten minutes to seven that evening two girls might 
have been seen strolling leisurely in the direction of the 
bowling-alley. The fog had lifted, and the clouds had 
rolled by. The evenings were getting long now, and 
there was still plenty of daylight. 

The girls entered the bowling-alley and paced up and 
down. Their arms were entwined; they were talking 
eagerly. One girl was Susan Marsh, and the other her 
special friend Maud Thompson. 

'' Well,’' said Maud, ‘‘ what do you mean to do? Star 
is quite certain not to give up the bill. Will you con- 
fess to her? Will you throw yourself on her mercy? ” 

“ Never! ” said Susan. ‘‘ I am not that sort.” 

Maud’s eyes narrowed. She looked frightened. 

It is a. very awkward thing,” she said after a pause, 
‘‘and it makes me downright uncomfortable. Just 
at present, too, when the Easter holidays are coming; 
and then all the prizes which we are to compete for at 
the grand break-up in summer. It’s horrid to be in hot 
water, and we are certain to be if it is known that you 
sent Christian to Dawson’s to buy those things.” 

'‘She won’t tell,” said Susan. “Don’t fret yourself; 
it’s all right, I assure you.” 

“ You are a wonderful girl, Susan, but you can’t 
make wrong right. As Star has the bill and nothing will 
induce her to give it up, I don’t see where we are. It 
seems to me it would be better to tell her than for the 
whole school to know. She could not be too spiteful 
or too much of a traitor to her own cause.” 


214 


THE BOWLING-ALLEY 


215 


“She's a horrid girl and I hate her” said Susan. 
“ She’s just the sort that makes more mischief than 
anybody else. She’s neither bad nor good; she’s luke- 
warm. And you know what the Bible says about luke- 
warm people. I hate her, and I’m not ashamed to 
say so.” 

“ Of course, I must be guided by you, Susan; but I 
do trust you not to get me into a scrape.” 

“ I will do what I can; you have no cause to be the 
least alarmed,” said Susan. “Ah! here comes Janet. 
She hasn’t half nor quarter your spunk, Maud, as a 
rule, but really she looks more calm and collected to- 
night.” 

Janet ran up quickly. “ The others are coming,” she 
said. “ I wonder what is going to happen. I can’t help 
feeling awfully troubled.” 

“ I think the whole thing most horrible,” said Maud. 

Susan pinched her arm. Just then Star and Chris- 
tian appeared. Star was holding Christian by the arm. 
The girls walked slowly forward. 

“There is no hurry,” said Star; “it will soon be 
over.” 

“ I wish I was dead,” said Christian in a moaning 
voice. 

“ Oh, don’t be silly! ” said Star. “ You will soon see 
for yourself what a jolly time we shall have together. 
Now then, here they are.” 

Star walked up to Susan. 

“ Well, Susan,” she said, “ the time is up; what do you 
mean to do?” 

Susan gave a slow smile. Her smiles were some of 
the most aggravating things about her. She always 
smiled when others stormed. 

“ Be quick,” said Star; “ I am in a hurry. I have got 
to see Miss Peacock before eight o’clock.” 


2I6 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


** But suppose you don’t want to see her at all? ” sud- 
denly said Maud. 

‘‘ I hope I may not have to see her, Maud ; I would 
much rather not. Now, Christian, my dear, good, 
frightened child, just stand near me, and don’t shake 
so terribly from head to foot. I can’t get the mystery 
out of Christian, Susan, so I have come to you. You 
know her secret. Most likely it is all nonsense; but any- 
how she has confided it to you.” 

“ I did not,” suddenly interrupted Christian. 

“ Then how did you get hold of it, Susan? ” 

Again Susan smiled, and again she was absolutely 
silent. 

“Oh, bother!” said Star; “we needn’t inquire now 
into the why and wherefore of your knowledge. All we 
have got to discover — and to discover pretty quickly, 
too — is what your power over Christian consists of. 
Why is she afraid of you? Why has she, who is natu- 
rally amiable and good and honorable, deliberately 
turned round and become dishonorable and treacher- 
ous? I must say it, Christian, for it is the truth. She 
is afraid, and I want to get to the bottom of it. You 
force her to disobey the rules of the school. Why, a 
girl could be expelled for what you made Christian do. 
You made her break one of the strictest rules when you 
ordered her to go out and buy those things for the feast 
that ought never to be held.” 

■“ I like that ! ” cried Susan. “ It doesn’t sound well 
for you to talk, you who have enjoyed those tarts and 
cheese-cakes and jolly things in our attic.” 

“ It’s quite true. I have enjoyed them; but I always 
made up my mind that if Miss Peacock spoke to me 
about it I would tell her frankly. I know Miss Peacock 
has an inkling that we enjoy ourselves occasionally in 
that fashion. I know also that Jessie is aware of it. 


THE BOWLING-ALLEY 


217 


But I have never done anything really underhand. I 
have never bought tarts and cheese-cakes outside. 
When I gave a feast the things were sent to me from 
home. Miss Peacock doesn’t object to my having ham- 
pers from home twice every term; and as the cakes and 
sweetmeats are always sent in tin boxes, they last a long 
time. But that is not the point. The point is this: 
why is Christian Mitford afraid of you — so much afraid 
of you that she does wrong because you tell her to? 
It isn’t her wish to do wrong. It is contrary — altogether 
contrary — to her nature. Why, too, should she spend 
her money? Hitherto, when we gave feasts in our attic, 
we subscribed, each of us according to our means. Why 
should Christian spend her money on food for the rest 
of you?” 

“ You can ask her,” said Susan. “ She can tell you 
exactly what she likes. Speak, Christian; we are all 
ready to listen. Tell all about that night — that wonder- 
ful night; tell all about Rosy; tell about ” 

“ Don’t! ” said Christian in a voice of agony. 

“ You see for yourself she doesn’t want you to know. 
Star. She would infinitely prefer your being left in ig- 
norance. Much as you think of her, honorable as you 
esteem her, compared to your humble servant, she has 
done something which Maud and Janet and I would 
scorn to do. I have not told Maud, and I have not told 
Janet. I have been singularly merciful to Christian, and 
she knows it. Now, I wanted a little money for this 
special feast, and she was kind enough to offer to lend 
it to me. And as to the thing you accuse her of — 
namely, having got the cakes and things from Dawson’s 
in the High Street — I ask you what proof you have? ” 

“ Proof! ” cried Star. “ How extraordinary you are! 
I can show it ; and I will, too. This kind of thing must 
not go on. I won’t be a party to it.” 


2i8 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“Very well,” replied Susan; “you must please your- 
self. The bill is the thing that condemns, is it not? ” 

“Yes; it proves the truth of my words.” 

“ Where is it? I should like to see it.” 

“In my purse; you know that. You saw me put it 
there last night. I have not touched it since.” 

“Very well,” said Susan; “ I think that is all. Now, 
I have a statement to make. I refuse to betray poor 
Christian. She did some very wrong and shameful 
things, but I am not going to tell. I am a good friend, 
although some people don’t think so. Cheer up, Chris. 
Do your worst. Star; do your very worst.” 

There was a mocking tone in Susan’s voice, and a 
look of defiance all over her. She held herself very 
erect; her large face was flushed, and her eyes looked 
calm as well as daring. 

“I wish you luck, Star; I wish you luck,” she said. 

Star put her hand into her pocket and took out her 
purse. 

“ I said I would do it, and I will,” she said. “ It is 
horrible beyond words, but I must do what I said. I 
shall take it with me and go. I said I’d go. It is all 
hateful. I could cry about the whole thing; but it is 
the only way to save Christian.” 

“A nice way of saving her!” said Susan. “You 
talk about saving her and you get her into a most 
terrible row.” 

“ I would rather do that than have her any longer 
in your power,” said Star. 

As she spoke she bent her little head and looked into 
the plirse. Her curly hair fell forward over her eyes; 
she pushed it back impatiently. 

“ It is dark,” she said, “ but I ought to see it. I don’t 
see it. Where can it be? ” 

Susan had partly turned away. 


THE BOWLING-ALLEY 219 

“Where is what?’’ she asked, and she returned 
again to her post close to Star’s side. 

“Why, the bill — the bill from Dawson’s. I put it 
into this division last night. Where is it? ” 

“How can I say?” replied Susan. “I don’t keep 
your purse. I saw you put it in and have neither seen 
it nor heard of it since.” 

Star’s face turned very white. She looked full at 
Christian. 

“ Do you know, Christian? ” she said. 

“ Certainly not,” said Christian. “ Alice gave me 
your purse when I was sitting in the library by the fire. 
She threw it into my lap. I had a headache and fell 
asleep. It lay in my lap when I slept. I did not touch 
it until you came in. Then I gave it to you.” 

“ Oh! ” cried Susan, with a laugh, “ I don’t think that 
story will hold water.” 

She laughed loudly. Then she clutched Maud by the 
shoulder. 

“ You see, Maud, we have nothing to fear. Chris', I 
congratulate you ; you acted with great promptitude and 
decision. You are one of us now. Oh, Chris, Chris! to 
think you were really so knowing as all that.” 

Christian did not at first understand; but suddenly the 
knowledge of Susan’s cruel words burst upon her — the 
knowledge and what that knowledge meant. A crimson 
tide mounted to her face. 

She turned to say a word to Star, but Star had gone. 


CHAPTER XXIII 


THE RESOLVE OF THE BODYGUARD 

“ Why have you sent for us, Star? ’’ said Lucy Norris. 

Star was in her own room. It was the prettiest room 
in the White Corridor. She had it to herself, her par- 
ents paying a little extra to secure her this privilege. 
Round the fireplace were arranged two or three chairs, 
a little writing-table, and a couple of footstools. Star 
had a fire whenever she particularly wished for it. It 
was blazing brightly that evening. The electric light 
made the room as bright as possible. Star was stand- 
ing by the fireplace. 

“ Why have you sent for us? said Lucy Norris. 
‘‘ Here we all are, but what is the matter? 

All consisted of Lucy Norris herself, Angela Gor- 
ing, Jane Price, Philippa Dawson, and Louisa Twining. 
The two Sixth Form girls appeared last. Star did not 
answer. When Philippa entered the room she just 
nodded to her to close the door. Star as a rule was the 
gayest of the gay; her laugh was the merriest in the 
whole school. She was about the most popular girl at 
Penwerne Manor. She always had a little following of 
girls, and although she herself was not yet promoted to 
the Fifth Form, she led girls even of the Sixth. Louisa 
Twining and Philippa Dawson both looked anxious as 
they came into the room. 

“ Here, Louisa, said Star, pointing to what might be 
considered the place of honor; “will you seat yourself 
here? And will you, Philippa, take the other chair ex- 


220 


THE RESOLVE OF THE BODYGUARD 


221 


actly opposite? Now, girls of the Fourth, establish 
yourselves where you like. I have something impor- 
tant to say — something that I must say now or forever 
after hold my peace.^’ 

‘‘This is all very dramatic,” said Philippa; “but I 
really want to know what it means. We have your very 
best interests at heart. Star; and I am sure I can say, 
both for myself and Louisa, that we would follow you 
to the world’s end. But why were we disturbed just 
when we were enjoying a special supper with Miss 
Forest and Mr. Frederick? Mr. Frederick had promised 
to play Beethoven’s Sonata Pathetique for us after sup- 
per. Well, what is it? ” 

“ Of course, the occasion is important,” said Star. 
“ I have something to say — something dreadful, which 
hurts me,” said the little girl, and her lips trembled. “ I 
have a complaint to make, and I must make it to you. 
I wish to say in the presence of you all that I want to 
have nothing whatever to do in the future with Chris- 
tian Mitford.” 

Now, Louisa knew very little of Christian. It is true 
she had taken her in hand during her first day at 
school, but being very far removed from her in class and 
at play, she had more or less forgotten her existence. 

Philippa, however, raised her dark brows and looked 
full at Star. 

“I have noticed Christian,” she said. “She seemed 
to me to be a particularly nice and well-behaved girl — 
the sort of girl that you would be sure to take up. Star, 
for you always know a thoroughly nice girl when you 
see her.” 

“ I did think I had that penetration,” said Star; “ but 
it seems I was wrong. I took a fancy to Christian; I 
repent of my fancy. I was mistaken; I wish to say it 
now in the presence of you all.” 


222 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


‘‘It seems an extraordinary thing to send for us to 
consider/’ said Louisa, speaking again. 

“ And I wish further to say,” continued Star, “ that I 
believe you, Lucy; you, Angela; you, Jane; and I myself 
are all doing wrong to have anything to do with the 
Penwernians. I know, Louisa, that you and Philippa 
have not joined our great secret society; but of course 
you have heard of it.” 

‘‘Oh, yes,” said Philippa; “I am quite aware of its 
existence. I think everyone in the school knows 
about it.” 

“ Even Miss Peacock herself,” said Louisa. 

“ Yes, even Miss Peacock herself,” continued Philippa. 
“ But Miss Peacock sees no harm in it. If she did she 
would put a stop to it. She once said to me : 

“ ‘ I don’t consider it part of the duty of a head mis- 
tress to interfere with the girls as long as they do no 
wrong. A little secret and mystery is as the breath of 
life to a schoolgirl, and I shall not interfere as long as 
nothing wrong is done.’ ” 

“Ah!” said Star, “that is just it. I used to adore 
mystery,” she continued, with a sigh. “ I used to think 
it quite delicious, but I have changed my mind; I no 
longer think it delicious. I hate and loathe mystery as 
much,” she continued, speaking with vehemence — “ as 
much as I hate and loathe Christian Mitford.” 

“But what has the poor child done?” said Louisa 
Twining. “ It must be something very bad. Star, for 
you to behave in this peculiar way. Are you going to 
tell us? ” 

“ No, I won’t tell you, for you would not be interested, 
and you need not know. She had better beware, 
however, for if she goes on with her evil practices I shall 
tell Miss Peacock.” 

“ Perhaps you forget,” said Louisa, speaking a little 


THE RESOLVE OF THE BODYGUARD 


223 


vSternly, that the poor child is practically an orphan, 
both her parents being at the other side of the world/' 

“I don’t forget it,” said Star; “I remember it quite 
well. I know Miss Peacock is interested in her; she 
has spoken about her several times. But Miss Peacock 
does not know her. She does not belong to Miss Pea- 
cock’s set in this school. I shall watch her. I thought 
I would tell you about her, but I won’t; I will give her 
another chance. But if she goes on as she has been 
doing lately I shall certainly tell. I don’t mind what 
she thinks; she belongs to the Susan Marsh set.” 

“Oh, dear!” exclaimed Philippa, “I am amazed at 
that.” 

“ It is true; I have sent for you to let you clearly un- 
derstand that Christian Mitford belongs to one set of 
girls in the school, and that I belong to the other; and 
I don’t care whether you think me right or wrong. And 
I have given up the Penwernians. Lucy, Angelai, and 
Jane, you must represent the committee in future, for I 
have given up the Penwernians.” 

“ Well,” said Lucy, “ I will have nothing to do with 
it if you don’t.” 

“ I am glad to hear that.” 

“ Nor I,” said Angela Goring. 

“ Nor I,” said Jane Price. 

“Very well; I believe you all are right. They are 
going to have a meeting in a few nights, and we will 
attend and give in our resignations. After that we shall 
have nothing whatever to do with the society.” 

Louisa rose. “ I consider this meeting rather unpre- 
cedented and, if I may add it, uncalled for,” she said. 
“ No girl has a right to accuse her schoolfellow, as you 
have accused Christian Mitford to-night, without the 
gravest reason. If you will tell me, and allow me as 
the head girl of the school to give you a little advice, I 


224 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


shall consider what you say absolutely sacred; but as 
it is you bewilder me/* 

“ You are not more bewildered than I am,” said Star; 
“not more bewildered nor more disappointed. But as 
to telling you, there is no use, Louisa. I would if I 
thought it would make any difference, but it won’t; she 
is past curing.” 

“ No one is past curing,” said Louisa. “ I am ex- 
tremely sorry for you. Star. I think you have taken up 
a wrong notion altogether.” 

Star said nothing. Philippa and Louisa a few minutes 
afterwards left the room, and the four girls who had 
considered themselves Christian’s bodyguard were alone. 

“Why shouldn’t you tell us?” said Angela. “It is 
very odd to call us together like this, and to draw two of 
the Sixth Form girls into the matter, and then not to 
confide in us.” 

“ If I told you, you could not live in the same school 
with her, so I won’t tell you,” said Star. “ I will give 
her just a chance, although I will have nothing to do 
with her; but if she goes on with her bad ways I shall 
certainly tell Miss Peacock.” 

Meanwhile a pale girl was walking swiftly down the 
corridor. The white chamber where Christian slept was 
near Star’s room. Angela Goring slept in the room 
next to Christian’s; Star’s room came next, and then 
Jane Price’s. Christian entered her room now and shut 
the door. It felt cold and desolate. The fog had been 
followed by a cold night ; there was a slight frost. Chris- 
tian did not even trouble to turn on the electric light; she 
went straight across the icy-cold chamber and flung her- 
self, dressed as she was, on the bed. There was a warm 
eider-down quilt on the bed, but she did not trouble to 
wrap herself in it. She lay still, and the cold pierced 
through her body, and the iron of adversity entered into 


THE RESOLVE OF THE BODYGUARD 


225 


her soul. She was too much stunned, too miserable, too 
frightened to care. She felt as though someone had 
tied her up in chains that she could never get rid of 
again; she could never extricate herself. 

There come times when such trouble visits the human 
heart that it can scarcely realize what has befallen it. 
Such a time had come to-night to Christian. Susan 
had got her into her trap, and those girls whom she had 
believed to be her friends had turned against her. She had 
seen Star in the distance when the girls entered the refec- 
tory for supper, and the look on Star’s face, as her 
bright eyes fixed themselves for one moment on Chris- 
tian was one which the poor child could never forget. 
It was impossible for Christian to eat. She could not 
attend to her lessons; the headache which she had en- 
dured during the early part of the day was so bad that 
she was glad to ask Jessie’s permission to retire earlier 
than usual. 

As she lay on her bed she heard a sound, and looking 
up, she noticed that she had not fastened her door 
properly when she entered, and that it was now a little 
ajar. There was a rustle of dresses as the girls went 
by, and then she heard the well-known, beautiful voice 
of Angela Goring saying: 

“ I never should have thought it of her, and if any- 
one else except Star had told me, I should not have be- 
lieved her.” 

“ But Star, with all her wildness, never exaggerates,” 
said Lucy Norris. Dear, dear! who would have 
thought it? ” 

“They are speaking of me,” thought Christian. “ I 
can’t live through this; I can’t endure it. What is to be 
done?” 

They had scarcely gone to their own rooms before 
the door was opened and little Jessie entered. In a 


226 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


twinkling there was a change of scene. She turned 
on the electric light. She glanced toward the bed, and 
the flushed face and tear-stained eyes of the girl she 
loved best in the entire school met her gaze. 

This will never do,” thought Jessie. 

She put a match to the fire, which was already laid in 
the grate, and soon the crackling of the wood and the 
cheerful light of the blaze transformed the room. Then 
she went up to the bed. 

“ My child,” she said, “ how cold you are ! Let me 
just put this eider-down over you.” 

She wrapped it around Christian, who shivered with 
a sort of forlorn sense of comfort. 

“ My poor, dear child, you are ill.” 

“ My head aches,” said Christian. It has been ach- 
ing all day.” 

What can be wrong, darling? ” 

Everything, Miss Jessie.” 

“ Oh, we often feel like that when we have headaches. 
But come; you must g«t into bed. I will undress you; 
then I will bring you a cup of something hot, and after 
that you will sleep.” 

Christian was so thoroughly miserable that Miss 
Jessie’s ministrations were gratefully received. She 
allowed the little woman to take off her things and to 
lay her between the sheets, to wrap the eider-down over 
her, and then put her cool, firm hand on the burning 
forehead. 

“ ril be back in a minute, darling,” she said. “ You 
took no supper this evening. That is the worst way in 
the world to treat a headache of your sort. I’ll be back 
immediately.” 

In a very short time Miss Jessie returned with a little 
tray containing a cup of hot coffee and some bread and 
butter. 


THE RESOLVE OF THE BODYGUARD 


227 


Now you must eat, Christian,’’ she said; “you 
must eat and drink. Afterwards you shall sleep.” 

Christian did eat and drink. It was wonderful how 
the food revived her, how altogether less miserable the 
world seemed when she had finished her little meal. 

“ And now you won’t guess what I have got for you,” 
said Miss Jessie. 

“ No, Jessie, I can’t. And you can’t have brought 
me anything — anything at all that I should care for.” 

“ Yes, but I have. What do you say to two letters? ” 

“Letters?” said Christian, the color rising to her 
cheeks. 

“ A foreign letter — I think it must come from your 
father or mother — and a letter from London. Here 
they are. Put them under your pillow. It is too late 
for you to read them to-night; or if you would really 
rather ” 

“ Give them to me,” said Christian. She looked at 
the writing. “Yes, from father,” she said; “ and from 
my dear old nurse. I won’t read them to-night,” she 
continued. “ I don’t think I could understand them. 
Jessie, the most dreadful thing has happened, and I can 
never, never be happy again. I don’t deserve anything 
good, for I have been a naughty, bad girl, and I arh, oh, 
so miserable and unhappy ! ” 

I tell you what it is, Christian,” said Miss Jessie: 
“ if you don’t go to sleep, and in the morning tell me all 
about it, I will take you straight to Miss Peacock. That 
I will, for though I am an easy-going woman, when my 
blood is up I can be as despotic as the greatest virago in 
the land.” 


CHAPTER XXIV 


MISS PEACOCK 

The next day Christian was too ill to rise. She had 
tossed from side to side on her restless bed during the 
whole of that miserable night, and when Miss Jessie, 
who could scarcely sleep herself from anxiety, went to 
visit her at an early hour in the morning, she found the 
poor child with flushed cheeks, eyes so heavy that she 
could scarcely look at her, and a temperature far above 
the normal. The doctor was hastily summoned. He 
said that Christian had got a bad chill and must stay in 
bed for the day. He ordered medicines and absolute 
quiet, and when night brought no change for the better, 
and on the following morning the young girl was still 
very ill, with a further rise of temperature and pains and 
aches in all her bones, he went down to see Miss Pea- 
cock. 

‘‘ What is the matter with Christian Mitford? ” asked 
that good lady. “ My right hand, as I always call Jessie 
Jones, is very anxious about her.” 

“ I hope she will soon be well,” said the doctor, “ but 
at present her condition is not satisfactory. I thought 
yesterday that she had simply got a chill, and that by 
care and certain medicines we could get it under. But 
now I am afraid she has been subjected to some kind of 
shock. She refuses to eat, and looks utterly miserable. 
Another strange thing is that she has got two letters. 
Miss Jessie tells me; one is from her father in India, 
and the other from an old servant in London; and she 


228 


MISS PEACOCK 


22g 

won’t open them, or let anyone read them to her. She 
is beyond doubt in a very nervous, highly-strung state. 
Miss Jessie tells me that during the night she rambled 
a little and was slightly delirious. During that time 
she talked a great deal about one of the other girls of 
the school.” 

“ And what was her name? ” asked Miss Peacock. 

Susan Marsh. She was asking Susan Marsh to do 
something, and Susan was refusing. She also mentioned 
Miss Lestrange.” 

“ Then, doctor, if it is really your opinion that Chris- 
tian Mitford is suffering from shock, what steps do you 
propose to take to relieve her mind?” 

“ If she has anything on her mind. Miss Peacock, the 
sooner she unburdens herself the better.” 

“ I will do what I can, doctor. I am glad you have 
told me. Steps must certainly be instituted at once to 
relieve the poor child.” 

The doctor went away, promising to send certain 
medicines and to return again in the evening, or sooner 
if it were necessary. 

He had scarcely left the house before the great gong 
in the central hall rang for prayers, and Miss Peacock 
a few minutes afterwards entered. All the girls were 
present, and also all the teachers, with the exception of 
little Jessie and Christian Mitford. Miss Peacock read 
a portion of the Bible, then uttered the usual prayer; and 
when the service was over as the girls were about to 
scatter to their different classrooms, she raised her hand. 

“ I have something to say,” was her remark — some- 
thing which gives me a great deal of pain. As it con- 
cerns the entire school, I had better speak of it before 
the assembled school. Servants, you may leave the 
room; girls and teachers, please remain.” 

The servants filed out in their accustomed orderly 


230 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


manner. The door was closed behind them; the girls 
drew together in a group, and the teachers stood a little 
way off. Miss Peacock looked steadily at the assembled 
girls; she scarcely glanced at the teachers. Well she 
knew that the mischief, if mischief there were, was to be 
found in that group of bright-looking girls. 

“ I have always been very proud of my school,” she 
began. “ I have kept school here now for many years. 
I have been particular as to the sort of girls whom I 
have admitted to Penwerne Manor. No girl could ever 
come to this school without having a reference from 
the parents of a former pupil. By this means I have 
insured having in my midst girls of unimpeachable char- 
acter, girls to whom the greater sins would at least be 
unknown. In all lives, my dear girls, there must come 
temptation; and such wrong-doing as worldliness, 
thoughtlessness, bad temper, and jealousies will disfigure 
and mar the peace of all communities. This must be 
the case as long as human nature is human nature. But 
there are other sins, which I have been proud — yes, 
proud — to think that my girls who live at Penwerne 
Manor would never commit. One of these sins is the 
sin of cruelty.” 

Miss Peacock paused. She looked at all the girls. 
In particular her eyes fastened themselves upon the face 
of Susan Marsh. Susan Marsh, Miss Peacock had 
to admit, was a little different from the other girls. She 
had been sent to the school under special conditions; 
for her mother was dead, and her father had pleaded 
that as a girl whom he knew very well had been educated 
at Penwerne Manor, and had in all ways fulfilled Miss 
Peacock’s ideals, so his child — ^his motherless child: — 
might have a chance. And Miss Peacock had accepted 
Susan, and hoped that Susan was at least following in 
the lead of girls higher in morals than herself. 


MISS PEACOCK 


231 


To-day Susan^s face looked dark. She did not meet 
the fixed gaze of her teacher; on the contrary, she 
shuffled her feet and her eyes sought the ground. 

The sin of cruelty,'’ continued Miss Peacock, I 
have at least not expected to find in your midst.” 

And now she looked past Susan and fixed her stead- 
fast gaze on Star. Whatever Star’s faults, there was 
nothing underhand about her. Her eyes, soft and bright 
— bright as a robin’s — were raised full to her teacher. 
A flush of color did rise to her cheeks when Miss Pea- 
cock so steadfastly regarded her, but there was nothing 
underhand in those clear eyes, nor in that bright, viva- 
cious face. 

“ I regret to have to tell you all,” continued Miss 
Peacock, looking now at none of the girls in especial, 
that such a case has taken place in this school. A girl 
— one of the forty who are numbered as my pupils — has 
been cruel to a young girl who belongs to us all. The 
girl so cruelly treated is Christian Mitford. She has not 
been here very long, and she has come to me as a very 
precious legacy. I knew Christian Mitford’s grand- 
mother, and she was quite the most upright woman I 
ever met. I owe a great deal to her influence. I also 
know Christian’s father. There are few men who bear a 
more upright or braver character. He has been en- 
trusted with a post which requires all the best energies 
of a man to carry out its duties. He has gone in the 
face of danger and banishment to fulfill those duties. He 
has gone to serve his country in a moment of great 
danger. I cannot exactly explain what his duties are, 
but any of you girls whose fathers are in the diplomatic 
service will understand me. Christian’s father has left 
her behind, for she could not encounter the dangers of 
the climate of the country where he is now living. 
Christian’s mother has gone with her husband. Her 


232 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


child has therefore come to me more or less as an or- 
phan. I said to her father when he wrote to beg of me 
to take Christian, that she would be happy in my big 
family, that she would find her metier^ that she would 
thrive in body and spirit, that she would become an 
accomplished and Christian woman. Now, Christian is 
a particularly bright child, and particularly intelligent, 
and there is no reason whatsoever why she should not 
be happy here. That she is not happy there is not the 
slightest doubt. That she is so unhappy as to cause 
her to be ill is also, I regret to say, a fact. Dr. Webb saw 
her this morning, and he says that she has encountered 
a shock; he does not know of what sort, but he and I 
both feel that we must come to you girls for the ex- 
planation. He fears that she will not be better until the 
load on her mind is relieved. She is too ill to be wor- 
ried; she is too ill even to be questioned. To treat her 
wisely and well we must know what to do. Now, girls, 
I ask your advice. How am I to treat Christian Mit- 
ford? We don’t want her to become seriously ill, and 
she is in a fair way to be so unless her mind is com- 
pletely relieved. What do you say girls? Have you 
anything to suggest? ” 

There was a dead silence amongst all the girls. The 
teachers looked immensely interested. Miss Forest 
opened her lips as though to speak. Mr. Fredericks, 
who had come in just before prayers, glanced at Miss 
Forest. Presently Miss Forest stepped forward. 

“ I am absolutely in the dark,” she said, “ with regard 
to Christian Mitford’s trouble, but I do know that two 
nights ago Mr. Frederick and I were entertaining two of 
the Sixth Form Girls, Louisa Twining and Phillipa 
Dawson, at supper, when a hurried message came for 
them to visit Star Lestrange in her room. We were 
surprised at the time. This, of course^ may have noth- 


MISS PEACOCK 


233 

ing to do with Christian Mitford, but I think it worth 
mentioning/’ 

“ And so do I think it worth mentioning,” said Mr. 
Frederick. “ I observed on Wednesday, when I gave 
Christian her last music lesson, that she was disturbed, 
not herself. The brilliancy which always characterized 
her playing had deserted her.” 

‘‘ She was unquestionably not herself on Wednesday,” 
said Miss Forest. “ She seemed much troubled all day. 
Did you not notice. Miss Peacock, when you were sent 
for to hean her recite her portion from Milton’s works, 
how badly she did it?” 

I certainly did. Then you think she was unhappy 
then? ” 

“ In the light of subsequent events I very much fear 
she was,” said Miss Forest. 

You have nothing further to say?” 

‘‘ Nothing. I know nothing more with regard to her 
case.” 

“ Has anyone anything more to say with regard to 
her case?” 

Louisa Twining now held up her hand. 

What is it, Louisa, my dear?” said Miss Peacock, 
speaking with that respect which always characterized 
her when she addressed the head girl of the school. 

“ I have nothing to say personally,” said Louisa; I 
only wish I had. But I think Star, if she would, could 
tell you something.” 

“ I would rrtuch, much rather not tell,” said Star. 
She turned very white, then crimson. I cannot — I will 
not tell. Please don’t ask me.” 

“ I must ask you. Star. My dear child, this makes me 
very unhappy. Go to my room at once. Star. I will 
join you presently. Are you certain, Louisa, that you 
have nothing more to say?” 


*34 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


‘‘ Except to repeat my words. Star Lestrange can 
tell you something if she will.’’ 

“ Star, dear, go at once. You know I could never 
accuse you of unkindness. But go, dear; I will see you 
in my room immediately.” 

Miss Peacock’s own private sitting room was much 
admired by the girls of Penwerne Manor. It was only 
on rare and most special occasions that she allowed the 
girls of the school to visit her there. When she did it 
was to each and all of those girls as though they had 
entered into paradise. The shackles of school life 
seemed to fall away from them; they felt at home. All 
their most brilliant and most refined instincts seemed to 
awaken and grow stronger in Miss Peacock’s presence. 
She was a very literary woman, highly accomplished in 
every sense of the word. Her knowledge of foreign 
languages, her knowledge of art and the best English 
literature, made her conversation delightful. Then she 
had the knack of knowing how to speak. Without in the 
least uttering a sermon, she had the power of awaking 
the best in each of the young lives. The girls were en- 
thusiastic about their head-mistress. They loved her 
almost with passion. Miss Peacock was fond of saying 
to them: 

“ I intend you to obey your teachers. 1 have made 
rules for your guidance, and those rules are not to be 
broken, but I have made no rule — not one — with regard 
to your conduct to me. I will leave that conduct to the 
love you bear me. If you don’t love me, nothing I can 
do will make you; if you do, all will be easy — for those 
who love try hard to please the beloved.” 

Amongst the girls who most adored Miss Lavinia 
Peacock was Star. Star had naturally a most vivacious, 
brilliant, and affectionate nature. All that was good and 
beautiful in her character was drawn out by Miss Pea- 


MISS PEACOCK 


235 

cock, and the idea of going to her private room now 
filled her with the strangest sensations. 

“ Under ordinary circumstances I should love it,” 
thought the girl. “ As it is ” 

She trembled exceedingly as she turned the handle 
of the door and entered. The room, with its bright fire, 
its beautiful decorations, its lovely pictures, its still more 
beautiful flowers, soothed Star as it always did; but then 
the memory of Christian — Christian ill, very ill — Chris- 
tian treated, as it seemed to the girl herself now, with 
great cruelty, came over her, and flinging herself into a 
chair, she wept. 

“Why have I been dragged into this?” she thought. 
“ What am I to do? No, I won’t tell what I know. If 
I couldn’t tell last night, still less can I tell now. Oh, 
poor Christian! poor Christian! ” 

It was just then when Miss Peacock entered. She 
noticed at a swift glance Star’s attitude of utter despair. 
She did not make any remark, however, but going to 
her accustomed chair near the fire, she took up her knit- 
ting and began to knit. Her whole attitude was the 
very essence of peace. Star, who had been sobbing so 
violently that she could not altogether restrain herself, 
soon ceased her tears. Presently, with wet eyes and 
flushed face, she glanced at her teacher. Miss Peacock, 
to all appearance, was in a dream. She was knitting, 
but her eyes were gazing straight before her. Some- 
times her lips moved. Her face was pale; her eyes were 
full of trouble. 

“Oh, Miss Peacock!” said the child at last. 

Then Miss Peacock dropped her knitting; over her 
whole face there came an alert, watchful, and yet affec- 
tionate expression. She held out both her arms to Star, 
and the next instant the weeping child was clasped to 
her breast. Miss Peacock was one of those women who 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


236 

are mothers without ever having had children, and Star 
knew as those firm arms clasped her, and those lips 
kissed her on the brow, that she was to all intents and 
purposes in the presence of a mother. 

By and by Miss Peacock loosened her clasp, and mo- 
tioned Star to a chair by her side. She took one of the 
girl’s hands, pressed it gently, and said: 

Now, darling, you will tell me.” 

** But I can’t,” said Star in a choking voice. 

*'You can’t, Stella? You can’t tell me about that 
which I have spoken of, and yet you know? ” 

I may not know. I know something; I certainly 
don’t know all; I am distressed, I am unhappy; but if 
you banish me from the school even, I shall not tell.” 

Star’s voice gained courage as she proceeded. She 
looked full up at Miss Peacock now. 

“ Star,” said her teacher, “ I am the last to force any- 
one to act against her conscience. Is it a matter of con- 
science with you to keep this thing to yourself? ” 

“ It would injure Christian if I were to tell; it would 
be unfair.” 

‘‘ Can you not give me some hint. Star? Think of 
my position: a child — the child of a valued friend^ — ^very, 
very ill, and I am unable to cope with her malady. You 
can cope with it. Will you? ” 

Star rose. “ I will go and see her if you like,” she 
said. “The other day I was angry; you would have 
been angry if you were in my place. I would not speak 
to her nor look at her. Oh! don’t ask me to say any 
more; it is unfair to her.” 

“ Of course, I must not question you, but your words 
alarm me. In spite of your efforts to conceal something, 
you are driving me to the conclusion that Christian has 
done something very wong.” 

Star was silent. 


MISS PEACOCK 


237 


** Is that so, Star? Please speak.” 

“I cannot tell you anything; I must not. There is 
one perhaps who could ” 

‘*Ah! you allude to Susan Marsh. It is an extra- 
ordinary thing,” continued Miss Lavinia, “ that from the 
very first entrance of Christian into this school, Susan 
Marsh seems to have had a most pernicious influence 
on her. That such a girl as Susan could affect such a 
girl as Christian is a puzzle to me. Do you agree witR 
me. Star, that Susan is at the bottom of this?” 

'' I ought not to say anything against Susan, but will 
you question her? ” 

*‘I will do so?” 

“And may I go and see Christian?” 

“ She is very ill, but it may do her ^ood to see you. 
Go, my child; and God bless you. I am intensely un- 
happy about this. I want to act with justice to every- 
one — to everyone — and I confess I cannot see my way.” 

Miss Peacock’s large gray eyes were full of tears. 
Star saw them, and the next instant the impulsive child 
had dropped on her knees. 

“Oh, I love you — I love you!” she said. “We all 
love you. There is nothing 1 wouldn’t do for you, but 
if you knew all you would counsel me not to tell what 
has happened with regard to Christian. I will go to 
her; I will go at once.” 

“ Do, Star ; and on your way through the school- 
room, tell Susan Marsh to come to me immediately.” 

Star left the room. The momentary weakness which 
had made her sob so bitterly was over. It seemed to 
her that all of a sudden her contempt for Christian, her 
dislike to her, had vanished. She had a sort of misgiv- 
ing that, after all, Christian might be innocent. If such 
was the case, she, Star, was the one who had treated 
Christian with such rare cruelty. ^ 


238 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


She entered the central hall, where the greater num- 
ber of the girls had their classes during the morning. 
It was in this room she would be certain to find 
Susan Marsh. Yes, there she was, her large face 
slightly flushed, her eyes suspicious and eager. She 
was pretending to copy a theme into one of her exercise 
books, but Star saw at once that she was not thinking 
about her work. 

The moment Star entered the room several of the 
girls looked up at her, and all with more or less curios^ 
ity. Had she relieved the tension? Had she confessed 
whatever, she had to confess to Miss Peacock? Was 
Christian innocent or guilty? The whole school 
was in a state of great excitement with regard 
to Christian, and different opinions were hotly 
argued amongst the girls with regard to the 
why and wherefore of her present condition. Never 
before at Penwerne Manor had there been such an in- 
teresting and remarkable case under discussion. Susan, 
however, had refused to say anything about Christian. 

‘‘ Oh, I am sick of her! ” she had exclaimed when Janet 
Bouverie and another girl came and spoke to her on the 
subject. “ Do let her alone, Florence. I don’t want 
the subject mentioned in my hearing. I can only say 
that it was a very bad day for the school when she en- 
tered it,” 

Lessons began, and the girls were forced to keep their 
opinions to themselves. It was in the midst of the his- 
tory lesson that Star walked up the room. The his- 
tory mistress paused and looked at Star. Star went up 
to her. 

I have a message from Miss Peacock. She wants 
to see Susan Marsh at once.” 

‘‘At once,' Star? Does that mean now or after 
school?” 


MISS PEACOCK 


239 


Now/' said Star briefly. 

Susan/’ said Miss Forest, glancing at the girl, “ go 
at once to your head-mistress in her private room.” 

Susan gave Star a very venomous look. Her face turned 
white. She wondered if Star had really told what she 
knew; but then she reflected that by no possibility could 
Star know the truth. She could not know who had stolen 
the bill out of her purse. She could not possibly guess in 
what way Susan Marsh had become possessed of Chris- 
tian’s secret. Above all things, she had not the most 
remote idea that strangers were to be admitted into the 
attic on the following Wednesday to partake of the Pen- 
wernian feast. Any one of these things, if known, would 
have insured Susan’s removal from the school under the 
most bitter and disgraceful circumstances. But no one 
could know, and Susan tossed her head in the air, walked 
down the corridor, entered the central hall, quickly 
traversed another passage, and knocked at Miss Pea- 
cock’s door. Miss Peacock said, Come in,” and Susan 
entered. 

Ah, Susan ! ” said her mistress, glancing at the girl, 
and treating her altogether in a different manner from 
what her conduct had been to Star; “come and stand 
before me. I have something to say to you.” 

Susan considered this an indignity. She augured the 
worst from Miss Peacock’s somewhat stern manner. 

“What is it. Miss Peacock?” she asked. 

“Stand quiet, Susan; I want to ask you a question.” 

Susan made no remark, but she shut her lips and 
looked full into the face of her mistress. 

“ I want to ask you a direct question,” said Miss 
Peacock; “and I want to ask it now that we two are 
alone — not really alone, Susan, for there is One present, 
mighty, all-powerful, all-knowing. Here in His pres- 
ence, therefore — the presence of our God, Susan — I ask 


240 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


you if you can throw any light on the very unhappy con- 
dition of my dear pupil, Christian Mitford?’* 

“ I can thrown no light,*' answered Susan. 

She spoke calmly enough, although her heart was 
beating almost to suffocation. 

“ Are you certain, Susan? If you could see the One 
who is always present, would you make such an 
answer? ’* 

“I can throw no light on it,’* repeated Susan ; but now 
her eyes sought the ground and her lips trembled. 

Miss Peacock uttered a sigh. 

“ Star Lestrange says you can.** 

“That’s just like Star Lestrange,** replied Susan. 
“ She does know something — of that I am certain — ^^but 
she won’t tell, and throws the thing on me. I hate her. 
She’s the worst, most deceitful girl in the school. I 
hate her more than I hate Christian. But I hate them 
both.” 

“ Susan,” said Miss Peacock after a pause, “ do you 
know the exact circumstances under which you came to 
this school? ” 

Susan raised her brows in some surprise. 

“ I suppose as a pupil, and because my father paid 
for me,” she said after a pause. 

“You certainly came as a pupil, and most certainly 
also your father pays your school expenses. But in a 
select school of this sort there is generally a very strict 
inquiry instituted with regard to each girl who comes 
here. You were at another school before you came. 
You were at a school at Margate.” 

“ How do you know that? ” said Susan, and her voice 
became sharp with anxiety. 

“ I happen to know it. What is more, I had a letter 
from the head-mistress of that school telling me certain 
things about you. Oh, no, my dear, you need not turn 


MISS PEACOCK 


241 


so white; I have not the slightest wish to injure you with 
your schoolfellows; but after receiving that letter I wrote 
to your father declining to receive you as one of my 
pupils. He was much distressed. He is a good man. 
He came to see me, and he spoke of you as his orphan 
child; your mother was not long dead.” 

'*No; mother died very suddenly,” said Susan. Her 
words came out falteringly; in her unattractive eyes tears 
swam. 

“ Your father gave a pitiful picture with regard to his 
motherless girl, and after due reflection and consulting 
Jessie Jones, I decided to admit you to the school. Any 
girl who arrived at a school like this labeled as a black 
sheep might far better never come. I was therefore 
most anxious not to tell your schoolfellows anything 
whatever about you. Nor, shall I tell them now, Susan. 
No, I will not injure you to that extent; but unless Chris- 
tian Mitford is happy and well by the end of the present 
term, and unless no further stories of your misdoings 
reach me, I shall expect your school life at Penwerne 
Manor to terminate at Easter. Have you anything to 
say, my dear? ” 

I think you are awfully unkind. I hate you all. I 
wish I might go.” 

“ You don't realize what it means, Susan. To have 
been already dismissed for want of honesty and truth- 
fulness from school at Margate, and to be again dis- 
missed — or practically dismissed — from Penwerne 
Manor, would injure you for life, my poor child. Be cer- 
tain of this: nothing would induce me to make you so 
unhappy if it were not absolutely essential. It rests with 
yourself, Susan. A little courage and determination to 
cease to do evil, and to learn to do well, will make all 
things possible even for you. Now go. You leave a very 
anxious and unhappy head-mistress behind you; but 


242 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


when you can come to me and confess, I will certainly 
be as lenient as circumstances can permit.” 

“ I will never, never confess,” said Susan. I have 
nothing to confess,” she added sullenly, and she left the 
room, hanging her head, a scowl between her brows. 

Meanwhile Star had gone straight upstairs to the 
White Corridor. She paused for a moment outside 
Christian’s door. The door was slightly ajar. The 
blinds were down at the windows; the fire burned low, 
and yet with a bright gleam in the grate. Little Jessie 
was seated by the fire, bending forward and stirring 
something from time to time that simmered in a sauce- 
pan. 

Star tapped with her knuckles on the door. Jessie 
rose at once. 

“Oh, my dear!” said the little woman when she 
saw Star, “ you must on no account come in ; you would 
trouble her dreadfully. Go away, dear; leave her to me. 
She mustn’t see anyone now. I have the doctor’s 
orders.” 

“ But I wish you would let me see her. I think — I am 
sure — that I won’t do her any harm. I may do her 
good. I told Miss Peacock, and Miss Peacock is will- 
ing. Please let me come in for a minute or two, Jessie. 
And, please, when I go in, go out, Jessie. What I say 
to her I must say to her alone. No one must be pres- 
ent when I talk to her.” 

“ I can’t permit you to enter. Star, until I get Miss 
Peacock’s authority from herself. If you like to stand 
here just within call, I will run down to Miss Lavinia 
and find out what she wishes.” 

Miss Jessie departed at once, and Star stood outside 
the door. All was still in the room. The sick girl must 
be asleep. By and by Miss Jessie, her eyes full of tears, 
reappeared. 


MISS PEACOCK 


243 


You can go in, Star,” she said. But don’t stay 
long. And do — do be guided by wisdom; and do — do 
be kind.” 

“ I will, Jessie,” said Star in a voice of great affection; 
** if for no other reason, for your sake.” 

Miss Jessie went away, and Star on tiptoe entered 
the room. 

Christian was asleep. She was lying on her back. 
Her arms were flung outside the bedclothes ; the heavy, 
dark lashes swept her pale cheeks; her fair hair was 
pushed back from her broad forehead. She looked 
wonderfully sweet and wonderfully intellectual. Star 
noticed this first of all; then she saw the real, the 
latent nobility in the face. Whatever its faults, deceit — 
real deceit — could have nothing to do with it. 

Star felt her heart beat. She would not wake the sick 
girl. She must wait quietly until Christian opened her 
eyes. Star sank down on the chair by the fire. The 
little saucepan stood on the hob. Now and then Star 
bent forward and stirred the chicken broth which Miss 
Jessie was making. What was she to do? What was 
she to believe? 

Star had never come face to face with any really com- 
plicated case of wrong-doing. She had been attracted 
to Christian from the first; then she had been repelled 
by her; then she had been very much puzzled by her 
extraordinary allegiance to Susan Marsh and her set. 
When she saw the grocery bill in Christian’s history- 
book she had been astonished, but scarcely inclined to 
blame Christian very severely. Christian did not know, 
she had argued, and Susan was clever and full of re- 
sources, and was absolutely sure to force the girls who 
were under her power to carry out her will. Yes, Star 
was terribly vexed, but she scarcely blamed Christian 
for this. She almost took Christian’s part when she 


244 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


went up to the front attic and spoke about what she had 
discovered. But when on the following evening she 
went to the bowling-alley, and opening her purse, found 
that the little tell-tale bill had been removed, and when 
she further remembered that the purse had been in Chris- 
tian’s possession for over an hour, her lingering liking 
for the girl vanished on the spot. 

“ Her looks belie her,” she thought. She is bad, 
deceitful, unworthy of any good girl’s affection. I’ll give 
her up.” 

Sc angry was she that she had acted on impulse. 
She had sent for her chosen friends and for two of the 
most important girls in the school, and had told them 
that she had given Christian up. She had further said that 
she wished to resign her post on the committee of the 
secret society of the Penwernians. She had spoken with 
great heat and bitterness. 

Then came the news of Christian’s illness, and Star’s 
interview with Miss Peacock. During that interview it 
seemed to /the girl that she was once more forced to 
change her point of view. 'There were even yet possi- 
bilities that Christian might be innocent. Beyond doubt 
she was suffering. The very worst characters don’t 
suffer when they commit sin. Christian was suffering 
so badly that the doctor was anxious about her. He 
said she was suffering from a shock. Now, what had 
shocked her? If her character was all that Star had 
imagined it to be two days ago, why should the shock 
of what she had done make her ill? Star determined 
now at any cost to keep Christian’s secret. 

“ I don’t understand things,” thought the child, “ but 
if there is a way out I will try to find it; and if there 
is any sort of doubt I will give Christian the benefit of 
it.” 

As she thought this she glanced again toward the 


MISS PEACOCK 


245 

bed; then she gave a start and stood up, for Qiristian’s 
eyes were wide open and were fixed on her face. 

Now Christian’s young face was very pale. She did 
hot look at all surprised at seeing Star. Star went up 
to her. 

“How are you, Christian?” she said in a low voice. 
“ Are you better? ” 

“ I am quite well,” replied Christian. 

Her words came out with a sort of indifference. She 
looked at Star, and then she smiled. 

“ Oh, I am quite well,” said the young girl. 

“ If you are well you w’ll get up, won’t you? ** 

“ It doesn’t matter,” said Christian. 

“ But you needn’t stay in bed if you are well, need 
you? ” 

“ It doesn’t matter,” said Christian again. 

Then the thankfulness which had filled Star’s heart 
just for a moment left it, and in its place came a queer 
sensation of pain and fear. Although Christian said she 
was quite well, her face belied her; and still more her 
words belied her. 

“Do you know me, Chris?” said Star, bending to- 
wards her. 

“ Yes,” replied Christian; “you are Star Lestrange.” 

“ We have always been friends, haven’t we, 
Christian?” 

“ No,” said Christian, still speaking in that level, in- 
different voice; “ you were never my friend.” 

“ Oh, Christian! but I tried to be.” 

“ No,” said Christian again. 

She gazed straight before her. Her voice was never 
raised; it never altered its level, indifferent tones. It 
seemed to Star as she listened that Christian did not 
care whether they were friends or foes. For a minute 
the little girl was absolutely silent. 


246 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


I wish to tell you something,” she then said gravely. 
“ Can you listen to me, Christian? ” 

Christian’s eyes were fixed on Star’s face. She did 
not speak. 

“ I wish to tell you that I am very sorry for what hap- 
pened a couple of days ago. I don’t mean only about 
not finding Dawson’s bill in my purse after you had it 
in your lap for an hour or more; I don’t mean only that, 
but I mean what I did afterwards. For I was so hurt, 
and so frightened, and so angry that I scarcely knew 
what I was doing. I forgot myself, Christian, and I 
sent for all my friends and told them that I had given 
you up.” 

“ Yes,” said Christian. 

‘‘ Did you know it, Chris? You look as though you 
knew it.” 

“ I heard you — at least I heard something about it. 
The girls passed the door, and they spoke to each other. 
I knew you had given me up.” 

“And weren’t you shocked?” 

“Shocked? No.” 

“ Didn’t you care? ” 

“ No.” 

“ Christian, that is unlike you.” 

“ Perhaps ; but everything is unlike me. Every- 
thing has been unlike me since I came to Penwerne 
Manor.” 

“ Christian, tell me the truth. Lying as you are there, 
looking as you now look, I am certain — positive — that 
you would not tell a lie.” 

“ Perhaps not,” said Christian. 

“ You never, never took that bill out of my purse? ” 

“ No.” 

“You are certain?” 

“ Yes. I didn’t open your purse. But it doesn’t matter 


MISS PEACOCK 


247 

whether you believe me or not. You think I did; it 
doesn’t matter. 

“ Christian, tell me what you know.” 

“ Alice gave me your purse to keep for you. She threw 
it into my lap. I fell asleep. I slept for an hour. When 
I awoke it was still in my lap. I never gave it to any- 
body else. I don’t know how the bill was taken out of 
your purse. But that is all as far as I am concerned.” 

Steps were heard in the corridor. Miss Jessie was 
coming back. Miss Jessie would certainly be impa- 
tient. Christian, looking more dead than alive, was 
lying prone on her bed, and Star had not fulfilled her 
mission. Suddenly an idea came to her. 

“ I am going to take both your hands,” she said. 

Christian made no movement whatever to put her 
hands into Star’s clasp. Star took them. 

Now listen to me, Christian Mitford. I have done 
wrong, and I confess it. I hated you, but I hate you no 
longer. I did love you — well, I love you back again. 
Listen to me, Christian. I love you back again; and I 
know, Christian, that you didn’t take the bill out of my 
purse. I know that you are innocent. Now get well, 
Chris — get well, for I love you.” 


CHAPTER XXV 


THE LETTER 

Susan Marsh was thoroughly upset. She was not 
repentant. It is not the nature of a girl like Susan 
easily to repent. She was not at all sorry for what she 
had done, but she was terribly afraid of the conse- 
quences. She also feared that she had gone too far. At 
the school at Margate she had lived through an ugly 
time. There had been a theft, and she had been con- 
cerned in it. She had, in fact, been expelled from the 
school. Her wrong-doing at the time had by no means 
terrified her, but she disliked the ceremony which had 
meant her expulsion from Mrs. Anderson's school. She 
had to pass through a group of her schoolfellows, and 
the eyes of the girls seemed to burn her. They were by 
no means extraordinary girls in any sense of the word; 
they were girls quite moderately good, and with heaps of 
faults, but they all gazed with the utmost contempt at 
Susan as she shuffled down the long line which they 
formed, and so got out of the school. 

Now, Miss Peacock would certainly not expel any 
girl, however wicked, in so cruel a manner; but Susan 
did not know that. She was certain that if Miss Pea- 
cock sent her back to her father at Easter with such a 
report as she threatened to give, and with announcement 
that she would not be received in the school again, some- 
thing fearful would happen. Mr. Marsh was a merchant, 
a very rich man, and Susan was his only child. He was 
a big, red-headed, stout man, with a harsh voice and a 

248 


THE LETTER 


249 


harsh laugh; but he was quite upright. He had strong 
ideas with regard to honor and rectitude; and if Susan 
came back to him so disgraced, she did not know all he 
would do. He would send her away; he would banish 
her from all other girls. He would put her under the 
care of the very strictest disciplinarian he could pos- 
sibly find. She must not run such a risk. Beyond doubt 
she had got herself into a scrape. It was not only that 
silly affair with regard to Christian Mitford. Christian 
had been fairly, useful to Susan as long as she could ob- 
tain her money and press her into her service, but she 
had no time to give a thought to her now. She had got 
all Christian's money; there was nothing of it left, and 
Susan made up her mind to leave her alone, to announce 
to her friends that she thought Christian Mitford a 
fairly good girl, and, in short, if she could manage it 
with a few clever words, to undo the mischief she had 
hitherto done. Christian would recover and take her 
place in the school; Star Lestrange would be her friend, 
and her brief time of friendship with Susan and her set 
would be forgotten. 

But there were other things. There was the great 
feast in the front attic which was to take place next 
Wednesday, and there were the girls who were to be 
invited to attend it. Susan felt terribly anxious when 
she thought of those girls. One of them was Florence 
Dixie, who was the daughter of a lawyer who lived in 
the town of Tregellick. Florence was a bold, wild girl, 
with quantities of black hair which curled all over her 
head. She had black eyes to match the hair, a turned-up 
nose, and a loud laugh. It had been Florence’s wildest 
ambition to become an inmate of Penwerne Manor, 
but Miss Peacock did not approve of the young lady, 
and had declined the honor of becoming her instructress. 

There were also Ethel and Emma Manners. They 


250 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


were the daughters of a rich greengrocer in the town. 
Ethel and Emma had more pocket-money than they 
knew what to do with, and once having met Susan 
when she had no right to be out, and lent her some 
money. They were pleased to strike up any sort of ac- 
quaintance with a Penwerne Manor girl, and Susan 
had taken advantage of their friendship to get several 
good things for herself. Ethel and Emma had told 
Susan that if she could smuggle them into the house, 
and make them acquainted with some of the other girls 
of the Manor, they would each give her a very beautiful 
present at Easter. 

‘‘We will manage,” said Ethel, “sp that Miss Pea- 
cock shall never know. You’ll do it, won’t you?” 

Susan had said of course she would, and she had 
planned the whole thing. 

Florence Dixie, who thought herself considerably 
above the Manners girls, was still quite willing to ac- 
company them on this occasion. They would climb up 
the elm-tree at the back of the house; they would tap 
at the window, and Susan herself, aided by the other 
girls, who of course must be let into the secret, would 
admit them. Then there would be high-jinks; then there 
would be a glorious time. Oh, how they would eat, 
how they would drink, how they would laugh! How 
they would enjoy themselves! 

Florence Dixie had promised not to come empty- 
handed to the feast. She would bring such plumcake 
as had not been eaten for years by those girls. 

“ I can manage it,” said Florence. “ for my cousin, 
Amy Hall, was married a fortnight ago, and there is 
a huge wedge of her wedding-cake in the pantry. I 
shall get a great slice from it and bring it with me. Oh, 
it will be fun!” 

“And we can all sleep on it,” cried Susan, almost 


THE LETTER 


251 

shrieking with delight, “and dream. Oh, to think of 
dreaming of our future husbands! What a delicious 
joke!^’ 

Ethel and Emma were to bring fruit from their 
father’s shop, and anything else they could manage to 
convey. 

The girls of the town were very much delighted, but 
very much afraid of their escapade being discovered, 
and very proud of their acquaintance with Susan. 

But now Susan, as she sat alone in her boudoir, had 
sorrowfully to reflect that this glorious feast, this de- 
lightful adventure must be given up. 

“ It can’t be done,” she said to herself. “ Miss Pea- 
cock is on the watch. When Lavinia opens her sleepy 
eyes, they do open with a vengeance; and then Jessie 
ceases to be a lamb, and becomes a very lion of vigi- 
lance and terror. Then as to Star, now that she has 
given up the Penwernians, she will certainly split on us. 
It can’t be done. I must see Maud; she must help me. 
Maud and I must both manage in such a way that no 
one shall find out. Florence, Ethel, and Emma must 
be spoken to; they must be told that the delightful feast 
is to be postponed.” 

Susan Marsh was the sort of girl who never took long 
in making up her mind. This happened to be Satur- 
day morning; the next day was Sunday. The girls had 
a little more freedom on Sundays than on other days, 
and they regularly walked, two and two together, to 
the parish church at Tregellick. Susan wondered if by 
any possibility she could slip away from her fellows 
and convey a note to Florence Dixie with strict injunc- 
tions to give up all idea of visiting Penwerne Manor on 
the following Wednesday evening, and further telling 
her to put off Ethel and Emma Manners. 

Susan felt very much frightened, and not at all sure 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


2252 

that she could convey this note, but still she resolved 
to have a good try. 

As she sat and thought and made up her mind, Star 
Lestrange entered the boudoir. Susan looked up sul- 
lenly when she observed Star’s bright face. 

“ Well, what is it? ” she said. “ What do you want? ” 
I thought rd like to have a little chat with you if 
you don’t mind.” 

“ I mind extremely,” said Susan. I don’t want to 
have anything to do with you. A girl who could be so 
mean as to give up the Penwernians is unworthy of 
my notice.” 

“ Oh, just as you please! ” said Star. “ I thought per- 
haps you would come and have cocoa with me in our 
boudoir; but if you don’t care about it, never mind. I 
only wanted to tell you now that I have discovered ab- 
solutely and conclusively that it was not Christian Mit- 
ford who took the bill out of my purse.” 

“ Oh ! ” said Susan, starting and turning very red. 

And how did you find that out, pray? ” 

“ Never mind how. I have found it out, and I thought 
I’d tell you. I don’t want to say anything more just 
now.” 

Star immediately left the boudoir. Susan sat on, 
feeling very uncomfortable; for to be told that a certain 
thing had been discovered, the knowledge of which 
spelt ruin to her, Susan, was the reverse of quieting. 
She felt her head aching; her face flushed; her feet 
turned icy cold. She crept near to the fire, shivering all 
over. 

“ I’ll be ill myself if this sort of thing goes on,” she 
said to herself; and just then her dearest friend, Maud, 
walked into the boudoir. 

I thought I’d find you here,” said Maud, speaking 
with some excitement. 


THE LETTER 


253 


She drew a chair forward and poked up the fire into 
a blaze. 

“I wish we had some logs,’^ she said; ‘^they’d make 
the sparks flare up the chimney. It’s going to be a 
bitterly cold night.” 

Susan made no answer. 

‘‘What’s the matter with vou, Sukey? Are you 
sulky?” 

“ I feel miserable enough,” said Susan. 

“You look it; you look perfectly dreadful. Do you 
know what I have heard? I have heard that Christian 
Mitford is much worse this evening. The doctor is 
with her now. Don’t you think we are all a little hard 
on poor Christian? ” 

“ Don’t mention her name,” said Susan passionately. 
“ I hate her. I can’t sit in the room with people who 
talk about her.” ' 

“ Oh, isn’t that very silly, and very unkind? She has 
done nothing, poor girl ! ” 

“Oh, hasn’t she? We were happy enough in the 
school until she came here.” 

“ Well, there’s no doubt that she is very ill. I thought 
that it was perhaps about her you were fretting. It’s 
getting to be quite a weight on my conscience. If she 
gets the least scrap worse I shall surely have to tell 
myself.” 

“ You’ll have to do what? ” said Susan. 

Maud’s words had roused her at last. 

“ Oh, dear! if I thought you were going against me — 
I. don’t know what sort of a school this is, but to have 
my own friends going against me^ — you and Mary Hil- 
lary and Janet — although somehow Janet doesn’t count 
for much — I believe I shall go mad. I’m awfully un- 
happy, and I’m not at all well.” 

“ You look anything but well, poor Sukey; your nose 


254 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


is so red and your eyes so swollen. I expect you have 
a bad cold.” 

“ I have. I am going to be ill myself; I have shivers 
down my back.” 

You’d best go to bed and get Jessie to cosset 
you up.” 

‘‘ I hate Jessie; I won’t let her come near me.” 

“ Well, shall I go and ask her if you may have a fire 
in your room? And I’ll give you a hot drink. I can, 
you know, if they allow a fire in your room. I have got a 
pot of that black-currant jelly; I’ll make you a smoking 
tumbler of black-currant tea. You’ll soon be better.” 

“ You are very kind, Maud,” said Susan, who was 
intensely greedy, and to whom the thought of hot black- 
currant tea appealed most pleasantly. “ But there ! ” she 
added, “that is not the worst; and that is not the way 
you can really help me.” 

“ Well, tell me; I really am distressed to see you look 
so bad. Of course, Christian may soon get better; per- 
haps we needn’t think about her at all.” 

“ We must think about something else, but she’s the 
cause. You know, of course, what Star said on Wed- 
nesday night.” 

“Star Lestrange? Rather! Why, the whole school 
is going on about it. But I don’t believe she will do it.” 

“ I know she will. I tell you there’s great trouble, 
and it’s all caused by that horrid Christian Mitford. For 
my part, I shall be glad if Star ceases to be a Penwer- 
nian; but she can do us much damage. There’s a lot — 
a great lot — of mischief afoot, and we have got to be 
careful. You can’t imagine how bitterly and cruelly 
Miss Peacock spoke to me. She even said that if any- 
thing else was found out I might not be allowed to come 
back to the school.” 

“Oh, Susy!” said Maud in a shocked voice, “she 


THE LETTER 


*55 

couIdn^t have said that. That would mean to ruin you 
for life. She couldn't have said it, Susy.” 

‘‘She did, Maud; so you needn't wonder that I am 
troubled. I tell you what it is: you must and shall 
help me.” 

“ I will if it is in my power, and if it isn't anything 
very wrong, for I'm tired of doing wrong. It makes you 
feel so uncomfortable and ashamed of yourself.” 

“ This is putting wrong right, so I am sure you will 
help me. I know I have got a cold, and there isn’t the 
most remote chance of my being allowed to go to 
church to-morrow. But you will go.” 

“ We’re allowed to go, just as we please, either to the 
chapel here or to the church at Tregellick,” said Maud. 
“ If the weather is as bad as it is at present you will have 
to go to the chapel, and I dare say I shall go with you. 
I have a bit of a cold myself.” 

“But you must help me; you must go to church at 
Tregellick, and you must manage to convey a letter from 
me to Florence Dixie or to the Manners’ girls. You 
must do it, and no one else must find out.” 

“ But can’t you post it? ” 

“ I dare not. Florence's father might find it and open 
it by chance; and then — ^then indeed the fat would be 
in the fire. And it would be equally dangerous to con- 
fide a letter to the post for the Manners’ girls. Besides, 
the sooner they know the better.” 

“ What have they to know? ” 

“ Why, of course, that they are not to come to our 
feast on Wednesday.” 

“Not to come to our feast!” Maud stood up. “I 
suppose you don't mind Mary hearing,” she said, as 
Mary Hillary entered the boudoir. 

“ I don’t suppose I do. You will all know before the 
time. The strange girls can't come on Wednesday 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


256 

night, and we must convey the fact to them in such a 
way that we may not be discovered ourselves.” 

“ Highty-tighty ! ” said Mary Hillary. What does 
this mean? Not coming? But why shouldn’t they 
come? I am sure there has been fuss enough preparing 
for them. And they promised to bring those delicious 
cakes and things. And it would be such screaming fun 
to have them with us for hours, and to send them away 
again, and dear Peacock to know nothing about it. 
I say, Susan, I don’t see why you are running this 
show altogether. Why mayn’t we have a word in it 
now and then ? ” 

“As many words as you like afterwards,” said Susan; 
“ but they can’t come next Wednesday. I tell you it 
would ruin us all; it would be discovered.” 

“ It needn’t be. Of course, I have heard that story 
about Star, and I call Star a mean sneak,” said Mary. 
“ But if we lock the door and remain fearfully quiet, and 
have our feast not in the front attic, but in the far-away 
attic at the back, which we can get at through the front 
attic — ^the one over the room where the kitchen-maid 
sleeps — why, not a soul will hear us, and they’ll all 
think we are in bed. I am going to put a pillow, dressed 
exactly like me, in my bed, and the rest of you can do 
likewise, and Jessie won’t know. Oh, we must — ^we 
must have our feast! ” 

Susan sat down again. Her face was hot and flushed; 
her eyes looked strange. 

“ They can’t come,” she said; and all of a sudden she 
burst into tears. “ They can’t come,” she continued, 
“ for it would ruin me. Oh, girls, girls, don’t let me be 
ruined! I will be so kind to you both when I leave 
school. Father has heaps of money, and I’ll make him 
take a country-house and have you to stay with me, and 
you shall ride my ponies. Oh, please help me now! ” 


THE LETTER 


257 


“She’s in great trouble, poor thing!” said Maud; 
“ but I think she is frightening herself unnecessarily. 
What do you say, Mary? ” 

“ I say this,” answered Mary somewhat defiantly — 
“ that, as we went into the thing, we ought to carry 
it through; and I am sure Janet Bouverie will agree 
with me. You have always been our head, Sukey, and 
on the whole we have put up with you, but what I say 
is this — don’t blow both hot and cold. You asked the 
girls, and even if there is a spice of danger — and surely 
the greatest part of the fun is in that very fact — we ought 
to stick to our words.” 

“ I won’t — I won’t ! ” screamed Susan. “ Oh, you 
drive me mad! ” 

“ Leave us, Mary,” said Maud; “ I will manage her.” 

Mary, with a look of contempt on her face, left the 
room. 

Maud now knelt by Susan and did her best to comfort 
her. She did not find her task at all an easy 
one. Susan, who was thoroughly selfish, had been 
frightened out of her habitual self-control. There 
is no greater coward than the bully, and Maud 
could not help wondering why she had ever made a 
friend of this girl, as she knelt by her side, patted her 
hands, brushed back her hair, and did all she could to 
soothe her. 

By and by the great gong sounded for evening 
prayers, and Susan, wiping away her tears and doing her 
best to recover her composure, followed Maud into the 
central hall. It was only occasionally, on Sundays and 
on special festivals, that the beautiful little chapel, which 
had been used in the olden time when Penwerne Manor 
was a priory, was lighted and warmed for Divine ser- 
vices; but on Sundays it was a perfect picture to see the 
girls and their mistresses in the lovely little place. Miss 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


258 

Peacock always attended private chapel at the Manor, 
and many of the girls preferred it to any other church 
in the neighborhood. 

Now, as usual, the great hall was used, and as usual 
the girls assembled. The electric light fell on their 
bright heads and graceful young figures. Miss Pea- 
cock mounted the little dais and read the evening lesson, 
prayed the evening prayer, and looked around her. Just 
for an instant her eyes rested upon Susan. Her tear- 
stained face and wretched appearance rather pleased the 
head-mistress than otherwise. The same thought that 
filled her mind occupied the minds of many of the girls 
present. Star felt inclined to pity Susan. Louisa 
Twining said to herself: 

“Whatever the poor thing has done — and I’m sure 
I don’t like her — she has plenty of heart.” 

And then the voice of the head-mistress rose in the 
stillness. After reading a brief lesson she knelt to pray. 
There was generally a hymn sung by all the girls, but 
on this occasion it was left out. Miss Peacock prayed 
the evening collect, then pausing, she said a few words 
in a solemn voice. These words startled each girl who 
listened to them. They were to the effect that God in 
His mercy might bless the means used for the recovery 
of dear Christian Mitford, who was lying dangerously ill. 

A pin might have been heard to drop in the room 
when the head-mistress paused after these impressive 
words. She then finished her prayer and rose to her 
feet. The girls crowded round her, distress in their 
faces. Was it true? Was Christian really in danger? 

“ The doctor thinks badly of her,” replied Miss Pea- 
cock. “ He will stay in the house to-night. I have sent 
for a trained nurse; and Jessie and I will also watch 
in the sickroom. You must pray, my dear girls-, you 
who love Christian and admire her for many things, as 


THE LETTER 


259 

all those who know her cannot help doing; you also who 
have misunderstood her and made her life unhappy ’’ — 
here the head-mistress’s eyes fixed themselves for a mo- 
ment on Susan’s face — “all alike must pray to-night 
that God will spare her life. Her parents are far away; 
that is the saddest thing of all. Dear girls, ‘ more things 
are wrought by prayer than this world dreams of.’ ” 

Miss Peacock hurried away, and the girls slowly left 
the hall. 

At the opposite side of the bright corridor was the 
refectory, but scarcely a girl turned into it. They were 
all shocked and depressed. Susan uttered a smothered 
sob deep down in her heart. Maud and Mary suddenly 
pulled her away. They rushed up stairs, and all three 
entered Susan’s room. 

“ Now you mustn’t give way. Oh, of course, we can’t 
stand this sort of thing much longer,” said Maud. 

Her words terrified Susan. “ What do you mean? ” 

“ That we ought to tell ; we ought to tell what we 
know. We have given a wrong impression of Christian 
in this school, and if she dies I shall never forgive 
myself.” 

“ You daren’t tell,” said Susan in a smothered voice. 
“ If you do it will ruin me. Oh, I know she will be better 
in the morning; I feel she will. I will pray to God all 
night.” 

“ Dare you?” said Mary suddenly. 

“ Oh, I dare — I dare anything. I know I am a wicked 
girl, but she mustn’t die. We mustn’t let her die. God 
will be merciful.” 

The girls talked together for a little longer. Finally 
Mary went away, and Susan and Maud were alone. 

“ I feel she will be better in the morning,” said Susan. 

“ Oh, dear, how I shiver, and how ill I am ! I do feel 
perfectly wretched. I wish I might have my fire lit.” 


26 o 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


ril venture to break the rules for once,” said Maud. 
‘‘ Here are some matches. I’ll put a light to the paper, 
and the fire will blaze up, and you won’t feel quite so 
miserable.” 

“ I wish you would sleep with me to-night, Maudie. 
I am too frightened to sleep alone.” 

“All right; I don’t care,” said Maud, who felt herself 
that she would like some sort of company. 

By and by the girls, a blazing fire in their room, lay 
side by side in Susan’s little bed. Maud put her arms 
round Susan, who kissed her. 

“ You don’t really think she will die, do you, Maud? ” 

“Of course not,” said Maud; “but Miss Peacock 
would not speak as she does if she were not really 
frightened.” 

“ And the doctor is staying here all night,” said 
Susan. “ And Miss Peacock herself means to stay up, 
and she has sent for a nurse. She must be very bad. 
Are you very frightened of death, Maud?” 

“ Yes, I think I am — a little bit. A little sister of mine 
died years ago, and I saw her after they put her into 
her coffin. She did not look like anybody else I had ever 
seen. I could not get her face out of my head for a 
long time.” 

“ I wouldn’t look at a dead person for the world,” said 
Susan. “ Oh, I do hope she won’t die ! I think I shall 
lose my senses if she does.” 

“ She’s good, you know,” said Maud after a pause. 
“ She’s not a bit like either you or me. We made her 
very unhappy.” 

“ We certainly did,” said Susan. “ She seemed so 
astonished; although, of course, what she did was ” 

“ What did she do?” 

“ I wish I could tell you ; it would relieve my mind. 
Oh, how badly my head aches ! ” 


THE LETTER 


261 


Do tell me, dear Susy; I am dying of curiosity. I 
can’t help it; it is one of my failings.” 

“No, I won’t, Maud; I could not bear it now that 
she is so ill. It is bad enough to have her like this 
without betraying her as well.” 

“ Of course, if you won’t,” said Maud, and the two 
girls lay silent. 

Maud was anxious, depressed; her conscience was 
pricking her with regard to Christian. But her anxiety 
and her depression were nothing at all compared to the 
terrible feelings that swept over Susan’s brain. If Chris- 
tian died, she felt that she could never hold up her 
head again; and yet even to save Christian’s life she did 
not believe she could humble herself to the extent of 
confessing all her wrong-doing since Christian had 
come to the school. 

Towards morning she became drowsy and dropped 
off asleep. Maud had long been sleeping peacefully by 
her side. 

When the girls awoke little Jessie was looking down 
at them. Jessie’s eyes were red as though she had 
been crying very much. Susan started up, her face 
turned white. 

“Is she frightfully bad?” she gasped. 

“ Oh, I don’t know,” said Jessie. “ The doctor won’t 
say. She has been delirious all night, and is now asleep. 
I don’t know what to think. I came to tell you both, 
dear girls, to dress very quietly, and not to make the 
slightest noise. All the girls in the White Corridor are 
to be moved to-day in order that she may have perfect 
stillness. The doctor says that her brain is very 
much affected. He cannot imagine what can have 
happened to her. He says she has got a terrible 
shock.” 

“ Oh, dear! ” said Susan. 


262 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


You don’t look well yourself, Susan. Have you a 
cold?” 

“ Yes. My throat aches, and my eyes ache.” 

‘‘Well, get up quietly, dear, and go downstairs. 
There will be big fires in all the sitting rooms, and the 
boudoirs will be made thoroughly comfortable. I am 
glad you had a fire last night, girls. Yes, we must 
hope for the best.” 

Little Jessie bustled away. Susan and Maud began 
slowly to put on their things. 

“ There is one thing at least, Maud, that must be 
done,” said Susan as she proceeded with her dressing. 
“ That letter which I spoke of must be sent to Florence 
Dixie. Someone must go to church. You must do it, 
Mattdie; you must do it for me.” 

“ But I have a cold myself,” said Maud. 

“You must do it whether you have a cold or not. 
You will manage better than I, or I would do it. You 
must go to church. No one will notice you. You must 
say you want specially to go this morning. You will do 
this for me, won’t you, Maud? ” 

“ I don’t know. I don’t see why I should do it 
for you.” 

“ Why, think — think for yourself what would happen 
if they were to come now. Really, girls like Florence 
Dixie and the Manners girls might easily know nothing 
about poor Christian’s illness. This is Sunday; Wed- 
nesday will be here in no time. Think of their coming 
at present. Oh, Maud! you would be expelled as well 
as I.” 

“ Do you think so? ” said Maud, turning pale. 

“ I am sure — certain of it. We should all be made 
examples of — we three at least; Janet isn’t quite so 
much in it.” 

“ If that is the case I will make an effort,” said Maud. 


THE LETTER 


263 


Susan proceeded more cheerfully with her dressing 
after this remark of Maud’s; and presently, their toilets 
completed, the girls ran downstairs. 

Then Susan, taking an opportunity when no one was 
looking, wrote a brief note to Florence Dixie. It ran as 
follows : 

Dear Fdorry: You and the Manners girls must on 
no account come on Wednesday. Don’t attempt it, as 
you love me. I can add no more. From your friend, 

“ Susan Marsh.” 

When Susan had finished her letter she folded it up. 
Outside the little three-cornered note she wrote, Be 
sure you burn this when read”; and then she put it 
into a small envelope, which she stuck down. A minute 
or two later she had thrust her note into Maud’s hand. 

“ Put it into your pocket, and don’t fail to deliver it. 
Oh! it will be a relief when you have managed this, 
Maud.” 

Maud nodded her head. 

That morning Miss Peacock, contrary to her wont, 
did not appear at family prayers; but Miss Forest, the 
English teacher, took her place. Christian was again 
prayed for. The bulletin with regard to her state was a 
little w^orse, if anything, than it had been on the pre- 
vious night. All the girls felt terribly depressed. They 
could not set to their accustomed Sunday work. Susan 
glided to a seat by the fire in the boudoir with a book; 
the others wandered here and there, not knowing 
what to do with themselves. Presently Jessie came 
down. 

“ Miss Peacock says that there will be prayers as usual 
in the chapel,” she said, “ and she hopes that all the 
girls who are sufficiently well will go there in good 
time.” 

Maud raised her head. She also was pretending to 


264 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


read, Susan gave her one agonized glance. Maud rose 
slowly and went towards Jessie. 

“ Do you mind, Jessie,” she said, ‘‘ if I go to church 
at Tregellick? ” 

“ But, my dear, Miss Peacock says that none of the 
girls are to go to the village church to-day.” 

Only I should like to go; I like Mr. White’s preach- 
ing so much.” 

Miss Jessie hesitated. “Well, I’ll ask Miss Pea- 
cock,” she said. “ You must on no account go without 
her leave. She is in the room with Christian now, but I 
will ask her if I have an opportunity. Does anyone else 
want to go to the church at Tregellick?” she added, 
looking round at the assembled girls. 

Jane Price and one or two other girls said that they 
would like to go to the village church; and Jessie, with 
four names entered in her little notebook, went upstairs. 

She presently returned to say that Miss Peacock 
would allow the girls to go church in the village if they 
went straight there and straight back and did not speak 
to anyone. 

“ Remember, Miss Peacock trusts you,” said Miss 
Jessie. “ She is so distressed and miserable that she can 
scarcely think of anything, and there is no teacher able 
to be spared to go with you this morning. She trusts 
you to behave well, to speak to no one, and to come 
straight home again.” 

“ Oh, I’ll take care that they speak to no one,” said 
Jane Price. “ Appoint me the guardian of this party, 
won’t you. Miss Jessie?” 

“Very well, Jane. You are a nice, steady girl; you 
will see to the others.” 

Jessie bustled from the room. 

“ Now then, you have got to obey me,” said Jane, 
with a laugh. 


THE LETTER 265 

A minute or two later Maud passed Susan’s chair. 
Susan bent towards her and whispered in her ear: 

“ You are a brick to have spoken out. I won’t forget 
this to you in the future.” 

Star was one of the girls who elected to go to Tre- 
gellick church. She was too restless to stay within the 
grounds, and any chance of a walk outside appealed 
to her. 

There were six girls altogether who started off in 
time to say their prayers in the little gray church in 
Tregellick. 

Mr. White was an excellent preacher, and it was 
always a treat to Star to listen to him. There were 
two pews in the church set apart for the Penwerne 
Manor girls, and they entered these now. The church 
happened to be specially full that morning. Mautt, who 
found herself between Jane Price and Star Lestrange, 
presently looked around her. It was necessary that 
she should see Florence Dixie. She hoped that as they 
were going out of the church she might have an oppor- 
tunity of slipping a note into the girl’s hand without 
anyone noticing her. 

Jane Price, who was the leader of the little party, 
would on no account allow her to speak to Florence. 
But Florence was aware that she was not supposed to 
know any of the Penwerne Manor girls, and she was 
extremely proud of her secret acquaintance with more 
than one of them. 

Florence and her mother, an extremely vulgar, over- 
dressed woman, generally sat in a pew just in front of 
those used by the schoolgirls. When they got to the 
church Jane went into the second pew; but Maud with- 
out making any comment, ensconced herself in the first 
one. Jane wondered at this, but she nodded to her com- 
panions, and they all entered the first of the two pews; 


266 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


and Maud, as has been stated, found herself between 
Star and Jane. 

Florence glanced round once and fixed her eyes on 
Maud's face. She had not made the acquaintance of 
any of the other girls present, and on no account would 
she pretend to know any of them. But Maud colored 
when Florence's eyes glanced at her. 

The service went on. The singing was better than 
ever. Christian was prayed for in church, at Miss Pea- 
cock’s special request, and at last the service came to 
an end. 

“ Now, girls, let us hasten home,” said Jane. '' Just 
let us walk out, two and two, as fast as ever we can, 
and glance neither to right nor to left, and get back to 
the Manor in good time for early dinner.” 

She whispered this in a somewhat loud voice to 
Maud, who nodded her head, but could not help re- 
plying: 

** I wish you wouldn’t talk so loud in church.” 

Jane tossed her head and looked angry. 

Follow me,” she said. 

Star, who was looking thoroughly depressed, fol- 
lowed quite meekly; then came Maud. But no, she 
would not go now. On purpose she knocked down a 
prayer-book. 

Go on,” she said to the girl next to her, and the 
girl went on. Maud was a long time on her knees 
finding the prayer-book. Presently she put it in its 
place. All the girls had now gone with the exception of 
Maud herself. Florence lingered, she scarcely knew 
why. Maud bent towards her. 

Take it,” she said, and say nothing.” 

Florence covered the note with her prayer-book; and, 
thoroughly relieved, and suddenly in excellent spirits, 
Maud left the church. 


THE LETTER 267 

But her good spirits were not of long duration. Out- 
side the church Star stepped back and spoke to her. 

“ Why did you do that? ’’ she asked. 

Do what?’' asked Maud, considerably startled. 

“ Of course, I saw you knock down that prayer-book 
on purpose. Why did you give that girl — Miss Dixie, 
I think you call her — a note? ” 

I didn’t,” said Maud at once. 

'‘You did. I shall tell Jane Price.” 

" Oh, what a horror you are ! — a tell-tale and all the 
rest. Besides, it isn’t true.” 

"It is true,” said Star; "I saw you do it. What is 
the matter, Maud? There is a sort of conspiracy going 
on in our school. We are all fearfully unhappy, and I 
can’t conceal things any longer. I can’t and I won’t.” 

" Oh, please — please don’t tell Jane. Indeed — indeed 
I didn’t do anything.” 

" Maud, if you deny it again I will tell Jane, and this 
instant.” 

" Well, I’ll say nothing.” 

" You must come to me to-day to my boudoir. I 
shall ask to have it to myself, and only you and Susan 
shall come. I’ll get to the bottom of this thing. Now, 
you understand.” 

Maud put on a wry face. 

" I won’t talk to you any more at present; I despise 
you,” said Star. 

She ran on and joined Jane Price. 

"What’s the matter with you. Star? You don’t look 
too happy.” 

" Nor would you be if you had a weight on your mind 
which was reducing you to abject misery,” was Star’s 
response. 

"Are you really so fond of Christian?” 

" Who wouldn’t be fond of a girl who was made ill at 


268 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


the school all because she had been unkindly treated — a 
girl who is quite uncommon in herself? I can’t make out 
what is the matter, Jane. I am thoroughly wretched.” 

“ You look it, Star. I never saw your face so per- 
plexed. What were you saying to Maud?” 

“ Giving her a bit of my mind. I don’t like her.” 

“ I like her better than Susan,” whispered Jane in re- 
sponse. “ Well, here we are,” she added as they arrived 
at the well-known gates, “ and I have kept my word : no 
one has spoken to anyone, or done a single thing that 
Miss Peacock would disapprove of.” 

“ Oh, haven’t they? ” said Star to herself; but she was 
silent. 

Just before they all went in to dinner Susan ran up to 
Maud. She took her friend’s hand and spoke eagerly. 

“ Have you done it? ” she whispered. 

“Yes; but I don’t think I have mended matters.” 

“ What do you mean? ” 

“ Star saw me do it.” 

“Maud! Well, you really are the most awkward, 
most incapable Oh, you are a terrible girl I ” 

“ I denied it, but she stuck to it. I just got her not to 
tell Jane Price, but she means to have it out with us both 
this afternoon. We are to meet her in the fourth class 
boudoir, and she means to be there alone. I never saw 
Star so determined. I expect we shall have a fight.” 

“ It seems to me I don’t care about anything,” said 
Susan. “ I think I’ll run away. Father couldn’t turn 
me out if I went home; only I haven’t got enough 
money. Have you any you could lend me, Maud?” 

“ To run away and leave me behind? ” said Maud. 
“Indeed, that I haven’t. Don’t be a goose, Susy; we 
have got to face this thing and pull ourselves through 
somehow. I tell you what.” 

“Yes?” 


THE LETTER 


269 

“ Let us confide in Star; let us tell her just everything. 
It’s about the best thing to do. She’s the sort of girl 
who’d be desperate and cruel if she were kept in the dark; 
but if she knew, why, she mightn’t.” 

“And you want me to tell — me — that I opened her 
purse and took the bill out, and laid the blame on Chris- 
tian. You think she’ll bear it.” 

“ I don’t know,” said Maud. “ It seems to me she’ll 
find out whether you tell her or not. Oh, by the way, 
what is the news of Christian?” 

“The doctor says the crisis will come to-night. 
Jessie is in a fearful state of anxiety. We have none of 
us seen Miss Peacock for a minute to-day. You never 
knew anything like the gloom of the chapel. I cried all 
the time. The other girls quite pitied me. Mr. Dalzell 
preached a. sermon about schoolgirls and their tempta- 
tions. I think Jessie and Miss Peacock must have been 
sneaking and telling him things he ought not to know. 
The girls looked at me a lot. I cried harder than ever. 
Oh, dear! oh, dear! what a wretched creature I am!” 

“ We are all wretched, it seems to me,” said Maud. 
“ The sooner we got out of this depression the better.” 
Susan made, no reply. 

The great gong was not allowed to be sounded that 
day, but Jessie came to say that dinner was ready, and 
the girls marched into the hall. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 

Sunday can be the most delightful or the most 
wretched day in the world. When the heart is at peace, 
when the sun shines brightly, and things are going well, 
how sweet are the golden hours; how joyful and tuneful 
does the church bell sound; how soothing and stimulat- 
ing to the highest part of our nature are the hymns and 
the church services! There is rest all round, and wc 
feel it through and through our natures. 

But there are other Sundays, again, which are just 
as miserable. There is the terrible ache in the heart; 
there is gloom over everything, and the cessation of cus- 
tomary occupations but increases this tenfold. 

Christian, although a comparative stranger in the 
school, was now the one object of interest. She was 
thought of so much that there was little or no time to 
remember anybody else, and but for Star both Susan and 
Maud would have been allowed to have been as miser- 
able and as naughty as they liked without anyone re- 
marking them. 

But Star, as she expressed it afterwards, felt almost 
vindictive that day. All that had gone before, and the 
wretched consequence of her own act of folly and un- 
kindness in believing that Christian was guilty of the 
most disgraceful conduct, now caused her sensitive con- 
^science to accuse her loudly. The best way to relieve her- 
self was to put Christian right. She could only do this 
by forcing Susan and also Maud to confess. Star knew 


270 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


271 


very well that a special and very daring rebellion was to 
take place in the front attic on the following Wednesday. 
Its nature she had not the slightest idea of. She her- 
self, as she said, would no longer be a Penwernian. 
She would not attend the secret meeting. But that did 
not prevent her from being intensely unhappy about it. 
It was on account of that that Christian had broken the 
rules. Christian had been sent to Tregellick and had 
spent her money at Dawson’s shop, and she had brought 
in food, and paid a bill there. Susan and Maud and Mary 
Hillary and Janet Bouverie had incited her to this act of 
rebellion. They were the real culprits; Christian was 
little more than a tool. Ill as Christian now was the 
conspiracy had not ceased to exist. There was no doubt 
whatever on that point. Star did not intend to make 
any more fuss — she was too broken-down for that — 
only she saw Maud with her own eyes knock down the 
prayer-book in church. It had not been done by acci- 
dent; Star’s quick eyes had detected Maud in the act. 
The prayer-book had' been deliberately dropped on the 
floor. This aroused the little girl’s suspicions. She 
saw Maud stoop down, and she herself was obliged to 
leave the pew. She looked back. Maud had risen, and 
she was bending towards a vulgar, showy-looking girl, 
in the pew just in front of her, the very name of whom 
Star did not know; and she gave the girl something — 
something in the nature of a letter. There was no doubt 
of it. 

“ It is the clew to the mystery,” thought Star. “ Now 
I will be firm. Now I intend to be what they call cruel. 
It is the clew to the mystery. I will find out. Christian 
lies at death’s door; she is dependent, perhaps, on me to 
save her life.” 

After dinner Star sped very quickly upstairs. She 
went on tiptoe. When she reached the neighborhood 


272 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


of the White Corridor she took off her shoes. Then she 
glided along towards the door of the sickroom. It was 
very slightly ajar. Star peeped in. It so happened that 
Miss Peacock, who had been up all night, and was now 
worn out with anxiety, lay sound asleep in the arm-chair 
by the fire. Jessie was downstairs having her dinner. 
Neither was the nurse present. Star could look in at 
Christian. And it so happened that Christian looked 
back at Star; and although her face was white as death, 
and there were startling great shadows under her eyes, 
and although that same little face was not only white 
but strangely pinched, she recognized Star, and it 
seemed to Star that her eyes brightened and her lips 
moved in a sort of voiceless appeal. 

This was enough for the little girl. Silently, without 
making the least vestige of noise, she glided across the 
floor and up to the sick girl’s bed. 

“ Darling! ” said Star. 

Now, in all the world there could never be a more 
thrilling voice than Star Lestrange could assume when 
she chose. And the love now in her voice, and the pity, 
and the longing to make reparation penetrated straight 
down to the heart of the girl who was slowly but surely 
drifting out on a nameless tide. 

It seemed to Christian, as she floated and floated on 
that deep, deep sea, that a hand took her and passed 
round her and drew her back and back. She looked up 
at Star, and the faintest of faint smiles awoke in her eyes. 

“ I mean to put everything right,” said Star again; 
and then she said “ Darling! ” once more, and then like 
a feather she brushed Christian’s forehead with her lips, 
and then she left the room. 

Christian lay motionless when Star had left her. What 
had happened? Was there, after all, anything to be very 
sorry about? Why did she drift and drift? The noise 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


273 

as of great waves was in her ears, and her heart beat 
with heavy throbs. What was the matter? After all, 
was it pleasant to drift out away from all the people on 
the shore who beckoned to her to return? Was not 
her father there? And did not his eyes, and his lips, 
and his whole strong presence say, “ Come back to me — 
come back ” ? And mother? Mother was beside him, 
and mother also said, ‘‘ Come back.” And, oh, there 
were other friends, and they seemed to love the girl who 
was drifting away, and they all said, Come back, Chris- 
tian.” But Christian said feebly— oh ! so feebly that her 
words could scarcely be heard even by them — “I go out ; 
it is better to go out.” And then another voice said, 
‘‘ Darling!” 

That voice, so piercing and strong, had a clarion note 
in it; and it seemed to Christian that she stopped drift- 
ing, and that she turned, and strong arms were 
stretched out, and she came back, but so slowly — so 
slowly. 

Little knowing what she had done, and that she had in 
reality saved Christian’s life. Star Lestrange ran down- 
stairs. Her cheeks were burning; her heart was on fire. 
She went straight to the boudoir. 

“ Girls,” she said to one or two of her friends, may 
I have this room to myself for an hour if necessary?” 

“ Of course. Star, dear,” they answered. They loved 
her, and would do anything for her. 

One of the girls wanted to question her, but she re- 
frained. 

“Go away, then,” said Star; “there’s no time to 
be lost.” 

“ How is Christian now? ” asked a girl. 

“ Don’t ask me,” answered Star. 

She entered the pretty little boudoir, placed a couple 
of chairs near the fire, and then waited.^ 


274 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


‘‘They will come; I know they’ll come,” she thought. 
“ I will force them to come. I’ll think of them until they 
must come.’” 

She had never been so determined in the whole course 
of her life before. The fire in her eyes seemed to get 
brighter. After a time she heard footsteps — lingering 
footsteps. Then the curtain was pushed back and the 
face of Susan Marsh looked in. And Susan followed 
her own face into the room, and Maud came behind her. 

“There’s a door,” said Star brieflyj “you had best 
shut it.” 

Maud shut the door. 

“ Now then,” said Star, “ I’m going to get to the bot- 
tom of this, and I have got to be cruel if necessary. I 
don’t mind about either of you, even if it means that 
you are expelled. I want to save Christian, and to put 
her into a position of honor, and I want you two to tell 
me just the very truth.” 

Susan gave a slow laugh. “ You are rather ridicu- 
lous, Star,” she said. “ What do you accuse me of?” 

“ I accuse you,” said Star briefly, “ of having taken my 
purse when Christian was asleep, and of having opened 
it and taken out the little bill which Dawson gave Chris- 
tian when she paid for the goods.” 

“ And why, pray,” said Susan, “ do you accuse me of 
this crime? ” 

“ Because I know you have done it,” said Star. 

“ You are quite mistaken; I did not do it.” 

“ Maud, do you know anything of this? ” said Star. 

“ I know nothing,” said Maud. 

She did know, but she and Susan between them had 
resolved on no account to tell. 

“ Very well,” said Star. “ I thought perhaps you’d 
tell me. I thought it quite the best thing to do. We 
won’t talk any more of this at present.” 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


^75 


Susan looked at her now in some astonishment. This 
was a course of proceeding that she had not expected. 

“ I have another thing to talk of,” continued Star. 
“ You, Maud Thompson, went to church to-day, and 
you knocked down a prayer-book on purpose. I saw 
you take it and fling it on the floor, and then you gave 
a note to a girl — a showy-looking, black-eyed girl — ^who 
sat in the seat before you. You did it, because I 
saw you.” 

“ I did not do it,” said Maud. ^ 

“All right, then; I shall go and speak to the girl 
herself.” 

“ Star!” 

There was an amazed cry from both girls. 

“ I shall go and speak to the girl herself,” repeated 
Star. 

“ You can’t,” said Maud, with a laugh, which in spite 
of herself was extremely nervous, “ for you don’t know 
her name.” 

“ I shall find it out. I am going to her now; don’t 
keep me.” 

Star brushed past the two and left the room. She 
was carried along on a wave of keen excitement. It 
did not matter to her any longer what anybody thought 
of her conduct. Susan, left behind, looked wildly at 
Maud for a minute. 

“ I must stop this at any cost,” she said. “ She 
mustn’t — she daren’t — she shan’t go! ” 

•Out of the boudoir flew Susan. In the passage she 
met Miss Forest. 

“ Oh, Miss Forest, dear, do you mind if we all go for 
a walk? I mean outside the grounds.” 

“What do you mean, Susan? Certainly not. There 
are no teachers to take you to-day. If you wish to walk, 
walk in the grounds. Now, don’t worry me.” 


276 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ Do you mean to say positively that no girl is to go 
outside the grounds to-day?” 

“ I do say it.” 

“No girl? Are there no exceptions? ” 

“None. What nonsense you talk! Any girl who 
goes outside the grounds to-day will be severely 
punished.” 

“ Of what nature will the punishment be, dear Miss 
Forest?” asked Susan. “ Please tell me, for sometimes 
I think a little punishment is worth enduring for the 
sake of the pleasure.” 

“ Really,” said Miss Forest, her eyes flashing, “ the 
insubordination in this school must be put a stop to 
with a firm hand. You, I verily believe, are the ring- 
leader, Susan Marsh. Notwithstanding our anxiety and 
the serious illness of Christian Mitford, I take it upon 
myself to say that the girls who disobeys and leaves the 
school this afternoon will be put into solitary confine- 
ment and not allowed to speak to her schoolfellows for at 
least twenty-four hours.” 

“ Thank you,” said Susan. She dropped a little mock 
courtesy and ran away. s 

Just at that moment Star, in her hat and Jacket, ap- 
peared. Susan, who had gone down the whole length of 
the corridor, now stopped to watch what would happen. 
Miss Forest, terribly aroused, turned to Star. 

“ Where are you going? ” she said. 

“For a walk.” 

“ In the grounds? ” 

“ No,” said Star. “ Please — I wanted to ask your 
permission — please, I want to go into the town.” 

“You can’t go, Stella. I have just said that no girl 
is to leave the grounds to-day.” 

“Oh, please, this is so important!” 

“ I can’t help it. You girls think you are so wise, and 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


277 


you are nothing of the sort. Walk in the grounds, and 
please don’t argue the point. The girl who ventures 
outside without permission shall have twenty-four hours 
of solitary confinement. There now! I am determined; 
I can’t stand this spirit of insurrection any longer.” 

Star said nothing. She moved slowly down the cor- 
ridor. At the corner she saw Susan. 

‘‘Ah! Yah!” said Susan. “I thought I’d take the 
wind out of your sails.” 

“ You have done nothing of the sort,” replied Star. 

She continued to walk steadily along the corridor. 
Presently she reached the end. At the end was a door. 
She opened it and went out. It led into the garden. 
Star walked quickly. Susan came and planted herself 
at the door. Maud stood by Susan’s side. They saw 
Star walk along the garden path, then stop short and 
turn abruptly to her left. 

“ She’s going to defy Miss Forest. Who will believe 
her now? ” said Susan. “ Come, let us watch her, Maud; 
let us watch her.” 

They scampered down the path until they came to the 
place where Star had turned off. They now saw Star 
open the wicket-gate near the lodge and disappear on to 
the high-road. 

“Ah, now we’ve caught her!” said Susan. “Now 
she’s in for it.” 

Meanwhile Star, with the flame of fire which Chris- 
tian’s face had awakened in her heart still blazing 
brightly, pursued her way. 

Wrong! Of course she had not done wrong. She 
had done the only right thing in all the world. 

“ I must bring it home to them,” she thought. “ The 
thing must be explained. There is a serpent in our 
midst. I must get the obnoxious creature out of the 
school.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


278 

She walked faster and faster. Presently she reached 
Tregellick. Then it suddenly occurred to her that she 
did not know the name of the girl to whom Maud had 
given the letter, so she could not get the information 
out of her. But, of course, the little sextoness could tell 
her the name. 

As Star entered the straggling High Street of the 
small town she heard the bell in the gray church-tower 
begin to sound again. There was about to be a service. 
Star felt that she must go to church. This, of course, 
was also strictly against rules, for the girls were not al- 
lowed to go to church in the town unbidden or unaccom- 
panied by an escort. 

“ As it is all disobedience, I may as well disobey thor- 
oughly and find out what I want to find out,” thought 
Star. 

She entered the church. Just as she did so the bell 
stopped. The sextoness motioned to her to go up to 
her own pew, but Star shook her head. 

‘‘ Put me in a pew close to the door; and I want to 
speak to you afterwards',” she said to the woman. 

The woman obeyed. She knew Star well by appear- 
ance, but she wondered to see a Penwerne Manor girl 
out alone. 

The afternoon service was short. Star watched the 
worshipers with ihtentness. How relieved she was 
when she saw the black-haired, dark-eyed girl take pos- 
session of her pew! She came in on this occasion un- 
accompanied by the stout woman who had sat with her 
in the morning. 

By and by the service came to an end. It is to be 
feared that Star did not much attend to her prayers. 
The worshipers filed out. Star fixed her eyes on the 
face of Florence Dixie. Florence was attracted by 
Star, although she did not know the reason, but she was 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


279 


surprised to see her, a Penwerne Manor girl, out alone. 
She longed to stop and speak to her, but of course she 
did not dare. Star, however, had made up her mind . 

Quick as thought she followed the black-eyed girl 
out of church. The girl looked back when she heard 
footsteps coming after her. When she saw Star she 
stopped. 

“ What is the matter? ” she said. 

“ I want to know your name,’^ said Star in a polite 
voice. I hope you won’t think me very rude, but I 
should be greatly obliged to you if you would tell me 
your name.” 

“My name!” said the girl, with a slight laugh. 
“Well, Fm not ashamed of my name; it’s Florence 
Dixie.” 

Star now came up to her side. 

“Where do you live?” she asked. “I am so awfully 
obliged to you for telling me your name; but where do 
you live? ” 

“ You must be a very ignorant girl,” replied Florence, 
“ not to know where I live and who I am. Father is the 
only lawyer in the place. His house is the big brown 
house that you see yonder at the top of the High Street. 
May I ask your name. Miss — Miss ” 

“ My name is Lestrange,” said Stella. “ I live at the 
Manor; I am one of the schoolgirls.” 

“ Oh, of course. Miss Lestrange; I know you by ap- 
pearance quite well. You often come to church. I was 
surprised to see you there this afternoon alone.” 

“Yes; I came out this afternoon alone. I am tired,” 
said Star. 

Quickly a thought flashed into Florence’s brain; 
what a tremendous triumph it would be for her to bring 
this charming, aristocratic-looking young lady home 
to tea. 


28 o 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


I wonder now,” she said, dropping her voice and 
suiting her pace to that of Star, “ if you’d honor us. 
Miss — Miss Lestrange. We are having tea at home 
just now — ^high tea. And my brothers, Rufus and Jas- 
per — they’re such pleasant boys — they’re always at home 
to tea on Sundays. You say you are tired. It’s a good 
long walk back to the Manor; would you honor us by 
having a cup of tea with us? ” 

“ I should be very much obliged,” said Star. 

At another time such a request would have horrified 
her, but it seemed to her now the only means to a de- 
sirable end. 

I am glad; mother will be so pleased,” said Florence. 
“ We all think a great deal of Miss Peacock and her 
wonderful school. Miss — Lestrange.” 

Florence always made a slight pause between “ Miss ” 
and “ Lestrange,” and at another time Star would have 
used her ventriloquist voice and have said just above 
Florence’s startled ear, “ A little faster, please;” but she 
was not in the mood to be funny at this moment, and 
walked in silence by her companion’s side. 

I know I must get her to tell me just by guile,” 
thought the little girl ; and it’s so difficult, and it seems 
to get more difficult each minute.” 

Presently they reached the house. Florence pulled 
the bell, and the door was opened by a rough-looking, 
red-headed boy, who shouted when he saw Florence; 
and then, as he beheld Star’s beautiful, refined little face, 
his own features subsided into a startled grin. 

“ I have brought home a young lady from the Manor,” 
said Florence in her most affected and mincing way. 
“ Are they all at tea, Rufus? ” 

“ Of course we are, Flo. And mother’s ever so cross, 
I can tell you. You had better take the lady up- 
stairs.” 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


281 


‘‘Well, perhaps,’^ said Florence dubiously, looking at 
Star. 

“ Oh, please don’t! ” said Star; “ I can’t wait a minute. 
I can’t really. I’ll just have a cup of tea, as you were 
so very obliging as to ask me, and then perhaps after- 
wards you would walk a little of the way home with me.” 

“ Oh, as to that, Fm sure I’ll be delighted,” said Flor- 
ence. “ You don’t know how I have been longing to 
know you.” 

Just then the dining room door opened and Mrs. 
Dixie put her head out. 

“ Florence, you naughty girl ” she began, but then 

she saw Star and changed her manner. “ Oh, my dear 
child! you are late. And who is your nice little friend? 
Welcome, my dear — welcome.” 

“ Mother,” said Florence, “ this is Miss Lestrange, 
one of the young ladies from the Manor. She was at 
church, and I have invited her home to have a cup 
of tea.” 

“ Honored, I’m sure,” said Mrs. Dixie. “ Come this 
way, miss.” 

She threw the dining room door ojpen and ushered 
Star into a noisy scene. Mr, Dixie was certainly not a 
refined-looking man. He was sitting far back in a 
deep arm-chair, with one rough, spoilt-looking little 
girl on his knee, and another perched upon the arm of 
the chair. 

“ Now, dad,” said one of his small daughters, “ I’m 
going to pull your right whisker.” 

“ And I’m going to pull your left,” said the other. 

When Star came in she saw Mr. Dixie having his 
fiery whiskers violently pulled by the firm, somewhat 
dirty hands of the small girls. 

“ Oh, I say ! let me alone and behave yourselves,” he 
said, dropping them to the ground. 


282 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


They both set up shrieks of indignation, and Star was 
motioned to a chair at the table. 

Here, Robert,” said Mrs. Dixie; “ this is one of Miss 
Peacock’s young ladies. Rufus, do clear a place; brush 
away those crumbs, and then go out to Maria and tell 
her to bring in fresh tea.” 

“ She’s out, mother,” said Rufus, not attempting to 
stir and not removing the crumbs. 

“Oh, dear. I’m so sorry!” said Mrs. Dixie. “We 
look upon it as such an honor having you here, miss. 
We think an immensity of any of the Manor young 
ladies.” 

“ Miss Peacock is one of the finest, proudest, grandest 
women I have eyer met, said Mr. Dixie. “ Have a 
seat, miss. Here, Rufus; go out and bring in some 
more tea.” 

“ I say Maria is out,” said Rufus. “ Who’s to make 
the tea? ” 

“ Make it yourself, and be quick about it.” 

Rufus caught up the family teapot and disappeared 
from the room, banging the door after him. 

“ How is it, dear,” said Mr. Dixie, turning to his 
spouse, “ that we always have ditch-water instead of 
tea on Sunday evenings? ” 

“ Don’t blame me, Robert,” said the good lady. “ It 
isn’t to be wondered at. When eight spoilt children each 
want the strongest and the best, what can be left for a 
stranger? Florence, you might have told us that you 
were going to honor us with Miss Lestrange’s 
company.” 

Poor Star! she had been trying to do her best, but 
it seemed to her that she was getting deeper and 
deeper into hot water each moment. What madness 
had seized her when she had hinted to Florence Dixie 
that she would like to go home with her? Already she 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


283 


had broken a rule of the school — a rule just expressed 
when they were all in trouble, and Miss Peacock was 
specially to be cared for and loved and honored. Oh, 
if she might only go home again! 

After a great deal of squabbling and difficulty, and a 
great many words passing between one Dixie and 
another, a cup of tea which had been made in the 
kitchen was brought in and placed before Star. Scalding 
hot as it was, she drank it off, and then rose hastily to 
say good-by. 

“ I am very much obliged to you,'' she said to Mrs. 
Dixie. 

Mr. Dixie accompanied her to the door; and Florence, 
feeling intensely important, went with her into the 
street. 

“ ril walk all the way back with you if you like, Miss 
Lestrange." 

But Star by no means wished for this. 

“ Surely you would not be allowed to be out so late," 
she said. 

“ Oh, mother wouldn’t mind. I mean, under ordi- 
nary circumstances she'd mind very much; but I can 
assure you she is exceedingly proud that I should know 
you. I know one or two of the girls as it is " 

Here Florence paused and bit her lips. She knew 
that she ought not to have admitted that. 

I know one girl you happen to know," said Star, 
looking at her intently. “ Her name is Maud Thompson. 
She handed you a note to-day after church." 

“ Oh, no, indeed she didn't! " said Florence, instantly 
on the defensive, and determined, as she said after- 
wards to Maud, to guard her at any expense. 

“ I saw her do it. I thought perhaps Oh, I must 

confide in you a little bit. I came to church on purpose. 
I wanted to see you on purpose. Please don’t say what 


284 the manor school 

isn't true. We are in great trouble at the Manor just 
now." 

‘‘Are you?" said Florence. “And do you mean to 
tell me? I can't tell you how I love exciting stories. I 
have always pined to go to a first-class school. Over 
and over again I've said to father, ‘ If only you would 
send me to Miss Peacock's!’ But father thinks Miss 
Peacock too much of a fine lady; he says she's affected.” 

“ No, she isn’t,” said Star. “ She is a lady, that is all.” 

“ What a nice way you have of talking. Miss Le- 
strange! And you are so pretty, too! Oh, I am in- 
terested in you and your school! I don’t mind a bit 
what father says. He is just eaten up with jealousy; 
that’s a fact. If Miss Peacock would employ him as 
her lawyer, father would think her the most delighful 
woman in the world. As it is, of course, he is jealous. 
He’d give his eyes to have me admitted into the school. 
He said so once; he said he'd pay double fees if Miss 
Peacock would have me. Oh, I should so love it! All 
the other girls would be mad with jealousy. Now, there 
are the Manners girls. You don’t know them, do you. 
Miss Lestrange?” 

“ No." 

“ Well, they're not really in our class of life at all. 
r sometimes think it rather trying that I should be ex- 
pected to know them. They are the daughters of that 
greengrocer who owns the huge shop just round the 
corner. Oh, and here they are coming to meet us! 
They’ll want me to introduce you. Do you mind? " 

Star said she did not mind. In her heart of hearts 
she felt that she could scarcely know a more vulgar or 
common girl than Florence. 

“If you will only tell them the truth, that I came to 
church because I wished to speak to you, I don’t mind 
what else you do,” said Star. 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 285 

The Manners girls came up slowly. They were thin, 
with straw-colored hair, very pale complexions, and 
small, weak-looking eyes. They were showily dressed, 
and in some ways looked even more commonplace than 
Florence. When they saw her they made a rush to- 
wards her. Then the younger one drew back a little, 
and it was the elder Miss Manners who came trippingly 
up to the two little girls. 

I have come in person to answer you, Florence. As 
you have got the note — I mean the one Miss Thompson 
gave you ’’ 

“ Oh, hush, hush ! said Florence. She could not 
have grown any paler than she did at that moment. 

Star moved a step or two away from her. 

“ You told me just now ” she began. 

I did — I did! Don’t speak to me for a minute. Miss 
Lestrange. I must walk on with you just to explain 
myself.” 

Can I endure it? ” thought Star. And yet I must, 
for I must find out what has really happened.” 

Of course I got the note,” said Florence the minute 
they were alone; “but I was not going to tell, for poor 
Maudie didn’t wish it. Now you know, however, you 
will take her back a message. Will you say to her that 
I am going to speak to the Mannerses, and if we can we 
will comply with her wishes? You may tell her at the 
same time that we don’t like people who blow both hot 
and cold. The sort of friends we appreciate are those 
who say a thing and do it whatever the consequences. 
You will tell her. Oh, I know you despise me. Some 
day you will understand that a girl of my sort hasn’t a 
chance with a girl of your sort. But, all the same, 
there’s some good in me. I like you just awfully, for 
instance. I think you are sweetly pretty; and you have 
got such — oh, such an air about you! You might be 


286 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


anyone. I know I’ll dream of you to-night; I quite love 
you. You are fifty times nicer than Susan Marsh — al- 
though the Mannerses and I thought a lot of her — or 

than Maud Thompson, or than Oh, dear me! Miss 

Lestrange, I do wish you could get me into your school. 
You don’t know how fine you’d polish me up; you’d 
show me that I ought always to speak the truth and 
everything else. Can't you try?” 

Florence’s bold face looked wonderfully soft at that 
moment, and there were actually tears in her black eyes. 
Star wondered she could speak to her, and yet when she 
looked again she felt touched by the expression on Flor- 
ence’s face. 

“ I am sorry for you, but I can’t promise to — to help 
you to get into the school. All the same, I am sorry. 
You could not, I suppose, let me have that note. I 
wouldn’t read it; I’d just give it back to Maud 
Thompson.” 

My dear child,” replied Florence, her manner in- 
stantly altering, and a hard, flippant tone coming into 
her voice, “I have not told you anything about the 
note. You asked me if I had got one, and I said ‘ No.’ 
The Manners girls gave me away, and I was forced to 
confess that I had told a little white lie. White lies are 
allowable, aren’t they? ” 

“ They are not,” said Star stoutly. 

‘‘ Well, anyhow, they are amongst my set. As to the 
note itself, it was of such small consequence that I tore 
it up. Well, good-by. Glad to see you another day 
when you come to church and want a cup of tea.” 

Star looked back for a moment to where the Man- 
ners girls were standing; then she put wings to her feet 
and ran the rest of the way back to Penwerne Manor. 

“ What did she want? How is it you have got so 
chummy with her? ” said Ethel Manners, turning to 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


287 

Florence. ‘‘You did look upset when we met you! 
And didn’t you blaze up as crimson as anything when 
we spoke of the note ! Did we do wrong to speak of it ? ” 

“ You were just horribly nasty, Ethel,” said Florence. 

You might have known that when I was walking with 
a strange girl you two ought not to intrude. You don’t 
know your places, and that’s a fact.” 

“ We’re every bit as good as you are, Florry,” said 
Emma. “ It was only yesterday father said that your 
father and he used to chum together at the same school, 
but that he had pennies in his pocket and your father 
had none. Don’t be a goose, Florry. Let’s walk arm- 
in-arm. Wouldn’t you like to come in and have a bit 
of supper? Aunt Phoebe said if we met you we might 
ask you. And there are sweetbreads for supper, and 
fried liver and bacon. You know how fond you are of 
those things.” 

So I am,” said Florence; “and I had such a 
wretched tea. It’s awfully uncomfortable at home on 
Sunday; the kids make such a row all over the house. 
Our servant is out, and there’s no one to look after 
anything.” 

“ Well,” said Emma, “ Aunt Phcebe looks after things 
for us, and she loves something hot for supper. She’s 
going to make pancakes, too; and we can have toasted 
cheese afterwards if we like.” 

“ Oh, yes, and we can make coffee,” said Ethel. “ We 
are going to have a real jolly time. Will you come? — 
for if you don’t, we’ll ask Mary Ann Pomfret.” 

Mary Ann Pomfret was the one girl in the whole of 
Tregellick whom Florence detested. 

“ You can please yourself,” she said. “ I won’t come 
near you if you have Mary, but I’d love to come to you 
alone. Your place always seems so comfy on Sundays.” 

“Then let’s walk arm-in-arm,” said Emma; and she 


288 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


ran round to Florence’s left side, and Ethel took hold 
of her other arm, and in this fashion they walked up the 
Hi^h Street. 

** I call it specially mean,” said Ethel, “ after we have 
made those lovely cakes and prepared all those things 
to give Susan and the other girls a right good time. 
There can be no earthly excuse in their not having us. 
Just because a girl — and a new girl — happens to be 
a bit ill.” 

But they say she is very ill,” said Florence. “ She 
was prayed for in church twice to-day. What do you 
mean to do, Ethel? ” 

Go, of course,” said Ethel. 

“ Do you really mean it? ” 

“ Certainly I do. I’m going. Aren’t you, Emma? ” 
ril do whatever you do, Ethel,” replied the youn- 
ger sister. 

Then I have a good mind to join you,” said Flor- 
ence. “ You know, to tell the truth. I’m not specially 
taken with Susan Marsh. I don’t think she’s a bit bet- 
ter than we are, only she just puts on airs because she’s 
a Manor girl. Perhaps Maud Thompson is a wee bit 
better. But what a beautiful girl that was I walked 
with to-day — Miss Lestrange! She must be quite the 
beauty of the school. Hasn’t she eyes like stars? And 
such a refined, sweet little face! She’s very pretty; and 
oh, she’s fetching!” 

“ She’s a perfect beauty,” said Emma. 

“I don’t say she’s as good-looking as all that;” said 
Ethel ; but she is handsome, and has what I call an 
air about her.” 

** She’s very different from Susan Marsh,” said Flor- 
ence. I could be good to please a girl like that. I 
am sure she would hate our going to the school on 
Wednesday.” 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


289 


“Did she say anything about it?’^ 

Not a word; only she was awfully bothered about 
that note. I can^t imagine why she should come sneak- 
ing round after it, as it were; but she did, and she looked 
so piteous when she asked me to give it back to her, and 
I had it snug in my pocket all the time. But of course 
I couldn’t give it to her; it would be hard on poor 
Maud.” 

“ So it would,” said Ethel. “ Well, here we are at 
home now. Aunt Phoebe will soon begin to fry the / 
supper. I do feel starving! ” 

Ethel let herself and her companions into the house 
with a latchkey. They passed the great shop where the 
vegetables were sold, and the huge appleroom where 
the fruits were kept from Saturday night to Monday 
morning. Up the narrow stairs they went, until at 
last they found themselves in a broad, low, cheerful sort 
of room — a nondescript room, with a thick red felt car- 
pet on the floor, and heavy red curtains to the windows, 
and a laughing, cheerful, blazing fire in the grate. Flor- 
ence gave a sigh of relief. 

“ It is peaceful here,” she said. “ I wish we had a 
room of this sort at home.” 

After the girls had eaten their supper, they put their 
heads together and had a long and earnest consultation 
as to what they were to do with regard to the girls at 
Penwerne Manor. There was little doubt that they 
were all intensely disappointed. The Manor had seemed 
to them, ever since they could remember anything, as a 
sort of earthly paradise; the girls who walked in twos 
up and down the sheltered, cloister-like enclosures, the 
girls who came to church at Tregellick Sunday after 
Sunday, the girls who occasionally rode over the neigh- 
boring moors, the girls who went to the seashore in 
the summer and enjoyed themselves bathing or in little 


290 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


boats in the harbor, were all girls of a superior degree 
to those commonplace children in the town of Tregel- 
lick. They adored them; they envied them. The chance 
of getting into their midst was a golden and dazzling 
prospect, and they were intensely loath to give it up. 
It was Emma at last who seemed to come to a satisfac- 
tory decision. 

“I tell you what,” she said; “Susan has bound her- 
self to receive us. We have put money into this thing; 
we have arranged to bring a good deal of the feast our- 
selves. Susan owes me seven and six ” 

“ And me five shillings,” said Florence. 

“ And she has borrowed my best sash,” said Ethel. 
“ She said she would be very careful of it, and let me 
have it back at the first opportunity.” 

“ I wonder you lent it to her,” said Emma. 

“She had such a coaxing way, and she said she 
wanted it so badly. In short, she made it a sort of 
condition with regard to giving us this pleasure.” 

“ Oh, never mind that sort of thing now,” said Flor- 
ence impatiently. I’ll have to go back home very 
shortly or Rufus will be coming thundering round, mak- 
ing no end of a fuss. What shall we do, girls? That 
is the question. This is Sunday night; Wednesday is no 
way off at all. Are we to go and enjoy ourselves, or are 
we to meekly sit down and give up our bit of fun?” 

“ What do you think?” said Emma. 

“ I think we ought to go. I shouldn’t hesitate a mo- 
ment, only that poor Miss Lestrange looked so plead- 
ing, and she seems really fond of the sick girl. And if 
father found out by any chance that we’d been kicking 
up a rumpus in a house where a girl was dangerously 
ill, why, he’d never forgive me.” 

It was at that moment that Emma Manners came to 
the rescue with her dazzling suggestion. 


THE CLEW TO THE MYSTERY 


291 


‘‘Well, don't let us go," she said. “Let us invite 
Susan Marsh, Maud Thompson, and the dear Miss 
Lestrange to have supper with us. Wouldn’t that be 
jolly, girls? Let us give up all idea of the attic, and in- 
vite them to have supper with us here, and keep it a 
secret from everybody. We could have a gay time." 

“ But I couldn’t come," said Florence. “ How could 
I manage it?" 

“ Easily, for we’ll ask you here to spend the night. 
Bless you! there’d be nothing secret about our supper. 
Father would be as pleased as Punch; and Aunt Phoebe 
will prepare such a meal! Then we’ll be able to reflect 
all the remainder of our days on the delightful fact that 
we invited three of the Manor girls to supper, and were, 
in short, hail fellows well met." 

“ It does seem rather brilliant, and a good way out of 
the difficulty," said Florence. “ Of course, it isn’t as 
thrilling* as creeping up by the garden wall, and getting 
down by a ladder at the other side, and then sneaking Up 
by a ladder again just under the attic window, and creep- 
ing in, and finding the girls waiting for us and delighted 
to welcome us; but it is better than no fun at all." 

“ What I say is this," continued Emma : “ when we 
have succeeded in bringing these girls here, Miss Pea- 
cock may be inclined to relax her rule, and to allow us 
to join the Penwerne Manor girls at their lessons." 

“ Don’t you imagine that for a single instant," said 
Florence. “When I talked to-day to Star — oh, bless 
you ! I don’t call her Star to her face — she said we hadn’t 
a chance. No, there’s no chance of that; but it would be 
fun to know them. Now I must be off. How is the 
note to get there? ’’ 

“They always send to father’s shop for vegetables," 
said Emma. “ We’ll give a note to Joseph, and tell him 
to bribe their man, Edwards, to give it into Susan’s 


293 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


hands somehow to-morrow. Now then, who’ll write the 
note?” 

'‘You’d better write it,” said Florence; “you’ve got 
a better scribble than I have.” 

Emma, feeling very conceited and important, seated 
herself by a table and wrote the following words: 

“ Dear Susan Marsh, Maud Thompson, and Star 
Lestrange ” [“ Don’t I feel grand, talking to them by 
their Christian names? ” thought the girl as she finished 
this portion of her letter, bending forward and squig- 
gling her tongue into her cheek as she proceeded] : 

“ We are awfully sorry we can’t have our fun, but sick- 
ness has to be respected. We’ll agree to say nothing 
about it if you three will come and have supper with 
us on Wednesday night. You can easily manage, and 
we’ll manage to get you home without any trouble. You 
see, the ladder that you were placing for us will do for 
yourselves, and you can get in by the attic window and 
creep to bed. Anyhow, that’s your affair. Our affair is 
that you have got to come or my father and Florence’s 
father will make a shindy, and then there will be — oh, yes, 
I can’t help being vulgar— the fat in the fire. You will 
come, all three of you, and have supper with us here; 
and won’t we give you a right jolly feast! Your affec- 
tionate friend, Emma Manners. 

“ P. S . — If you come, we’ll do everything in our power 
to help you three girls to hide up the fact that you were 
out once in a while in the middle of the night.” 

Emma’s letter was much commented on and approved 
of by her companions. Finally, Florence went back to 
her own house, feeling that, on the whole, supper at the 
Mannerses’ might be as amusing and instructive and 
fascinating as even the stolen feast in the front attic. 


CHAPTER XXVII 

god's will 


When Star reached home that evening she found the 
whole place in a sort of hush. Christian was asleep, 
and on that sleep all her future hung. If she awakened 
with her fever gone she would be extremely weak, but 
with great care she might be pulled through. The doc- 
tor himself sat by her bedside, his hand on her feeble, 
fluttering pulse. Miss Peacock also was in the room, 
and the professional nurse and Jessie occupied another 
of the white rooms just beyond. There was intense 
emotion all over the house. No one thought at that 
moment of anyone but the girl who lay, as it were, in 
the shadow of death. She was loved then as she had not 
been loved during her days of health. Each girl, as she 
sat with her companion, had something to say with re- 
gard to Chrisitan Mitford. One girl noticed how ex- 
pressive were her/ eyes, and another said that she 
looked a perfect lady. Her class-mates were unani- 
mous, too, in remarks with regard to her talents: she 
was so forward in all her studies; she was so imaginative; 
she wrote such brilliant little papers. Then her voice 
had such a magical quality in it; it stirred the heart; 
particularly when she read. 

Some of the teachers who were resident in the house 
also stood and talked of the sick girl. “ She would 
have done us credit," said Miss Forest. Professor 
French said he never heard a girl of her age read Para- 
dise Lost as she did. He was very much impressed 


»93 


294 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


with her; he said she had the dramatic quality to 
a remarkable degree. Well, well, it does seem 
sad!” 

The teachers were evidently under the impression that 
Christian would not get well; but the girls — at least 
the greater number of them — could not bring themselves 
to believe this possible. Most of the girls had never 
seen death; consequently it seemed to them that to die 
one must be ill much longer, must suffer much more 
acute pain. They spoke in their ignorance, but all the 
same they acknowledged to a frightened fluttering at 
their hearts; and when one by one they stole upstairs to 
bed, they crept past Christian's room as though they 
might meet her ghost on the landing. 

By and by Susan herself went up to bed. Star had 
not said a word to Susan since her return. Susan had 
not dared to question as to what had befallen Star when 
she went out. The act of disobedience was of no mo- 
ment just then to the girls. Star was glad of this. She 
was so troubled and terrified about Christian that she 
forgot that she had been disobedient; she only regretted 
the time she had been absent from the house. 

Susan as she went upstairs touched Maud on the 
shoulder. 

I can’t sleep alone to-night,” she said; “ I should be 
frightened. Come and sleep with me, Maud.” 

Maud got up quietly. “ As you like,” she said. 

“ Oh, dear girls! ” said Jessie as they were passing the 
refectory, “ I know you are feeling it very much, all of 
you, but you mustn’t break down; that would be the 
worst thing in all the world. I have got a lot of beautiful 
hot cocoa in jugs waiting for you. Come in and have a 
cup each.” 

“ We may as well,” said Susan, who^ seldom or never 
lost her appetite. She and Maud drank off a cup apiece 


GOD^S WILL. 


*95 

of the nourishing, delicious drink, and Susan took up a 
thick piece of bread and butter. A few other girls fol- 
lowed her example, but the greater number shook their 
heads sorrowfully. 

Jessie stood by the fire; her eyes were red and sunken, 
and her eyelids much swollen. 

“ Is she very, very bad? ’’ said Susan at last. 

Jessie gave her head a dismal shake. 

The doctor says she gets weaker and weaker.” 

“ Is there no hope, then? ” asked Maud, with terror in 
her voice. 

“Oh, Maud! I don’t know; I can’t tell. All I know 
is that she can scarcely be worse and live ; but the doctor 
does say that while there is life there is hope. That’s 
about all.” 

“Oh, dear!” said Maud. She clutched Susan’s 
hand. 

They were just leaving the room when Jessie called 
them back. 

“We are all going to pray that God may spare her,” 
said Jessie. “There are to be prayers at midnight in 
the chapel. Any girl who likes to come will be welcome. 
Miss Peacock will be there, and she has asked Mr. Dal- 
zell to come and pray with us.” 

“ I don’t think I’d care to go,” said Susan; “ that sort 
of thing frightens me very much.” 

Jessie said ho more, and as Susan and Maud stole 
upstairs they saw other girls standing about in 
knots. 

“Did you hear about the prayers in the chapel?” 
asked one. 

“ Yes,” said Maud. 

“Are you going? ” asked a girl of Susan. 

“ No; not for all the world,” said Susan. “ It would 
terrify me into my grave.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


296 

She went upstairs, and Maud followed her. When 
they reached Susan's room Susan turned the key in the 
lock. 

Now then, thank goodness we’re safe! ” she said. 
“We’ll get into bed and cover our heads up with the 
bedclothes, and pray that we may sleep all night. I’m 
horribly frightened. Aren’t you, Maudie? ” 

“ I think I’m more sorry than frightened,” said Maud. 
“ I wish we hadn’t been so dreadful to her.” 

“ Maud,” said Susan, raising her voice to a pitch of 
agony, “you dare talk of that to-night? Why, it will 
drive me mad.” 

“But why did we do it, Susan? But for that she 
wouldn’t be so ill.” 

“ I don’t believe you. Her illness has nothing to do 
with us. Oh, do let us get into bed! It is so dreadful 
to be up when that may be coming into the house.” 

“Death, you mean?” said Maud. “I never saw 
death.” 

“ I did,” said Susan, “ when my mother died. But 
that was a long time ago ; I can scarcely remember it.” 

“ I don’t want to see anyone who is dead,” said Maud. 

“ Of course, you needn’t see her — I mean if she does 
die. I wish father would send for us both. I have a 
good mind to write to him to-morrow. This is horrible; 
it makes me forget even that dreadful Wednesday. 
Thank goodness, Florence did get that note! But we 
won’t worry about that now. Isn’t it a comfort that 
the precious immaculate Star should have put her foot 
in it? She did', didn’t she, when she went deliberately 
and broke Miss Peacock’s command — and just when 
Miss Peacock was in such trouble?” 

“Oh, yes,” said Maud; “but I don’t like thinking of 
people getting into trouble to-night. 1 feel sort of re- 
pentant. Don’t you Susan? ” 


GOD*S WILL 


297 


“ Not ir 

** You are hard, Susan. Do you mean to say you 
are not sorry that we have been so cruel to Chris- 
tian? ’’ 

Fm determined not to think of it,’’ said Susan. 
“ There now, Fm in bed,” she continued, springing under 
the bedclothes as she spoke. “ Let’s be quick and 
put out the lights, and let’s be quite still and go to 
sleep.” 

Meanwhile the rest of the girls, whose whole hearts 
were full of Christian and her serious illness, congre- 
gated in the chapel at the hour of midnight. The ser- 
vice was short, but very impressive. It consisted of 
nothing more than an earnest — most earnest — prayer 
from Mr. Dalzell that God would spare the young life 
now hovering on the brink of eternity; that He would 
do this for the sake of her parents, for the sake of her 
mistresses, and for the sake of her schoolfellows; also 
for her own sake. 

‘‘ But perhaps,” said Mr. Dalzell as he rose from his 
knees — “ perhaps, my dear girls, it may be the will of 
God not to spare the life of Christian Mitford. It may 
be possible that her death may be just the most beauti- 
ful thing for her. I understand that the crisis will come 
to-night. The doctor says that she cannot continue in 
her present condition many hours longer. We shall 
know, therefore, the best or the worst in the morning; 
and even if it should be God’s will to take that bright 
young spirit to Himself, you will remember, my dear 
girls, that there is goodness in His severity, and a 
Father’s heart; and, beneath the terrible sorrow, a Hand 
of Love. Girls, it is your first experience— your very 
first — that so loving a Hand may have to deal the blow; 
but nevertheless I hope you will trust in the Heavenly 
Father.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


998 

Star was sobbing bitterly, as were also several of the 
other girls. 

“ Go to your rooms now,” said Miss Peacock. 
“ Your attitude to-night will be one long prayer that 
God’s will may be done, and also that His judgment may 
be tempered with mercy.” 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


GOOD NEWS 

Early on the following morning a little figure in white 
might have been seen gliding from room to room all 
along the corridors v/here the Penwerne Manor girls 
slept. Softly door after door was opened and the little 
woman went in. She stood by the beds where the girls 
slept, and touched each young sleeper lightly on the 
shoulder. In many cases the girls were not asleep at 
all, but in others fatigue and sorrow had made them 
sleep soundly. To each and all Jessie had the same mes- 
sage to give : 

“ Christian is better. The crisis is past. The doctor 
now hopes that she will live.’’ 

The untold relief of her words brought a look of 
rapture to some faces, and sudden tears, which joy 
brought forth, to others. 

Little Jessie went last to Star’s room. She knew that 
in the whole of that house no one felt more keen anxiety 
than Star Lestrange. Jessie felt that she could stay with 
Star for a minute or two when she had given her mes- 
sage to the rest of the school. 

When she opened the door Star was up. She turned 
quite a haggard face towards the little woman. 

“ Why, Star, my dear,” said Jessie, haven’t you been 
to bed all night?” 

‘"No,” replied Star; “I couldn’t sleep. I sat by the 
window, and then I knelt by the window, and then — and 

then Oh, Jessie, is she dead? Tell me the worst; 

don’t keep me in suspense. Is she dead, Jessie? ” 


299 


300 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


'' No, Star. I have good news for you. Oh, my 
child, don’t give way!” 

For Star had suddenly flung herself face downwards 
on her little bed, and with arms outstretched over the 
bedclothes, had given way to a burst of uncontrollable 
tears. 

“ She will live,” said Star, amongst her choking sobs. 
‘‘ Oh! tell me what the doctor says.” 

“She is better. She slept until three this morning; 
then she awoke with the fever gone, looking very calm, 
but, oh, so weak! We gave her nourishment by spoon- 
fuls, and she fell asleep again. The doctor has gone home 
for a couple of hours; he will be back soon after ten 
o’clock. Of course, her state is terribly precarious; but 
now Dr. Tarbut thinks there is every reason to hope.” 

“ Yes, she will live now/’ said Star. She rose sud- 
denly to her feet. “ Thank you, Jessie,” she said. 

She ran up to the little woman, flung her arms round 
her neck, and kissed her passionately. 

“I love you, Jessie. You know it, don’t you?” 

“ I do. Star. And if you could only guess how I love 
you!” 

“ You love us all. You are a sort of guardian angel 
in the school. Sometimes I think you are even nicer 
and more beloved than our dear Miss Peacock. How 
is she this morning? ” 

“ She looks bad, but she is keeping up wonderfully. 
The relief of this change for the better in Christian is 
doing her more good than any medicine.” 

“Can I do anything to help, Jessie?” 

“ I was going to speak to you about that. Star. There 
will naturally be a sort of reaction in the school to-day. 
The girls suffered severely yesterday, and Miss Peacock 
is the last person in the world to forget that fact. She 
says that there will only be morning lessons, and even 


GOOD NEWS 


301 

these are to be of a very light and easy character. In the 
afternoon you are all to go for drives. Miss Peacock 
has ordered wagonettes to be sent round for the pur- 
pose. Tlien she wishes you to go to bed early to-night. 
To-morrow, of course, the ordinary routine will pre- 
vail.’’ 

'' That is just like Miss Peacock,” replied Star. 

Her face did not brighten as she thought of the pro- 
gramme. Again she laid her hand on Jessie’s shoulder. 

‘‘What can I do to help?” 

“ We don’t have monitresses in this school,” said 
Jessie, “ but if you would act as one in your own class 
and amongst the girls of the third division ” 

“ Oh, amongst those girls ! ” said Star. 

Do you object, dear? ” 

“ I object to nothing, Jessie; but you know the girls 
who are in the third class — Susan, Maud, Janet, Mary. 
I don’t like them. I have quarreled with them now, 
too.” 

“ But you will not think of yourself to-day. Star.” 

“ Indeed — indeed I will not. Don’t stay now; you have 
plenty to do. Trust me to strain every nerve to help 
you and dear Miss Peacock.” 

“ I will tell her so. Star. I will give her your mes- 
sage. I can scarcely tell you how she trusts you. She 
said this morning, ‘ Get Star Lestrange to help. You 
know how fond she is of the Sixth Form girls.’ She 
says that you can be more useful than any of the others 
to-day. You will do your best, won’t you. Star?” 

Jessie left the room, and Star flung herself again on 
her knees. She uttered a brief, passionate, earnest 
prayer; a cry of pure thanksgiving rose from her heart. 
Then, finishing her toilet, she ran downstairs. 

The relief in the school was intense; each girl looked 
softened and inclined to be amiable. The knowledge, 


302 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


too, that they were to go for a long drive was highly 
appreciated. Depressed spirits were lifted again on the 
wings of hope; in short, the girls became themselves 
once more. 

Lessons went on without any special interruption or 
any special event occurring. No music was permitted, 
but the ordinary work proceeded with ordinary satiS' 
faction. The doctor’s carriage, however, caused a flutter 
in the breasts of many of the girls. Star looked at the 
girls of her own class, and also at the girls of the third 
class. Suddenly she rose. 

“ He is going now,” she said; ‘‘ but I mean to be very 
bold. I mean to go into the entrance-hall and question 
him.” 

There was an attempt at clapping hands under the 
tables; but at the word “ Hush! ” from Miss Forest the 
girls refrained. 

Star, where are you going? ” said her teacher. 

“ I want to ask Dr. Tarbut how Christian is,” was 
Star’s response. 

Miss Forest’s face showed that she longed to hear as 
much as the girls did. She made no remark, and Star 
ran into the hall. 

“ How is she? ” asked the little girl. 

The doctor was just putting on his overcoat. He 
turned kindly towards her. 

Why, Miss ” 

“ My name is Star — Star Lestrange,” said the child. 

“And you are anxious?” 

“ We are all anxious,” said Star. “ Please let me 
know the very, very truth.” 

“ It is this. Miss Star,” said the doctor, and he put his 
hand on her shoulder. “ This is the very, yery truth. 
Your friend is doing first-rate. Now, remember she 
must not be startled; she must be kept absolutely quiet. 


GOOD NEWS 


303 

You must all recollect that there is a sick girl in the 
house, and you must on no account do anything to dis- 
turb her rest. She will be sleeping on and off the whole 
of the day, and very likely to-morrow, and for several 
days to come; and if no one disturbs her, I have not the 
slightest doubt that she will be quite well in a short time. 
But don’t forget my message to you and the other girls : 
no noise, please.” 

“ I’d cut my tongue out before I’d make any noise,” 
said Star; and then she flashed a grateful, beautiful 
glance into the doctor’s face, and ran back to her 
fellows. 

Her news gave intense relief, and when the hour of 
recess came Christian was certainly the heroine, for no 
one else was talked about. 

Morning lessons had come to an end; there was to be 
a hasty lunch, and then the girls were to start on their 
drive. The day was a most beautiful one for the time of 
the year, and they were all in good spirits. 

Just as they were assembling in the hall, waiting for 
the wagonettes to come up, one of the servants, a house- 
maid who had been only a very short time at the Manor, 
darted into their midst and thrust a note into Susan 
Marsh’s hand. The teachers were not present. 

Susan grabbed the note, turned white, and thrust it 
into her pocket. Star had Seen the transaction. She 
had not intended to drive in the same wagonette with 
Susan ; she was looking forward to a peaceful time with 
Louisa Twining and some of her own special friends; 
but now she changed her mind. 

The wagonettes came up, and Star pushed herself to 
the front. 

'' I am monitress,” she said. Will you. So-and-so, 
and So-and-so ” — she mentioned a few names — “ get 
into th^t wagonette?'^ 


3^4 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


The wagonette was quickly filled. It drove a little 
way down the avenue to wait for the others. The next 
wagonette came up and also received, its load of girls, 
and finally the fourth and last arrived at the door. 

“ Come along, Susan,” said Star. 

“ What! are you going to drive with us? ” said Susan. 

Yes,” answered Star. 

Susan got in, looking sulky. Soon the wagonette 
was filled. Star jumped in last, banged-to the door, and 
told the driver to start. 

They reached their destination, a beautiful ruin about 
eight miles away, examined it to their hearts’ content, 
had tea in a cottage near, where such things were sup- 
plied to visitors, and finally were about to start home, 
when Star went up to Susan and touched her on the 
arm. 

“Read your note,” she said brusquely. 

“ My note?” 

“Don’t be silly, Susan; I saw Ellen give it to you. 
Read it; I want to know the contents.” 

“What possible affair is it of yours?” 

“ I mean to make it my affair,” said Star. “ You had 
best be quick about it. You know I disobeyed yester- 
day.” 

“ You did, and a fine row you’ll get into. Oh, you 
immaculate girl, whom Miss Peacock thinks so much 
of! I can open her eyes.” 

“I can explain things to Miss Peacock,” said Star; 
“ but that is neither here nor there. I am prepared to 
suffer if I have done wrong. But, Susan, my wrong- 
doing won’t put yours right. You are in a very serious 
position at this moment, and you had best let me help 
you.” 

“ Help me? ” said Susan. “ Do you mean to? ” 

“ I will tell you presently. Read your letter.” 


GOOD NEWS 


305 


I— I won’t.” 

“ Very well. Perhaps you will when I have spoken a 
little longer. Yesterday evening I went home to tea 
with Florence Dixie.” 

You did? Well, I never! ” 

‘‘ I had tea with her, and she walked back with me 
part of the way. I asked her to tell me if you had sent 
her a note. She denied it.” 

Of course she did, for I never sent her any note.” 

“Just wait a while, Susan, before you tell any more 
lies. Well, she and I were talking together, when those 
interesting friends of yours, the Mannerses, came up. 
They immediately spoke to Florence about the note that 
she had received. I can bring them forward as witnesses 
if necessary. That’s about all for the present. Maud did 
deliver a note to Florence Dixie, and I can bring wit- 
nesses to prove it.” 

Susan turned very white. “ Really Star,” she said, 
“ I can’t imagine why I have put up with your inter- 
ference.” But though she said the words in a defiant 
tone, she was a good deal shaken and very much 
alarmed. “ You surely don’t want to make mischief 
now,” she said — “ now, when she is better.” 

“ Susan,” said Star very earnestly, “ do you know 
why I was so awfully wretched last night?” 

“ Were you wretched? I didn’t know it.” 

“Oh, Susan! I could not sleep; I could not rest. I 
felt — oh, I can’t tell you how I felt! But it was — it was 
almost like hell, Susan. And do you know what made 
me most unhappy of all? It was the feeling that if she 
died, you, Susan Marsh, would be in a way responsible 
for her death.” 

“ Oh, how dare you say so? ” 

“Yes, Susan, you would. I am not angry now; I 
am just awfully miserable when I think about you. 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


306 

Can’t you repent? Can’t you be sorry? Can’t you 
thank God for being so good to you? Oh, if — if she had 
died!” 

Star’s melodious voice, and Star’s lovely eyes, and the 
pathos on the sweet little face were not altogether lost 
upon Susan Marsh at that moment. Without daring to 
tell herself so, she too had been in terror the night be- 
fore; but the difference between her state and Star’s was 
this — ^that Star was sorry because she had done wrong, 
while Susan was sorry because she feared punish- 
ment. 

Read your note,” said Star, suddenly altering her 
tone and speaking with asperity; and Susan, contrary to 
her own inclination, took the note out of her oocket and 
read Emma Manners’ words. When she had read the 
letter she handed it to Star. 

‘‘ It seems to concern you too. Star,” she said. “ I 
suppose it is the best way out. I have to explain to the 
girls. They have been looking forward to something 
very special on Wednesday. I must tell them that 
on account of Christian’s illness our special feast has 
been deferred. You will come, of course.” 

‘‘ I! What do you take me for? ” 

“But you will. Star; you will have to. There’s no 
other way to keep the thing dark.” 

“ Do you suppose I mean to keep it dark? ” 

“Star! Star!” 

“ Do you suppose it for a single moment, Susan?” 

Miss Forest’s voice was calling to the girls: 

“ Come, girls; no more loitering. We must get back 
into our wagonettes and drive home or we shall be over- 
taken by the dusk.” 

Star and Susan were obliged to postpone any further 
conversation, but as Susan was getting into the wagon- 
ette she turned to her companion. 


GOOD NEWS 


307 


“We must fight this thing out/^ said. “ Where, 
and when? ” 

“ In my room to-night,” said Star without a moment’s 
hesitation. 

Susan nodded and got into the wagonette. Star was 
relieved to find that she could get into another of the 
carriages on her way home. She sat near her special 
friend Angela Goring. 

“ Why, Star, you don’t look a bit well,” said Angela. 

“ Angel,^’ replied Star, “ if you were going through 
exactly what I am at this present moment you would 
not look well either.” 

“ You are bothered by that horrid girl.” 

“ I am very nearly as bad myself,” said Star. 

“ You?” 

“ Yes ; I behaved abominably to that poor child. Yes- 
terday I did wrong too.” 

“ Oh! don’t talk quite so loud; the others will hear.” 

“ Then let us whisper together, Angel, for I must re- 
lieve my mind.” 

“Well, what is it?” 

“ In order to discover something about Susan, I dis- 
obeyed Miss Peacock. She said none of us were to 
leave the ground's. She sent a message. I heard the 
message delivered, and I went right away — right through 
the garden, and down by the left walk, and out onto the 
high-road. I was away for some hours^, and I even had 
tea with one of the town girls. Think of that! I got 
home rather late. Of course no one noticed.” 

“We were all so anxious last night. But why did 
you do it? I must say you puzzle me a good deal.” 

“ I did it; and what is more, I am not sorry. What 
I am sorry about is that I ever took that cruel attitude 
towards dear Christian.” 

Angela did not say anything more for a few minutes, 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


308 

but from time to time, as they were driving back through 
the sweet spring air, she glanced at Star. Star’s piquant 
face was pale; her lashes were lowered; she looked in- 
tensely sad. Suddenly Angela bent towards her. 

“Can I help you?” she asked. “Is there anything 
I can do? You know how much I love you.” 

“ And I love you, Angel.” She thought for a minute. 
“ I may want a witness to-night,” she said suddenly. “ I 
know Jessie won’t be too particular. This is. a sort of 
half-holiday, and we may do things we are not allowed 
to do on ordinary occasions. I have asked Susan Marsh 
to meet me in my room to-night. Will you be present 
also?” 

“ Certainly, if it will help you.” 

“ It may help me. It may be wiser. I’ll let Susan 
know, and she can bring a friend of hers. Of course, 
she ought to bring Maud Thompson. I’ll take care that 
she does. Now, let’s talk of other matters, Angel. At 
ten o’clock to-night in my bedroom.” 

Angela squeezed Star’s hand. Another girl joined in 
the conversation, and to hear Star’s merry laugh during 
the remainder of that drive, one could scarcely guess 
what a weight rested on her heart. 


CHAPTER XXIX 


ROSE TO THE RESCUE 

At an early hour on the following day there was an 
arrival at Penwerne Manor. An old woman got out of 
a cab and entered the house. She was accompanied by 
a pretty-looking little girl. This old woman was met in 
the hall by Jessie. 

“That’s right,” said Jessie. “ Fm so^glad you have 
come. Christian is much better, and I am sure your 
face and the face of this dear little girl will be the best 
possible restorative.” 

The woman gave a very respectful courtesy. 

“ Mind your manners. Rosy,” she said to the small 
girl, who dropped a courtesy in exact imitation of her 
relative; and then they went upstairs. 

Girls peeped out at them from behind doors not quite 
tightly shut, and soon it was repeated all over the school 
that Christian Mitford’s old nurse had come to look after 
her, and that a wonderfully pretty little girl of the name 
of Rosy had come to help nurse and to cheer Christian 
up. 

Nurse and Rosy had a room all to themselves in the 
White Corridor, and Christian smiled when she saw old 
nurse, and allowed Rosy to kiss her once or twice. But 
she was still too weak to s-a,^ak much; or indeed, for 
that matter, to think much. * 

Rosy was very much admired by all the different girls 
in the school, and when a day or two had passed, and 
Christian still made rapid progress towards recovery, 
Rose was invited downstairs. 

309 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


3*0 

“ May we have that dear little girl to play with us?” 
asked Star, going into Miss Peacock’s room,. 

“ Yes, dear; certainly. Rose is an old friend of Chris- 
tian’s, and seems quite a nice child. I believe her great- 
aunt wants to have her trained as a lady’s-maid. Of 
course, I know nothing about her, except that she be- 
longs to that particularly nice, intelligent old woman.” 

“ Well, a little talk with her will do us no harm,” said 
Star; ‘'and perhaps,” she added, “it will do Rose no 
harm either. She is quite as good as some of the girls 
in this school, and very much prettier.” 

“ By the way. Star,” continued the head-mistress, “ in 
the great relief that Christian’s recovery has caused, I 
have not forgotten certain things that have taken place 
in this school. There are one or two matters which 
need inquiry into. Your cheeks, my dear, are a great 
deal paler than they ought to be; and your eyes, which 
used to be so happy that it was a perfect pleasure to 
look at them, are now more sad than I like to see them. 
In short, there are matters which need to be inquired 
into and cleared up.” 

“ Oh, there are — indeed there are! ” interrupted Star, 
and she burst into tears. 

“ My dear Stella, have you made up your mind to 
confide in me or not? ” 

“ I don’t want to be hard on the others; and then I’ve 
not been a bit good myself,” said Star. “ If I could 
tell you everything without making the others dread- 
fully wretched, I would; but please don’t question me.” 

“ The time for questiOi > is past. Star. I just gave 
you that one last chance. I mean now to act on my 
own initiative.” 

Star left the room. She stood for a minute outside 
in the great hall. This was a half-holiday, and it hap- 
pened to be a pouring wet day. The rain seemed abso- 


ROSE TO THE RESCUE 


3*1 

lutely to stream from the skies; you could scarcely see 
out of the window-panes. The booming of the billows 
outside made a melancholy sound. The girls stood about 
in groups, as was their custom during a wet half-holiday. 
They grumbled at the weather. Who does not? 

Suddenly, however, the appearance of little Rose 
Latimer coming rather timidly downstairs, wearing a 
dark-blue frock and a white pinafore, caused a diversion. 

“ Who is that pretty little girl? ” said Angela Goring. 

Star, who had been standing looking as dismal as a 
girl could, now brightened up. 

“ Oh, that is little Rosy Latimer, a great friend of 
Christian’s. Do let us ask her to come and sit with us 
for a bit. She seems so nice, and is so pretty.” 

'' I don’t know her,” said Angela. “ You go and 
speak to her. Star.” 

A lot of girls were standing about in the hall. 
Amongst them were Susan Marsh and her satellite, Maud 
Thompson. Maud now hardly ever left Susan’s side. 
Susan’s face was gloomy, and at the same time obstinate. 
She looked resolved to go on at any cost, following her 
own sweet will. Maud was thoroughly subdued and 
wretched. The advent of Rose — a person with fresh in- 
terests — on the scene therefore caused an agreeable 
diversion. 

Rose was quite ignorant of the manners of schools 
and the ways of schoolgirls — at least those of the upper 
classes were unknown to her — but she was being rigidly 
brought up by a most aristocratic old woman, for no one 
could have more aristocratic ideas than nurse. She 
dropped her courtesy, therefore, as she had been told to 
do, and smiled with great pleasure when Star invited her 
to come into their midst. 

I am very much obliged, miss,” said Rose, and then 
she dropped another courtesy. 


312 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


“ You needn’t courtesy, Rose,” said Star. ** It’s a wet 
day, and we are all glad to have some sort of diversion. 
Please, sit there, won’t you? — there, in that easy-chair 
near the ingle-nook — and tell us all you can about 
Christian.” 

'‘What is your name, child?” interrupted Susan 
Marsh. 

Rose looked full at Susan, and then knit her pretty 
brows. 

“ I am Rosy Latimer,” she said. “ And my great- 
aunt is Mrs. Peach; and Mrs. Peach is, or was nurse to 
Miss Christian.” 

“ How is Christian, Rose? Is she really getting much 
better? ” asked Star. 

“Yes, miss; I think so. She takes her meals, and 
she sleeps regular; and my aunt says a sick person can’t 
be expected to do more.” 

“ You must have been very glad indeed when you 
were asked to come here in such a hurry — weren’t you? ” 
asked Maud Thompson. “We were surprised when we 
heard that Christian’s old nurse and a little girl were 
coming to look after her. We thought Christian must 
be very ill indeed. You were glad, weren’t you? ” 

“ Well, miss,” said Rose, who, notwithstanding her 
good manners, was by no means troubled with shyness, 
“ my aunt and me, we were more frightened than glad. 
We didn’t know whatever could be up. And aunt, she 
cried most of the way down. She cried very near as 
much as she did that time when me and Miss Christian 
ran away together.” 

“ Oh, you ran away together ! ” said Angela. 

Star suddenly laid her hand on Angela’s knee as 
though to repress her. Susan’s face turned crimson and 
then deadly white. Rose, however, did not notice the 
effect of her words. 


ROSE TO THE RESCUE 


313 


“Ah, we had a time!” she said, and her eyes grew 
full of the recollection. Suddenly she burst into a laugh. 

“What is the matter?” said Star. “How strange 
you look! Why do you laugh?” 

“ I am only thinking of Miss Christian and me, and 
the face of the woman who looked in at the window. 
Oh, weren’t Miss Christian brave!” 

One or two of the other girls had come up, and they 
were now looking intently at Rose. Star, whose first 
impulse it was to prevent Rose from saying anything, 
to keep her silent at any cost, changed her mind. 

“ One moment,” she said. 

She sprang to her feet. Rose immediately sprang to 
hers and dropped a courtesy. 

“ Thank you, young ladies,” said Rose, “ but maybe 
I ought to be going up to my great-aunt, Mrs. Peach. 
She says Fm never to forget my manners. Fm never to 
forget that Fm only a poor little girl, and that you are 
grand young ladies.” 

“ I am sure you are a very nice little girl,” said 
Angela; “ and a very interesting little girl, too. Star, is 
she to go? What do you think?” 

“ I want to see Miss Peacock,” said Star. “ Stay 
here. Rose, till I come back. And, Rose, don’t tell any 
of that interesting, lovely story until I return.” 

Star ran along the corridor. She stood for a moment 
as she approached Miss Peacock’s door. 

“ They wouldn’t tell what they knew, and they 
wouldn’t let Christian tell, and perhaps Rose is going to 
put everything right,” she thought. “ And she could 
give us a really unvarnished statement. She could 
tell us the very, very truth.” 

She burst open the door of Miss Peacock’s room. 
She did not even wait to knock. Miss Peacock was sit- 
ting at her desk. She turned in some amazement when 


314 the manor school 

Star, her eyes shining with excitement, came towards 
her. 

Miss Peacock,’^ said the little girl, you know, don’t 
you, why Christian didn’t come to school with the rest 
of us? I mean, why she came a whole fornight later.” 

I don’t understand you' Star.” 

“Oh, please don’t be angry! You know the whole 
truth, don’t you? ” 

“ Certainly.” 

“And you resolved that it should not be told to the 
school? ” 

“ I thought it best. I do not understand you.” 

“ It wasn’t best,” said Star. “ It is wrong of me to 
say so to you, but I must say it. It was not best. Do 
you know the little girl who has come with Christian’s 
nurse to stay here? ” 

“ A child of the name of Rose Latimer. She is a great 
friend of Christian’s; I sent for her on purpose. Why? ” 

“ Miss Peacock, you gave us leave to have little Rose 
to play with us. She is in the midst of a group of girls 
now in the great hall, and she began of her own accord 
to tell that story that you didn’t wish Christian to tell. 
May she go on with it, and will you come and 
listen?” 

Miss Peacock jumped up suddenly. She looked hard 
at Star just for a minute; then she took her hand. 

“ Come,” she said. 

They entered the hall. At the sight of the head- 
mistress the girls arose and dropped a courtesy, and 
looked more or less unlike themselves, and more or less 
on their good behavior. Even Angela, one of the best of 
girls, remained standing in a respectful attitude, and had 
she been asked to speak, her words would not have come 
with perfect ease. 

But to Rose Miss Peacock was only just a beautiful 


ROSE TO THE RESCUE 


3^5 


lady without any other significance whatever. Rose 
dropped a courtesy, in the correct manner taught her by 
Mrs. Peach, and looked quite easy in her mind. Miss 
Peacock said: 

Will someone place me a chair?” 

One of the girls rushed to get one. Then Miss Pea- 
cock sat in the midst of the group, with Star at her left 
hand and Angela at her right, and she managed so to 
sit that she should be opposite Susan Marsh. Then she 
turned to Rose. 

“ We are in the mood for a story,” she said. We 
have all told each other our stories, and our stories are 
somewhat stale. They relate to school life and school 
adventures. Now we want a story outside of school 
life. Who will tell us one?” 

“ I could if you wished it,” said Rose. 

“ We do wish it, Rose. Will you? ” 

It is Miss Christian’s story,” continued Rose. 

“ Go upstairs. Rose — very, very quietly — and ask 
Christian — very, very quietly — if you may tell her story 
to us. If she says no, you will not tell it us; but if 
she says yes, then you will tell us the wonderful tale.” 

“Oh! it is wonderful and beautiful and everything 
else,” said Rose. “ Yes, I will go upstairs.” 

She ran quickly up the broad stairs, went down the 
White Corridor, and softly opened the door of the room 
where nurse sat by her darling’s bedside. Christian, 
well enough now to be wide awake and smiling, was 
listening to words from the old woman’s lips. 

“ Now, what is it. Rosy? ” said Mrs. Peach. “ What’s 
the matter with you? You do seemed pleased about 
something.” 

“ It’s a message I have to give to Miss Christian,” 
said Rose; “and it’s from the lady they call Miss Pea- 
cock.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


316 

“My word!” cried nurse. “Why, she’s the lady of 
the school; she’s the head-mistress. She’s a sort of 
queen here.” 

“ What is the message? ” asked Christian. 

“ It’s nothing as is to bother Miss Christian,” said 
nurse. “There! you have made her cheeks quite pink. 
What is it, Rose? Out with it.” 

“They want a story,” said Rose. “-There are a lot of 
’em downstairs. Some of ’em are beautiful-looking 
young ladies, and others dull and stupid enough. 
There’s one I didn’t like a bit. I wouldn’t know her if 
I had to live in the slums all my life. They all want a 
story just like any other girls. They know their own 
stories, they say, and they want a new one from me; and 
I thought I’d tell ’em the story of me and you. Miss 
Christian. And Miss Peacock, the grand head-mistress, 
the queen of the place, said: 

“ ‘ Yes, you can tell that story if Christian wishes it. 
If Christian says yes, you may tell it; but if Christian says 
no, you must not tell it. You go up,’ says Miss Peacock, 
‘ and ask her now, and do it very quietly.’ 

“So do you wish it. Miss Christian? Shall I tell the 
story? It ’ll hearten ’em up a good bit; it’s real prime, 
that tale is.” 

“Yes,” answered Christian. She turned away as she 
said the words, but there was a smile in her eyes. “ Yes, 
it will be the way out, and a great, great relief. Tell 
them. Rose, and God bless you!” 

Rose rushed from the room, and the next minute ap- 
peared again in the hall. 

“ Miss Christian looked sadly weak, but she’d like me 
to tell the tale. She thinks it a very, very good plan,” 
said Rose. 

“ Then sit here. Rose,” said Miss Peacock. “ Sit just 
here, facing me, and tell your story exactly in your own 


ROSE TO THE RESCUE 


317 


way, just in the words you like best to use. I am sure 
we shall all listen with great attention.” 

If you please, Miss Peacock,” said Susan Marsh, 
need I stay? I have a letter to write to my father; and 
my exercise for Miss Forest is not half finished.” 

“ Yes, you must stay, Susan,” replied Miss Peacock. 

But my exercise ” 

Never mind that now. Stay. Begin, please. Rose.” 
“ That’s the girl I wouldn’t know if I had to live in 
the slums/’ thought Rose to herself. 

She turned her right shoulder towards Susan, and 
spoke with her face direct towards Miss Peacock. 

“ It’s a wonderful, wonderful story,” she began; and 
maybe there’s a spice of naughtiness in it — I don’t say 
there aint. But there’s something else in it too, and that’s 
a deal of courage. And when it come home to the heart 
of Miss Christian to know that it was wrong, no one 
repented more sincere than she did. And here’s the tale; 
and she wishes me to tell it her own dear self.” 

So Rosy began, and not knowing all the events that 
had taken place in the school, nor the circumstances that 
made that story so great a tragedy, she told it with a 
certain directness that made it extremely effective. She 
told it very simply, too, so that the youngest and small- 
est girl present could understand every word. As for the 
story itself, it was very thrilling, beginning with Chris- 
tian’s experience and the old attic in the Russell Square 
house, going on to the confab that the two girls had when 
they lay side by side in Christian’s snug bed, and proceed- 
ing right up to the time when the two terrified children 
pushed the old bedstead against the door that could not 
be locked. That crucial and awful moment when Mrs. 
Carter tried to get in at the window, and Christian 
boldly kept her back, was described with such vivid 
realism by Rosy that one or two of the young listeners 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


318 

screamed. Rosy also gave with much effect a descrip- 
tion of the scene when the children found themselves in 
the carpenter’s yard. Their terror, their despair when 
Christian discovered that her little bag of money was 
gone, brought down the house, so to speak. Rosy her- 
self did ample justice to the theme. She was quite 
dramatic in her actions. At times she could not keep 
still, but jumped to her feet and pointed out imaginary 
people with her fingers. Sometimes tears rolled down 
her own cheeks, and sighs and almost sobs broke the 
narrative. But when she spoke of the carpenter and his 
mother, the tea the old woman gave the tired and sad 
young girls, and the kindness of the carpenter when he 
walked with them all the way to Russell Square, Miss 
Peacock and her pupils were so much affected that they 
longed to start a subscription on the spot for the worthy 
pair. 

At last the whole story was told, even to that part 
when Miss Thompson and nurse rejoiced and Christian 
was safe back again in the old home. 

As Miss Peacock listened, she wondered much why 
she had never before thought of bringing Rose on the 
scene and making her tell the story. 

“ Thank you. Rose Latimer,” she said when a dead 
silence followed all the excitement. “ You have told 
your tale beautifully; and although it is a tale of wrong- 
doing, there are fine points in it, and those who truly 
repent will always be forgiven by God. Now, will you 
kindly go upstairs to Mrs. Peach? Don’t disturb Chris- 
tian if she is asleep; but if she is awake, say to her that 
we all send to her our dear love. Am I right in giving 
that message, girls? We all, knowing the worst, send 
our dear love to Christian Mitford.” 

“ Certainly — we send our dearest love,” answered two 
or three. 


ROSE TO THE RESCUE 


319 


Even Maud Thompson had given a message. Susan 
alone was silent. 

‘‘ She aint worthy to be even a slum girl,” thought 
Rosy to herself. 

“ Yes, ma’am,” she continued — and she dropped a most 
beautiful courtesy, one that even Mrs. Peach would 
have approved of — “ I will take your message, ma’am. 
And I’m much obliged to all you young ladies. It has 
given me a great deal of pleasure to tell the story of my 
darling Miss Christian and myself.” Then Rose trotted 
upstairs. 

She entered Christian’s room. Christian had little 
spots of color on each cheek, and her eyes were perhaps 
a trifle too bright. 

“ They all took to it most kindly. Miss Christian,” said 
innocent Rose. “ I told them everything from begin- 
ning to end, and I think I done it well; and Miss Pea- 
cock said I was to tell you that they all sent you 
their dearest love. But there’s one girl down there that 
I can’t abide anyhow. I don’t think she sent any mes- 
sage, for I don’t believe for a single moment she knows 
even the meaning of love. But the others did. They’re 
precious fond of you, Miss Christian. I doubt if it was 
worth running away from a school of this sort.” 

“ Oh, it was not, Rosy! Oh, Rosy, I am so relieved! 
They know it all — everything?” 

“ Every single crumb of it. Miss Christian, darling; 
and I did enjoy myself in the telling it.” 


CHAPTER XXX 


A PRISONER IN THE TOOL-HOUSE 

When the story was over and the narrator had gone 
away, Miss Peacock also rose. She stood and faced 
the girls. 

“ There are here,” she said, “ about twenty in all. 
The school contains forty girls, reckoning Christian her- 
self. Christian cannot appear, but I should like the re- 
maining nineteen to come to me. Star Lestrange, my 
dear, will you fetch the entire school into the hall?” 

Star rushed off. Once again Susan looked as though 
she wished to escape, but to do so she would have had to 
pass Miss Peacock, and she knew, therefore, that her 
effort would be useless. 

Star was not long in collecting the school, and when 
they trooped in Miss Peacock remarked: 

“ Stand round me, my dears ; I have something to 
say.” 

They collected in a group. Miss Peacock stood at 
one side of a wide circle. 

“ My dear girls, you all know how ill Christian Mil- 
ford has been. You know that from the brink of the 
grave she has been restored to us. Had she died, I can 
scarcely tell you what a fearful blow would have fallen 
upon us all. Not only should we have lost a dear pupil 
and a brave, delightful schoolfellow, but there are cir- 
cumstances attending her illness which would have made 
her death a very terrible matter to us all; for I wish to 
tell you now, girls, that there are some in this school who 

320 


A PRISONER IN THE TOOL-HOUSE 


3 ** 


have not acted kindly to Christian Mitford. Her illness 
has been largely caused by trouble of mind. She came 
here expecting sisterly affection, but from the very first 
she was treated with suspicion. There are some — I 
mention no names as yet — who behaved with cruelty to 
Christian. Had she died, those girls could scarcely 
know a happy moment again. My dear pupils, it has 
doubtless been whispered amongst you that Christian 
Mitford came to this school surrounded by a little mys- 
tery. That is perfectly true. Something happened just 
before she came to school which delayed her 

coming for a fortnight. Full particulars of the 
occurrence were sent to me, and I thought — 

unwisely, as it turns out — that it would be best 
not to acquaint the school with what, it appeared to 
me, did not concern it. As things happened, I was 

wrong. There are girls now standing before me who 

discovered this mystery — I do not know how — and who 
made a handle of it; who blackmailed Christian, a girl 
who had never before been at school, and made her 
thoroughly wretched. What they did I am not prepared 
to say, for a great deal has been concealed from me. 
But I wish to declare to you all who are now present that 
the mystery is cleared up. Twenty of you have heard 
Christian’s story, and each of you twenty girls is per- 
mitted to tell that story to the girls who were not pres- 
ent to hear Rose Latimer’s narrative. I shall have more 
to say by and by. For the present my wish is that every 
girl in Penwerne Manor should know the true reason 
why Christian Mitford was a fortnight late in coming 
to school.” 

Miss Peacock hastily made her way through the group 
of girls. As she passed Susan Marsh she stopped and 
looked at her. 

“ You can now prepare your exercise,” she said, “ and 


322 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


do as you think fit. I think your wings are clipped,” 
she added. I shall have more to say by and by.” 

Never before had Miss Peacock looked so dignified, 
and never before had she said such bitter words as those 
now addressed to Susan Marsh. She left the room and 
went straight to her private sitting room. There she 
rang her bell, and told the servant to ask Miss Jessie 
Jones to come to her at once. 

Jessie appeared within a few minutes. Jessie had not 
been present in the hall when Rose Latimer told Chris- 
tian’s story. The minute she entered the room, how- 
ever, she saw by Lavinia Peacock’s face that something 
had happened. 

Now, Jessie,” she said, you and I have got to clear 
the horizon. Next we have got to rid the school of a 
most pernicious influence. We have got to get to the 
very bottom of a base conspiracy. My dear friend, this 
is not the hour for soft measures or kindness; this is the 
hour when true kindness must be severe. My school 
would cease to be the Penwerne Manor I like to think of 
if certain girls who have acted in a most disgraceful 
manner are not suitably punished.” 

'' Oh, Lavinia! I see you are very angry, and I don’t 
really understand,” said Jessie. ‘‘ Of course, it is fear- 
fully hard about our poor dear Christian; but she is bet- 
ter now. God has saved her life.” 

“ But if she had died, should you or I ever have held 
up our heads again? No, my dear. I will tell you what 
has happened. You know little Rose Latimer? ” 

“Yes; Mrs. Peach’s little grand-niece — a bright, nice 
little girl.” 

“ Little Rose, quite innocently, began to tell the story 
of Christian’s adventure before she came to us to several 
of the girls assembled in the hall.” 

“ But oh ! you didn’t let her 


A prisoner in the tool-house 


323 


“ Let me speak. Star Lestrange — I am really fond of 
dear Star — came to me at once and asked if I would be 
present. I went into the hall. To little Rose I am just 
an ordinary lady; she was not shy of me. I sent 
her up to ask Christian’s permission. The story was told. 
It has now been spread throughout the entire school. 
Some of the girls are very miserable; one girl is very 
angry. Jessie, I take shame to myself for not having 
allowed the child’s adventure to be known from the very 
first. But now, dear, I must, as I said, take measures. 
Sit down, Jessie, and tell me the exact truth with regard 
to the secret society in the midst of the school called 
the Penwernians.” 

Jessie’s face turned very pink; tears filled her eyes. 

Come, Jessie; I must know everything. I gave you 
liberty in the past; I give you none now. Tell me every- 
thing.” 

What little Jessie told she did not know, nor how she 
told it, nor exactly what she said; but Miss Peacock 
listened calmly. After a time, going close to the little 
speaker, she held her hand. When this happened Jessie 
felt that she could tell better than ever. Courage came 
into her; she became certain that Miss Peacock was 
right. She had always adored Lavinia Peacock; now 
she knew that harshness in the real sense of the word 
could never come from those kind lips, nor proceed from 
that true and generous heart. At last Jessie stopped. 

“ I did wrong,” said Miss Peacock when all was fin- 
ished. “I love you, Jessie; you are the greatest com- 
fort I have, but a mistress in my position ought to know 
everything. In the future, dear, we will have just as 
happy a time — nay, a happier time — at Penwerne Manor, 
but we can never allow things to come to such a pass that 
an innocent girl can be willfully tortured by her com- 
panions.” 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


324 

'‘And what about to-night?” said Jessie. 

“At what hour is the feast generally held?” 

“They go to bed, you know, Lavina, apparently just 
as usual, and then they slip away from their rooms. 
Oh, you needn’t think, dear, that I go to bed on those 
nights. Not I! I wait about, just hovering near, to 
be certain that there is no real mischief; and when they 
are snug in their beds, then I retire.” 

“You, dear little, patient Jessie! You have tried to 
act the guardian angel; but the post is too much for 
you, dear. To-night I, Lavinia Peacock, will take your 
place.” 

“ Oh, Lavinia, they would be so frightened — so ter- 
rified — if they saw you ! ” 

“ It is your impression that there is going to be a 
very special feast to-night?” 

“ I did think so, but I am not so sure now. Some pro- 
visions were got in, but for the last two or three days all 
has been quiet.” 

“ Well, dear, to-night I will mount guard. Say noth- 
ing to anyone.” 

Jessie soon afterwards left Miss Peacock’s presence. 
She felt so upset, so terrified, at what she considered her 
betrayal of her darling girl that she had to retire to her 
own room, and did not even appear at tea time. The 
girls, however, were all too excited to notice her ab- 
sence. Christian was the heroine of the hour. 

Next to Christian, Rose took the highest place. 
Wasn’t she pretty? And wasn’t she stanch and true 
and faithful? And wasn’t the adventure itself quite a 
grand sort of affair? And wasn’t Christian really 
brave? 

“ To think that I should ever have doubted her brav- 
ery ! ” thought Star. 

As Star thought in a very penitent way of her own 


A PRISONER IN THE TOOL-HOUSE 


325 


conduct in the past, a hand was put on her arm, 
and looking up, she saw Maud Thompson by her 
side. 

“ Star, I do wish you’d come and speak to her. 
She’s in the bowling-alley, and she’s crying just like any- 
thing. She wouldn’t come in to tea. She says she hates 
everyone in the place.” 

“ Do you mean Susan? ” asked Star. 

^‘Yes — oh, yes! Do come to her! I think she respects 
you if she respects anyone.” 

Star thought for a minute. The rain was still pouring. 
To get to the bowling-alley she had to run down a side- 
walk which was dripping with moisture. Turning her 
skirt over her head, she ran quickly, followed by Maud. 
Susan was standing where an eave from a neighboring 
tool-house slightly protected her. Her handkerchief 
was pressed to her eyes ; she was bending forward. As 
Star drew near she heard her very audible sobs. 

“Are you sorry, Susan?” said Star. 

“I sorry? No. Go away; don’t torture me.” 

“ Oh, Susan! I said I would bring her, and you said 
you’d listen to her. Here’s the key of the tool-house. 
Let’s open it and go in. We must say something to 
comfort you, Susan. I am an awfully bad girl, but I am 
sorry for you.” 

“ No one is sorry for me,” said Susan. 

“ Oh, yes, someone is. I am, and so is Star.” 

“ If she is going to repent. I’ll try and be sorry,” said 
Star. “ Are you going to repent, Susan? ” 

“ No, I can’t — I won’t. There’s nothing to be done. 
I must go to those girls to-night, and you must come 
with me. I am crying so because everyone has forsaken 
me, for Maud doesn’t wish to come.” 

“ Of course you are not going, Maud,” said Star. 
“ You will just stay with me; yes, you will,’’ 


326 the manor school 

“ No, no; I won’t forsake her,” said Maud. “ Every- 
one else has. I told you, Susy, that if you went I would 
go with you; but I wish you’d give it up. We are cer- 
tain to be discovered.” 

I suppose we are,” said Susan, suddenly stopping 
her tears and looking full at Star. “ I suppose you 
have told. I always knew you would.” 

“ I have not told yet.” 

“Then, you mean to tell?” 

“ Yes, I mean to tell.” 

“ You are certain? ” 

“Yes, I am; I do mean to tell.” 

“When?” 

“ Before you go out at midnight and disgrace us all. 
I shall certainly tell.” 

“ Then you won’t, so there! ” said Susan. 

She suddenly pushed Star forward. There was a 
step, down which the little girl tumbled. Before she 
could recover herself she was firmly locked into the 
tool-house, and Susan and Maud were running back 
to the house. 

“ It was awfully mean of you,” began Maud. “ I 
didn’t think, bad as you are, that you’d do it.” 

“ Yes, I did it. You have promised to come with 
me. She is locked safely in now. She may scream 
as loud as she can and not a soul will hear her there. 
I will let her out again if I come back. Perhaps I’ll 
never come back. Perhaps I’ll stay with Florence Dixie. 
I could write from there to my father. I couldn’t get 
into greater disgrace.” 

“ Then if you stay I’ll stay too,” said Mair’ “ But, oh, 
Susan, I do think you are wicked! ” 

“Never mind now; come upstairs. Let us keep out 
of the way of all the others. We’ll have one last fling — 
one last bit of fun.” 


A PRISONER IN THE TOOL-HOUSE 


327 

One 


A few of the Penwernians were scattered about, 
of them came up and spoke to Susan. 

“ Do you know where Star is? I want her.” 

“ I am not her keeper,” said Susan roughly. 

“ But what about our feast to-night? Are we to 
have it?” 

“ I was going to speak about that,” said Susan, recol- 
lecting herself. “ As that precious Christian Mitford, 
about whom everyone is making such a ridiculous fuss, 
is still very ill, we had best not risk matters. The feast 
is therefore postponed for another week.” 

“ I am glad,” said the girl. I begin to hate the 
Penwernians.” 

Susan walked away. 

“ Now then, Maud, buck up and be cheerful once 
again. We will account for Star’s absence, and you and 
I will have a jolly time.” 


CHAPTER XXXI 


MIDNIGHT AT THE GREENGROCER’S 

The rest of the day passed quietly. Miss Peacock, 
contrary to her usual custorn^ .appeared at late supper 
that evening. She took the head of the longest table, 
and looked from one girl to another. She noticed that 
some were missing, amongst them Susan Marsh, Maud 
Thompson, and Star Lestrange. She was not surprised 
at the absence of the first two, but the absence of the 
younger girl caused her heart to sink even lower than it 
already was in her breast. 

The meal proceeded and came to an end; prayers fol- 
lowed, and then the greater number of the girls dis- 
persed for the night. 

It was about an hour later when Miss Peacock, ac- 
companied by Jessie Jones, went upstairs. They en- 
tered the White Corridor very softly. The door of 
Christian’s room was a little ajar, and Miss Peacock 
was afraid of waking her. By and by she came to the 
foot of the stairs. All was quiet. 

, “ I am sure they are not there to-night. I am sure 

we needn’t go any farther,” whispered Jessie. 

“ I think we will go upstairs to make all safe,” was 
Miss Peacock’s answer. 

So Jessie, who knew the trick of the door, pushed 
it open, and without anyone seeing, they went up the 
creaking stairs and entered the wide front attic. Here 
all looked peaceful and orderly. Miss Jessie gave a 
sigh of relief. 

“ Now, Jessie,” said Miss Peacock, will you go 

338 


MIDNIGHT AT THE GREENGROCERS S 


329 


downstairs? First of all, go straight to Star Lestrange s 
room and ascertain if she is safe in bed; then proceed 
to Maud Thompson’s room and do likewise ; and, finally, 
visit Susan Marsh’s bedroom. Be quick, dear; and if 
by any chance you find that those three beds, or any of 
them-, are vacant, go to my room and fetch me my cloak 
and galoshes. Be as quick as you can.” 

“ Yes,” said Miss Jessie. 

She nodded her head. S}ie felt terribly anxious. She 
even felt a fierce desire, unlike herself, to follow the 
trail, to bring the culprits to justice. Yes, if they were 
wicked enough to do what Miss Peacock feared they had 
done, they ought to be punished. Things must have 
come to a sad pass when Jessie could feel like this, but 
those certainly were her sensations. Lavinia was angry 
— dear, noble Lavinia. Whatever she said and did must 
be right. 

While Jessie was absent Miss Peacock walked round 
the attic. In one corner she saw a basket filled with 
provisions. They none of them looked too fresh, but 
they were certainly there. Near the open window lay 
a piece of paper. Miss Peacock picked it up, and saw 
that it was an untidy-looking envelope, with ‘‘John 
Manners, greengrocer. High Street, Tregellick,” printed 
across the top. Why should this envelope lie on the 
floor of the front attic? She put it carefully into her 
pocket. Then thrusting her head out of the window, 
she saw a ladder, which reached from the ground be- 
neath to within a few feet of the window. Miss Pea- 
cock panted slightly when she saw this; her eyes grew 
bright and hard, and her face looked unlike itself. 

Just at that moment Jessie entered. She was car- 
rying Miss Peacock’s warm cloak on her arm, and 
Miss Peacock’s galoshes were in her hand. She herself 
wore a bonnet and cloak. 


330 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


They Ve none of them in their beds,” she said. “ I 
don’t know what we are to do.” 

“ We will follow them,” said Miss Peacock. 

Follow them? How?’^ 

They have left the attic by means of a ladder. Look 
out, Jessie; you will see for yourself. It is not neces- 
sary for us to use it; we will go by the front door. 
Jessie, think how severely Lavinia Peacock ought to 
blame herself for making this thing possible.” 

“No, no, Lavinia; it is my fault. You will turn me 
from the school after this.” 

“ I blame myself alone,” said Miss Peacock. 

The ladies left the attic, ran downstairs, and let them- 
selves out. 

“They have certainly gone; but where?” said Jes- 
sie. 

“ I found one of our greengrocer’s envelopes on the 
floor. It may give me a necessary clew,” said Miss 
Peacock. “Anyhow, we will visit John Manners this 
evening. Come along, Jessie. We shall reach the house 
in a quarter of an hour.” 

“How the rain did pour! How tired Jessie felt! 
How fast Lavinia walked! How stern was her face 
when Jessie caught a glimpse of it! 

By and by they reached the High Street. The place 
appeared at first to be in total darkness, but presently 
they perceived a cheerful light streaming through closed 
blinds. 

“I was right; they are here,” said Miss Peacock. 
“Oh, Jessie! to think of Star — to think that she could 
have done it. It cuts me to the heart.” 

Poor Jessie had not a word to say. She adored Star, 
but even she could not defend her favorite at this 
moment. 

Miss Peacock suddenly pulled the bell. Presently 


MIDNIGHT AT THE GREENGROCER'S 


33 * 


Manners appeared. He had been smoking in his 
kitchen. He thought it great fun to have the young 
ladies enjoying themselves with his daughters upstairs. 
But when he saw Miss Peacock he stepped back and 
grew very pale. He had certainly not reckoned on the 
head-mistress of the school appearing in person to de- 
mand her runaway scholars. 

“ Some of my young ladies are in your parlor,” 
said Miss Peacock. “ I am obliged to you, Man- 
ners, for treating them so hospitably, but the hour is 
too late for my girls to be from home. I have come 
to take them back. With your permission I will go 
upstairs at once.” 

“ Shall I announce you, ma’am? ” 

‘‘You will oblige me by remaining where you are. 
Come, Jessie.” 

They pushed the little greengrocer aside and went 
upstairs. The fun was at its height. Miss Peacock 
softly opened the door. She saw Florence Dixie hold- 
ing her sides in convulsions of laughter, while Susan, 
lying back on an old Chesterfield sofa, was clapping 
her hands at the attempts of the two Manners girls to 
dance an Irish jig. 

To attempt to describe the confusion, the amaze- 
ment — nay, the despair — which filled the faces of two 
of those girls when they caught sight of Miss Peacock 
would be impossible. Maud gave a bitter cry and fell 
on her knees. A cloud came over Susan’s face; she 
stood upright, her hands hanging to her side. 

“ The fun is up, girls,” she said, turning to her com- 
panions. “ Let’s put out the lights and go home.” 

Making hysterical efforts, she tried to blow out one 
of the candles; but Miss Peacock came up and took 
her hand. 

‘‘Come, Susan; recollect yourself. Don’t give your- 


332 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


self away more than you can help. Come home with 
me this moment.” 

“ Florence, you said you’d keep me,” said Susan. 

“ Oh, but I can’t, really ! ” said Florence, who showed 
the despicable character of the true coward when dif- 
ficulties arose. “ Father would be wild if he knew. 
Please, Miss Peacock, understand that father knows 
nothing of this. It was just a little fun of our own. I 
wouldn’t shelter one of your girls against your will for 
the world.” 

“ Oh, you’re a nice friend,” said Susan — “ a friend to 
be proud of! ” 

I’ll take you home, Susan. And, Maud, you can 
follow with Jessie.” 

Miss Peacock’s face was calm and cold; her words 
came out like morsels of ice. She went downstairs at 
once. Susan put her hat on as fast as she could, and 
Miss Peacock herself stooped to tie her cloak round her 
neck. Then they started on their way home. Maud 
and Jessie, absolutely speechless, followed them. Once 
Maud tried to say something, but she was interrupted. 

‘‘Don’t, don’t! It is best to let her have her own 
way now. Oh! you have cut her to the heart, and she 
is such a dear — so noble.” 

The moment they reached the hall Miss Peacock said : 

“ There are three girls absent from their bedrooms 
to-night. Two of them are here, but where is Stella 
Lestrange? ” 

Then Maud fell on her knees. 

“ I don’t expect you to forgive us. We ” 

“ Don’t screen me,” said Susan. “ If I am bad, I 
am at least not ashamed of it. I was determined to have 
that frolic. I hate your close ways. I hate everything 
about this school. I want to leave to-morrow; I can’t 
go away too soon. But I was determined to have my 


MIDNIGHT AT THE GREENGROCER’S 


333 


frolic to-night. Star was equally determined that we 
should not go, so I locked her up in the tool-house. 
Maud was forced to help me, but she didn’t approve. 
You needn’t scold Maud. When she is with good girls 
she will be all right; and I shall leave in the morning.” 

“ Where did you say you locked Star up? ” said Miss 
Peacock. 

“ In the tool-house.” 

Thank you.” 


CHAPTER XXXII 


THE TRIUMPH OF GOODNESS 

Early — very early — on the following: morning, those 
girls who happened to be awake might have heard sounds 
of wheels on the gravel sweep without the house. They 
might have heard hurried steps going down the corridor; 
and had they chosen to rise from their beds and look out 
of the windows, they would have perceived a lady and a 
girl get into a cab. They would have seen some boxes 
being put on the roof, and the cab, with the lady and 
girl inside, leaving the place. 

When school did resume its ordinary functions on that 
unhappy day Miss Eorest read prayers; and when pray- 
ers were over she said quite simply: 

“Miss Peacock will not attend school to-day; and 
Susan Marsh has left. Matters will be explained to you 
to-morrow.” 

So the day dragged on. Star’s face was very white; 
her head ached. She had taken a bad cold in the tool- 
house. 

As to Maud, she shrank into a corner. 

“ Of course, I shall be dismissed. I can’t expect Miss 
Peacock to keep me any longer,” was her thought. 

Late that evening Miss Peacock returned; and on the 
next morning, when prayers were over, she asked the 
girls to remain. 

“ I have a few words to say,” she remarked. “ I have 
a very painful matter to explain to you all. Girls, one 


334 


THE TRIUMPH OF GOODNESS 


335 


of your schoolfellows has, I grieve to say, been removed 
from the school. I am most unhappy about her, but in 
justice to you all I could not allow her to remain here 
any longer. Not only did she sin against the rules of 
rectitude and honor and honesty in this place; not only 
did she willfully disobey my wishes; but she did not re- 
pent. I do not think, girls, that there is any sin a 
schoolgirl could commit that I should not forgive if re- 
pentance followed. But this unhappy girl has not 
repented. I was obliged to take her back to her father, 
and a terrible and most bitter scene we had together. 
What he will do with Susan in the future I do not know; 
but as far as Penwerne Manor is concerned, she has left 
it forever.’’ 

A cry came from the lips of Mary Hillary. 

Her companions,” continued Miss Peacock, looking 
full at Maud and also at Mary, ‘‘will understand that 
underhand ways are to be altogether abolished in the 
school; and because the Penwernian Society has led to 
evil and not good, I wish to announce here that there 
will no longer be such a society in the school. As to 
you, Maud Thompson, have you anything to say? If 
so, come forward. You at least, I know, have re- 
pented.” 

“ Oh, I have ! I am bitterly sorry. 1 know that you 
won^t keep me. I can’t expect it. I was led by Susan. 
I feared her; I was so weak. I loved Star all the time, 
but I didn’t dare to go with her, for I dreaded Susan 
Marsh so much. I was deceitful; I did what Susan told 
me. I have nothing more to say, except that I am bit- 
terly sorry. I suppose,” added Maud, the tears stream- 
ing from her eyes, “ that you will send me from the 
school.” 

“ What is the wish of the majority? ” asked Miss Pea- 
cock, glancing round at the other girls. 


336 


THE MANOR SCHOOL 


‘‘ Oh, Miss Peacock,” said Louisa Twining, if she is 
sorry ” 

“ Yes, Louisa?” 

** If she is sorry,” repeated Louisa, and would con- 
sent for a little bit to be my friend — I mean, if she 
would sit in my boudoir, and I might get her to share 
some of the interests in my life — would you? ” 

Louisa’s delicate face changed from white to pink, and 
then from pink to white again. 

“Would I what, Louisa dear?” 

“Would you give her a chance?” 

“Louisa!” said Maud. 

She ran up to her side. She fell on her knees, clasped 
Louisa’s long, white hand, and kissed it with passion. 

“ Will you be responsible for her, Louisa? ” 

“ Maud, look at me,” said Louisa. 

Maud did look up. 

“ I think I may safely say that I will.” 

“ Then she shall be your child for the remainder of 
this term. You will teach her what things are right, 
what things are honorable, what things are of good re- 
pute. And now, girls, let us turn from an unpleasant 
subject. It is necessary sometimes to weed what is 
really bad cut of life, out of school. I would have kept 
Susan Marsh had it been possible. As it was impos- 
sible, those who believe in prayer will, I hope, pray for 
her that God may show her the error of her ways. She 
has gone, and with her the misery, the discomfort, the 
prying, the unkindness, which such conduct as hers 
could not but promote. Christian Mitford is out of 
danger, and I hope that ere long she will be among 
you again. She has been far from good; but who is 
perfect? If she did wrong. Star, there were moments 
when you might have been more generous, kinder, less 
inclined to think well of yourself. Each of you girls 


THE TRIUMPH OF GOODNESS 


337 


who stand before me must own to weaknesses as well as 
to virtues. I think, my dear girls, that the virtues do 
preponderate; and I think in the future there will be no 
school in the whole of England that will be a happier 
one than Penwerne Manor."’ 


THE END 




■«' • . 






j 

V 


* 

" 1 . 


^.' -■: *'^,'K. •■■■ ■ ,i , ,r >^‘v :i 'w'l..- ^<^'V 

- ' "•■• c-^- -'’X' v--^' • ‘•‘- • '^> •'-■' V. ■^.Vv . ?V*. . 

^ i,M.J 


i^‘' ■..;.jC<f.,v... 

’’•♦» . ’* iT 


. • 


r » 

f (. 


>y 


» 1 » 


- - 


J 


' ► 


* ."■ ‘ ‘ . .li ■* - 

• i-- *• ' ' \ ;•' • ^ * 

: < *"r ‘ .' *'•:.• • , ^ . - 

■ ''-V- 

;:■ '•'. v^/ .^. -v, ^,'> ’.jt ' - v^ ■ ‘ ■ • 


V 1 




J 

V-. 


^ « 


•A 




■ .: • * V ' • - ••*> .* ,s- . ■•'•■ • . »" :z ; ^ 


< , 




i ^ 


\ •■ 




w - '*• s'. -. •• ^ » ^ - 

YJ • ..■-■>•. •• vt.'- ■.:• ^ 'r-,^'" . ^ .. • , • 

^ r .■ •■ - • •" .;y- '-'^U - 

..s^' .;,;V yiy^^:- -V ;, -,„ - ^ -'- ' .;;r . ' !; 

■‘\ • ■*^ *in • ■ ■■' c’--- '. .k'- f *'v^. 

1 * * Ti'-SV"! **_ • «.• I • 


k i 
« 




■*fc ’ . . » • • . - * ' I ■ ’ 


-r ■' 



.y - - , • - • 


- Ti j , 

<i. ..J />■' : 

■V. * ' • . . t ■ 

<•. 


•f • 
■"»' 


. ■ • . t • ' • . / > * 

^ ’kr' 

• ‘--^ . -• A 

' 1 . -'■ • v^k^U (-4 *'»■ ., ■ • *. T^V, ,;>»4 

. - V .{^ ' L * ', ■ * J V. . • - ' < * ^ -* • • 


■X***-. ^' ■ 

, i;rv-w.LB Ag ’OS • 

* ^ ^ • • • ^ ♦ 


r . 

<# 



•» 





% 

\ 


- • 

< 

» / 







<1 


.t k 













Library of 



000207t, 




